You are on page 1of 305

How to impress Interviewer in Interview?

Some dos and dont when you are going for your interview

Do you remember your first day in college? Your first motorcycle? Youre first
Mercedes? And most importantly your first Job interview?


Hey, we always remember the thing which we do for first time. And most
importantly we also remember the effort, pain; planning etc we do for that first
thing. There is always a first time for everything and so with the job interviews.
In our life our first job is as important as our first job interview. We always learn
every right from womb to the tomb. In India, every year more than 30 lakhs
people pass out from their colleges, with a goal to enter in a good job, good
professional life and this is the time when a student enters into the world of
reality.
Its very important for one to prepare for their first job interview as we do when
first time we go on a date. So the big question arises, how you will do that? (I am
talking about job interview)
Being in HR vertical I have personally interviewed many people right from a
fresher to people who were having more experience than my total age. From my


experience I have learnt what as a recruiter I like and here are some of the five
most important things that you should do when you are going for your first job
interview.

1. Collect information about the company and job where you are going.:-
2. Be on time for the interview: -
3. Dress properly:-
4. Body Language: -
5. This is your last job interview:-
or
This is not your last job interview

1. Collect information about the company and job where you are going.:-
Before going for any interview, the first thing that you should do is to know about
the company where you are going. Make sure you know following things about
the company:-
a)Company name and the name of important management people.
b)In which business / industry the company is and who are main players in that
industry.
c)About the job you are going to do (If you get the job description before
interview).
d)Basic Knowledge about the industry in which company falls.
e)Major clients of the company. (If you can find it)
The above list is not the final one there are many more thing which you can find
about a company. This information will increase your confidence, create an
impression about you that you really want this job and associated with the
company.
Source of Information:
a)Internet (search engines).
b)Companys official website.
c)Your friends who may be working in that company.
d)The Placement agency who may have lined up for interview in that company.



2. Be on time for the interview: -
Punctuality is must at the time when you are going for an interview, unless and
until there are some major problem. Always plan and keep spare time with you to
reach the destination on time. But keep on thing in mind, even reaching one hour
or two before interview timing is also not good. This makes you more nervous and
most of the time you start feeling bore, so when you actually enter in interview
cabin you feel exhausted and sleepy. And you tell me who needs a sleepy horse
for the race.

3. Dress properly:-
Clothes are very important because its increase the confidence level of a person
and make him / her comfortable. Always look good and be confident because the
person on the chair in front of you always creates a first impression about you
from your dress, dressing style, body language.
Dos For males: Shirt and trouser are the preffered one in India.
For Female: Shirt and trouser or salwaar kameej.
Dont: Dont wear jeans, t- shirts or revealing clothes. Dont put strong perfume
on your cloths. Dont have too much accessories on your body.
4. Body Language: -
Your interview starts from the moment you enter in the cabin as interviewer
starts analyzing you body language. Before entering the interviewer cabin always
take permission from the interviewer to come in. Maintain a proper eye contact
(please dont stare) and listen carefully what he is saying and show your interest
in that. The best why you can show your interest is lean little bit forward, hand
movements, if you dont understand any point ask it (but dont ask every time to
repeat the sentence). Always be calm do not speak like a jet plane, take your time
and think before giving any answer (but dont ask for the time to think. You have
to run your brain like a jet plane).
Dont keep your hands on table and cross your legs.



5. This is your last job interview:-
Keep in mind you have to get this job, there is no other option for you, so at any
cost you have to get this job. This feeling and attitude will help you in giving your
150% in the interview and you will be more confident will do everything; give
right answer for cracking the interview.

This is not your last job interview
Whenever you are going for an interview always make a statement in your mind
that this is not your last job of your life this feeling give you the confidence to
express yourself completely in front of the interviewer. It removes nervousness
and help you in presenting what you are. Learn to fail because that gives you the
confidence for the next time.

NOTE: I have given two options above; as I fell everyone is having different
behavior and thought. Its on you to decide which option you want to select.

The above mentioned points are just some of the few things that you should do
before going for an interview. There are many other things which one can dobut
if you follow the above mentioned requirements it will considerably improve your
selection chances.
So, I am sure you will crack your job interview.

How to prepare for an oracle apps interview

Preparation for an interview is very important. Even your dressing and
appearance counts. I have few tips which could help you get some edge in your
interview.





I have conducted many interviews in my previous organization; I have even
attended many interviews. So, I could tell you what the interviewers expect from
you when you apply for the role of an oracle apps techno functional consultant.

You have to prepare yourself in the following topics:

1. You have to be strong in PL/SQL. There are some set of standard
questions in pl/sql that every interviewer will ask. Refer the
following Oracle Apps Interview Questions:
2. Say, you worked in oracle order management then you have to know
the following flows in details along with the table involved in the process
a. Order to Cash flow
b. Drop ship process
c. RMA process
d. Internal Sales order process
e. Back to Back order process
3. If you have not worked on R12, then you need to even prepare on
the new feature of R12.
4. Questions will be asked on RICE components that youve already
worked on.
5. Last but not least, your communication skills & the level of
confidence you show will add to your performance.





Oracle apps PLSQL interview questions - 1


1. Difference b/w procedure and function? A procedure may return
(one or more values using OUT & INOUT Parameters) or may not return a
value. But a function has to return a single value and has the return clause
in its definition. Function can be called in select statements but procedure
can only be called in a pl/sql block. Procedure's parameters can have IN or
OUT or INOUT parameters. But function's parameters can only have IN
parameters.
2. Difference b/w ROWID and ROWNUM? ROWID : It gives the
hexadecimal string representing the address of a row.It gives the location in
database where row is physically stored. ROWNUM: It gives a sequence
number in which rows are retrieved from the database.
3. Give some examples of pseudo columns? NEXTVAL, CURRVAL,
LEVEL, SYSDATE
4. Difference b/w implicit cursor and explicit cursor? Implicit cursors
are automatically created by oracle for all its DML stmts. Examples of
implicit cursors: SQL%FOUND, SQL%NOTFOUND, SQL%ROWCOUNT,
SQL%ISOPEN; Explicit cursors are created by the users for multi row select
stmts.
5. How to create a table in a procedure or function? See the below
piece of code: Since create stmt can be used only at the sql prompt, we
have used dynamic sql to create a table.
DECLARE
L_STMT VARCHAR2(100);
BEGIN
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('STARTING ');
L_STMT := 'create table dummy1 (X VARCHAR2(10) , Y NUMBER)';


EXECUTE IMMEDIATE L_STMT;
DBMS_OUTPUT.PUT_LINE('end ');
END;
The above piece of code can be written In procedure and function DDL's can be
used in function provided that function should be invoked in Begin-End block not
from Select statement.

6. Explain the usage of WHERE CURRENT OF clause in cursors ? Look at
the following pl/sql code:
DECLARE
CURSOR wip_cur IS
SELECT acct_no, enter_date
FROM wip
WHERE enter_date < SYSDATE -7
FOR UPDATE;
BEGIN
FOR wip_rec IN wip_cur
LOOP
INSERT INTO acct_log (acct_no, order_date)
VALUES (wip_rec.acct_no, wip_rec.enter_date);

DELETE FROM wip
WHERE CURRENT OF wip_cur;
END LOOP;
END;
"WHERE CURRENT OF" has to be used in concurrence with "FOR UPDATE" in the
cursor select stmt.
"WHERE CURRENT OF" used in delete or update stmts means, delete/update the
current record specified by the cursor.
By using WHERE CURRENT OF, you do not have to repeat the WHERE clause in the
SELECT statement.

7. What is the purpose of FORUPDATE? Selecting in FOR UPDATE mode
locks the result set of rows in update mode, which means that row cannot
be updated or deleted until a commit or rollback is issued which will release
the row(s). If you plan on updating or deleting records that have been


referenced by a Select For Update statement, you can use the Where
Current Of statement.
8. What is RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR? The
RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR is a procedure defined by Oracle that allows
the developer to raise an exception and associate an error number and
message with the procedure other than just Oracle errors. Raising an
Application Error With raise_application_error
9.
DECLARE
num_tables NUMBER;
BEGIN
SELECT COUNT(*) INTO num_tables FROM USER_TABLES;
IF num_tables < 1000 THEN
/* Issue your own error code (ORA-20101) with your own error
message.
Note that you do not need to qualify raise_application_error with
DBMS_STANDARD */
raise_application_error(-20101, 'Expecting at least 1000 tables');
ELSE
NULL; -- Do the rest of the processing (for the non-error case).
END IF;
END;
/
The procedure RAISE_APPLICATION_ERROR lets you issue user-
defined ORA- error messages from stored subprograms. That way, you can
report errors to your application and
avoid returning unhandled exceptions.
9. What is mutating error? Mutating error occurs in the following
scenario:
WHEN WE ARE UPDATING A TABLE (TRIGGER WRITTEN ON A TABLE FOR UPDATE)
AND AT THE SAME TIME TRYING TO RETRIEVE DATA FROM THAT TABLE. IT WILL
RESULT INTO MUTATING TABLE AND IT WILL RESULT INTO MUTATING ERROR.

10. Can we have commit/rollback in DB triggers? Having Commit /
Rollback inside a trigger defeats the standard of whole transaction's
commit / rollback all together. Once trigger execution is complete then only
a transaction can be said as complete and then only commit should take


place. If we still want to carry out some action which should be initiated
from trigger but should be committed irrespective of trigger completion /
failure we can have AUTONOMUS TRANSACTION. Inside Autonomous
transaction block we can have Commit and it will act as actual
commit.
11. Can we make the trigger an autonomous transaction? This makes all
the difference because within the autonomous transaction (the trigger),
Oracle will view the triggering table as it was before any changes
occurredthat is to say that any changes are uncommitted and the
autonomous transaction doesnt see them. So the potential confusion
Oracle normally experiences in a mutating table conflict doesnt exist.
12. What is autonomous transaction? Autonomous transaction means a
transaction that is embedded in some other transaction, but functions
independently.
13. What is a REF Cursor? The REF CURSOR is a data type in the Oracle
PL/SQL language. It represents a cursor or a result set in Oracle Database.
14. What is the difference between ref cursors and normal pl/sql
cursors?
Declare
type rc is ref cursor;
cursor c is
select * from dual;
l_cursor rc;
begin
if ( to_char(sysdate,'dd') = 30 ) then
open l_cursor
for select * from emp;
elsif ( to_char(sysdate,'dd') = 29 ) then
open l_cursor
for select * from dept;
else
open l_cursor
for select * from dual;
end if;
open c;
end;


Given that block of code you see perhaps the most "salient" difference, no matter
how many times you run that block The cursor C will always be select * from
dual. The ref cursor can be anything.

15. Is Truncate a DDL or DML statement? And why? Truncate is a DDL
statement. Check the LAST_DDL_TIME on USER_OBJECTS after truncating
your table. TRUNCATE will automatically commit, and it's not rollback able.
This changes the storage definition of the object. That's why it is a DDL.
16. What are the actions you have to perform when you drop a
package? If you rename a package, the other packages that use it will have
to be MODIFIED. A simple compilation of the new renamed package won't
do. If you have toad, go to the "used by" tab that will show you the
packages that call the package being renamed.
17. What is cascading triggers? When a trigger fires, a SQL statement
within its trigger action potentially can fire other triggers, resulting in
cascading triggers.
18. What are materialized views? A materialized view is a database
object that stores the results of a query (possibly from a remote database).
Materialized views are sometimes referred to as snapshots.
19. Example
If the materialized view will access remote database objects, we need to
start by creating a database link to the remote DB:

CREATE DATABASE LINK remotedb
CONNECT TO scott IDENTIFIED BY tiger
USING 'orcl';

Now we can create the materialized view to pull in data (in this example,
across the database link):

CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW items_summary_mv
ON PREBUILT TABLE
REFRESH FORCE AS
SELECT a.PRD_ID, a.SITE_ID, a.TYPE_CODE, a.CATEG_ID,


sum(a.GMS) GMS,
sum(a.NET_REV) NET_REV,
sum(a.BOLD_FEE) BOLD_FEE,
sum(a.BIN_PRICE) BIN_PRICE,
sum(a.GLRY_FEE) GLRY_FEE,
sum(a.QTY_SOLD) QTY_SOLD,
count(a.ITEM_ID) UNITS
FROM items@remotedb a
GROUP BY a.PRD_ID, a.SITE_ID, a.TYPE_CODE, a.CATEG_ID;

Materialized view logs:
Materialized view logs are used to track changes (insert, update and
delete) to a table. Remote materialized views can use the log to speed-
up data replication by only transferring changed records.
Example:
CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW LOG ON items;
20. Commonly occurring Errors in Reports?
Some of the errors are defined below
1. There Exists uncompiled unit: When the report is not compiled before
loading in the Oracle Applications.
2. Report File not found: When the rdf is not uploaded in proper directory
3. Width or margin is zero: When the repeating frame is not within proper
frames
4. Not in proper group: When the repeating frame is not referred to proper
group
21. What is the difference between Compile and Incremental Compile in
oracle reports?
In Full compile all the PL/SQL within the reports are compiled but in
incremental compile only the changed PL/SQL units are compiled.
When compiling the report for the first time, we should do the full
compilation and not the Incremental compile.

22. How to compile Procedures and Packages?


ALTER <proc/package> <name>COMPILE;



















Oracle apps PLSQL interview questions - 2


1) What is ERP? A packaged business software system that lets a company
automate and integrate the majority of its business processes; share common
data and practices across the enterprise; [and] produce and access information in


a real-time environment.


2) Tell me some thing about SQL-LOADER? Sql * loader is a bulk loader utility
used for moving data from external files into the oracle database.
Sql * loader supports various load formats, selective loading, and multi-tables
loads.

Conventional: The conventional path loader essentially loads the data by using
standard insert statement.
Direct: The direct path loader (direct = true) by possess of logic involved with that,
and loads directly in to the oracle data files.
EX:-
My data.csv file
1001, scott tiger,1000,40
1002,oracleapps4u,2345,50
Load data
Infile c:\data\mydata.csv
Into table emp
Fields terminated by , optionally enclosed by
(empno, empname,sal,deptno)
>sqlldr scott/tiger@vis
control=loader.ctl log= gvlog.log bad=gvbad.bad discard=gvdis.dsc .

3) How to dump data from pl/sql block to flat files? Using utl_file package, we
can dump data from pl/sql block to flat file.
PRE-REQUIREMENTS for UTL_FILE is specify the accessible directories for
theUTL_FILE function in the initialization file (INIT.ORA) Using the UTL_FILE_DIR
parameters.
Ex: UTL_FILE_DIR = <Directory name>

EX:- remember to update INITSID.ORA, utl_file_dir = c:\oradata
Declare
Fp utl_file.file_type;
Begin


Fp := utl_file.fopen(c:\oradata,tab1.txt,w);
Utl_file.putf(fp,%s %s \n text field, 55);
Utl_file.fclose(fp);
End;
4) What is SET-OF-BOOKS? Collection of Chat of Accounts and Currency and
Calendars is called SOB

5) What is the interface Table? Interface Table is a table which is used as
medium for transfer of data between two systems.

6) What is invoice? A request sent for payment

7) What is INBOUND and OUT BOUND? (Different types of interfaces)
Inbound Interface:
For inbound interfaces, where these products are the destination, interface tables
as well as supporting validation, processing, and maintenance programs are
provided.
Outbound Interface:
For outbound interfaces, where these products are the source, database views
are provided and the destination application should provide the validation,
processing, and maintenance programs.

8) What are the Base tables in the AR? Check the following blog post for AR
base tables: http://oracleapps4u.blogspot.com/2011/07/oracle-apps-account-
receivable-tables.html

9) What are the interface tables of the customer conversion? Check the
following blog post for interface tables in customer
conversion:http://oracleapps4u.blogspot.com/2011/07/interfaces-and-
conversions-in-oracle.html

10) What is the procedure to develop an interface?
First we will get the Requirement document.
We will create control file based on that plot file.


Then the control files which loads the data into staging tables.
Through pl/sql programs we will mapping and validate the data and then
dump into the interface tables.
Through the standard programs we will push the data from interface tables to
Base tables.
11) What are the validations in customer interface?
customer name : The same customer reference cant have different customer
names with in this table HZ_PARTIES.PARTY_NAME
customer number: must be null if your r using automatic customer numbering,
must exit if you are not using automatic customer numbering. This value much be
unique with in HZ_PARTIES
customer status : must be A for active or I for inactive
HZ_PARTIES_STATUS
bank account num or bank account currency code :
if the bank a/c already exist do not enter a value
if the bank a/c does not exist you must enter a value
bank a/c name : it must exist in AP_BANK_ACCOUNTS or if it does not exist
values must exist for BANK_A/C_CURRENCY_CODE
BANK_A/C_NUM
BANK_NAME
BANK_BRANCH_NAME
Note : every interface table has two error msg
1) Error code.
2) Error msg.
12) How to submit a concurrent program from sql or pl/sql code?
FND_REQUEST.SUBMIT_REQUEST (PO,EXECUTABLE NAME,,,,
PARAMETERS)
13) List out some APIs?
FND_FILE.PUTLINE(FND_FILE.LOG)
FND_FILE.PUTLINE(FND_FILE.OUTPUT)
14) What are profile options?
It is some set of options based on which the Functional and Technical behavior
of Oracle Applications depends.

EX: - I want to assign the user3 responsibility to p4 printer then


System Administrator > Profile System
(FND_PROFILE_OPTIONS)
15) What are the User PARAMETERS in the Reports?
P_CONC_REQUEST_ID
P_FLEX_VALUE
16) What are FND USER EXITS in oracle reports?

Check the following blog post for user exits in oracle reports:
http://oracleapps4u.blogspot.com/2011/06/what-are-user-exits-in-oracle-
reports.html
17) What are the two parameters that are mandatory for pl/sql type
concurrent prog?
Procedure/Function (ERRBUF OUT, RETCODE OUT)
ERRBUF: Used to write the error message to log or request file.
RETCODE: Populate log request file with program submission details
info.
18) What are different validation types in value sets?
1) None ------validation is minimal.
2) Independent ------ input must exist on previously defined list of values
3) Dependent------ input is checked against a subset of values based on a
prior value.
3) Table ----- input is checked against values in an application table
4) Special ------values set uses a flex field itself.
5) Pair ------ two flex fields together specify a range of valid values.
6) Translatable independent ----- input must exist on previously defined list
Of values; translated values can be used.
7) Translatable dependent ------ input is checked against a subset of values
Based on a prior values; translated value can be used.
19) What is the sequence of execution of different clause in a select
statement? Check out the following blog post for
detailed explanation: http://oracleapps4u.blogspot.com/2011/08/sequence-of-
sql-statement-processed.html
20) Form development process?
1. open template form
2. Save as <your form>.fmb


3. Change the form module name as form name.
4. Delete the default blocks, window, and canvas
5. Create a window.
6. Assign the window property class to window
7. Create a canvas (subclass info)
8. Assign canvas property class to the canvas
9. assign the window to the canvas and canvas to the window
10. Create a data block
11. Modify the form level properties. (sub class item Text item)
12. Modify the app_custom package in the program unit.
13. Modify the pre-form trigger (form level)
14. Modify the module level properties ((console window, First navigation
15. Save and compile the form.
16. Place the .fmx in the server directory.
17. Register in the AOL
APPLICATION -> FORM
APPLICATION -> FUNCTION
APPLICATION -> MENU
21) How to customize the Reports?
Identify the Short name of the report and the module in which we have to
place the customization
Ex: - if you want to customize in the AR module, path is
Appl top\ar\11.5.0\reports\US\ .rdf
FTP back the file to the local system in Binary mode
Open the .rdf file in Report builder and change the name of the module.
Open the data model and Layout mode, perform all the required changes.
Go to report wizard and select the newly created columns.
Compile it. Save it.
Then Register in the AOL Concurrent > executable.
Concurrent > program.
Go to system administrator Security > Responsibility > request
Add and assign a concurrent program to a request group

22) List some report names in oracle apps?


1) OPEN-DEBIT MEMO REPORT?
This report shows all the open-debit memo transactions, based
oncustomer number and dates.
Columns: type, customer_no, trx_no, amt_due, remaining.
Parameter: type, customer, from_date, to_date.
2) GENERATING POSITIVE PAY FILE FOR BANK REPORT?
Basically this report generates a flat file of all the payments in order to send in to
the bank.
3) UPDATE POSITIVE PAY CHECKS REPORT?
This report which updates the data into the (AP) account payables system from
the plot file, the file which is sent by bank
4) UPDATE POSITIVEPAY OUT STANDING CHECKS?
This report which shows the out standing checks
5) CUSTOMER PAYMENT DETAILS REPORT?
This report shows each customer original amount, amount pay and due amount
based on transaction type (books, pens)

Transaction types in AR
Credit memo transaction types
Invoice, debit memo, and charge back transaction types
Commitment transaction types

23) HOW DO YOU RECTIFY THE ERRORS IN INTERFACE TABLES?
Depending on the naming convention used, errors appear in either alphabetical
order or by error code number.

24) What are WHO Columns in oracle apps tables?
1) Created by
2) Creation date
3) Last _updated by
4) last_update_date
5) last_update_value
25) What are FLEX FIELDS?
Flexfields are used to capture the additional business information.
DFF KFF
Additional Unique Info, Mandatory


Captured in attribute prefixed
columns
Segment prefixed
Not reported on standard
reports
Is reported on standard reports
To provide expansion space on
your form With the help of []. []
Represents descriptive Flex
field.

FLEX FILED : DESCRIPTIVE :
REGIGSTER
Used for entering and displaying
key information
For example Oracle General
uses a key Flex field called
Accounting Flex field to
Uniquely identifies a general
account.
FLEX FILED : KEY : REGIGSTER

Oracle Applications KEY FLEX FIELDS
1) GL: ACCOUNTING
2) AR: SALES TAX LOCATION, TERRITORY,
3) AP: BANK DETAILS, COST ALLOCATION, PEOPLE GROUP
Oracle Applications DESCRIPTIVE FLEX FIELDS (Partial)
1) GL: daily rates
2) AR: credit history, information
3) PA: bank branch, payment terms, site address,
26) What are different concurrent requests?
a) Single request: this allows you to submit an individual request.
b) Request set: this allows you to submit a pre-defined set of requests.
27) What are the activities in Sys Admin Module?
a) Define Custom Users, b) Define Login Users, c) Register oracle DB users,
d) Define Concurrent Programs, e) Register Concurrent Executable,
f) Setting Profile Option Values, g) Define Request Types.
28) What activities can be performed in AOL?
a) Registering tables. b) Registering views c) Registering db sequences
d) Registering profile options e) Registering lookups and lookup codes
f) Registering forms g) Registering Form and Non-Form functions
i) Registering menus and sub-menus j) Registering DFF and KFF k) Libraries
29) What are the type Models in the system parameters of the report?
1) Bit map 2) Character mode


30) What is SRW Package?(Sql Report Writer): The Report builder Built in package
know as SRW Package This package extends reports ,Control report execution,
output message at runtime, Initialize layout fields, Perform DDL statements used
to create or Drop temporary table, Call User Exist, to format width of the
columns, to page break the column, to set the colors


Ex: SRW.DO_SQL, Its like DDL command, we can create table, views , etc.,
SRW.SET_FIELD_NUM
SRW. SET_FILED_CHAR
SRW. SET FILED _DATE

Check the blog post for more details
on SRW Package:http://oracleapps4u.blogspot.com/search/label/SRW%20Packag
e

31) Difference between Bind and Lexical parameters?
BIND VARIABLE:
-- are used to replace a single value in sql, pl/sql
-- Bind variable may be used to replace expressions in select, where, group, order
by, having, connect by, start with cause of queries.
-- Bind reference may not be referenced in FROM clause (or) in place of
reserved words or clauses.
LEXICAL REFERENCE:
-- You can use lexical reference to replace the clauses appearing AFTER select,
from, group by, having, connect by, start with.
-- You cant make lexical reference in a pl/sql statement.

32) Matrix Report: Simple, Group above, Nested
Simple Matrix Report : 4 groups
1. Cross Product Group
2. Row and Column Group
3. Cell Group
4. Cell column is the source of a cross product summary that
Becomes the cell content.
Frames:
1. Repeating frame for rows (down direction)


2. Repeating frame for columns (Across)
3. Matrix object the intersection of the two repeating frames

33) What is Flex mode and Confine mode?
Confine mode:
On: child objects cannot be moved outside their enclosing parent objects.
Off: child objects can be moved outside their enclosing parent objects.
Flex mode:
On: parent borders "stretch" when child objects are moved against them.
Off: parent borders remain fixed when child objects are moved against
them.

34) What is Place holder Column?
A placeholder is a column is an empty container at design time. The placeholder
can hold a value at run time has been calculated and placed in to It by pl/sql code
from anther object. You can set the value of a placeholder column is in a Before
Report trigger. Store a Temporary value for future reference. EX. Store
the current max salary as records are retrieved.

35) What is Formula Column? A formula column performs a user-defined
computation on another column(s) data, including placeholder columns.

36) What is a Summary column?
A summary column performs a computation on another column's data. Using the
Report Wizard or Data Wizard, you can create the following summaries: sum,
average, count, minimum, maximum, % total. You can also create a summary
column manually in the Data Model view, and use the Property Palette to create
the following additional summaries: first, last, standard deviation, variance.

37) What is cursor?
A Cursor is a pointer, which works on active set, I.e. which points to only one row
at a time in the context areas ACTIVE SET. A cursor is a construct of pl/sql, used
to process multiple rows using a pl/sql block.

38) Types of cursors?
1) Implicit: Declared for all DML and pl/sql statements. By default it selects one
row only.


2) Explicit: Declared and named by the developer. Use explicit cursor to
individually process each row returned by a multiple statements, is called ACTIVE
SET.
Allows the programmer to manually control explicit cursor in the pl/sql block
Declare: create a named sql area
Open: identify the active set.
Fetch: load the current row in to variables.
Close: release the active set.

CURSOR ATTRIBUTES:
%is open: evaluates to true if the cursor is open.
%not found: evaluates to true if the most recent fetch does not return a row
%found: evaluates to true if the most recent fetch returns a row.
%row count: evaluates to the total number of rows returned to far.

EXAMPLE:
Begin
Open emp_cursor;
Loop
Fetch when emp_cursor % rowcount >10 or
Emp_curor % not found;
dbms_output_put_line(to_char(vno)|| || vname);
End loop;
Close emp_cursor;
End;

CURSOR FOR LOOP
A) cursor for loop is a short cut to process explicit cursors
B) it has higher performance
C) cursor for loop requires only the declaration of the cursor, remaining things like
opening, fetching and close are automatically take by the cursor for loop

Example:
1) Declare
Cursor emp_cursor is
Select empno,ename
From emp;


Begin
For emp_record in emp_cursor loop
Dbms_output.putline(emp_record.empno);
Dbms_output.putline(emp_record.ename)
End loop
End;

39) Can we create a cursor without declaring it?
Yes by using cursor for loop using subqueries.
BEGIN
FOR emp_record IN ( SELECT empno, ename
FROM emp) LOOP
-- implicit open and implicit fetch occur
IF emp_record.empno = 7839 THEN
...
END LOOP; -- implicit close occurs
END;

40) Attribute data types?
1) %type 2) %row type.

41) Exception Handling?
Is a mechanism provided by pl/sql to detect runtime errors and process them
with out halting the program abnormally
1) pre-defined
2) user-defined.
PRE-DEFINED:
1) cursor_already_open ------ attempted to open an already open cursor.
2) Dup_val_on_index ------ attempted to insert a duplicate values.
3) Invalid_cursor ------ illegal cursor operation occurred.
4) Invalid_number ------ conversion of character string to number fails.
5) Login_denied ------ loging on to oracle with an invalid user name
and password.
6) program_error ------ pl/sql has an internal problem.
7) storage_error ------ pl/sql ran out of memory or memory is corrupted.
8) to_many_row ------ single row select returned more than one row.


9) value_error ------ arithmetic,conversion,truncation or size constraint
error
10) zero_devided ------ attempted to divided by zero.

USER-DEFINED:
Declare : name the exception
Raise : explicitly raise the exception by using the raise statements
Reference: exception handing section.

The Raise_Application_Error_Procedure:
n You can use this procedure to issue user-defined error messages from stored
sub programs.
n You can report errors to your applications and avoid returning unhandled
exceptions.
Raise_Application_Error(error_number,message[,{true/false}]
Error number between -20000 to -20999

pragma exception_init?
It tells the compiler to associate an exception with an oracle error. To get an
error message of a specific oracle error.
Ex: pragma exception_init(exception name, oracle error number)

Example for Exceptions?
1) Check the record is exist or not?
Declare
E emp% rowtype
Begin
e.empno := &empno;
select * into e from emp where empno =e.empno;
Dbms_output.putline(empno || e.empno);
Exception
When no_data_found then
Dbms_output.putline(e.empno ||doest exist);
End;

2) User defined exceptions?
Define p_dept_desc =Oracleapps4u


Define p_dept_number =1236
Declare
E_invalid_dept exception;
Begin
Update departments
Set dept_name=&p_dept_desc
Where dept_id =&p_dept_number;
If sql% not found then
Raise e_invalid_departments;
End if;
Commit;
Exception
When e_invalid_departments then
Dbms_output.putline(no such dept);
End;

42) Can u define exceptions twice in same block?
No
43) Can you have two functions with the same name in a pl/sql block?
Yes
44) Can you have two stored functions with in the same name?
Yes
45) Can function be overload?
Yes
46) What is the maximum number of statements that can be specified in a
trigger statement?
One
47) Can functions be overloaded ?
Yes
48) Can 2 functions have same name & input parameters but differ only by
return data type
No
49) What is a package?
Group logically related pl/sql types, items and subprograms.
1) Package specification
2) Package body


Advantages of a package:
Modularity
Easier Application Design
Information Hiding
Overloading
You cannot overload:
Two subprograms if their formal parameters differ only in name or parameter
mode. (datatype and their total number is same).
Two subprograms if their formal parameters differ only in datatype and the
different datatypes are in the same family (number and decimal belong to the
same family)
Two subprograms if their formal parameters differ only in subtype and the
different subtypes are based on types in the same family (VARCHAR and STRING
are subtypes of VARCHAR2)
Two functions that differ only in return type, even if the types are in different
families.

50) What is FORWARD DECLARATION in Packages?

PL/SQL allows for a special subprogram declaration called a forward declaration.
It consists of the subprogram specification in the package body terminated by a
semicolon. You can use forward declarations to do the following:
Define subprograms in logical or alphabetical order.
Define mutually recursive subprograms.(both calling each other).
Group subprograms in a package

Example of forward Declaration:

CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE BODY forward_pack
IS
PROCEDURE calc_rating(. . .); -- forward declaration
PROCEDURE award_bonus(. . .)
IS -- subprograms defined
BEGIN -- in alphabetical order
calc_rating(. . .);
. . .
END;



PROCEDURE calc_rating(. . .)
IS
BEGIN
. . .
END;

END forward_pack;
















Oracle Apps Interview Questions - 3


Q1: Difference between customization, enhancement and implementation?
Ans: Customization: Customization is the developing of the forms, reports and
SQL script from the beginning or changing the existing.
Enhancement: Enhancement is the modification of forms & Other components
according to client user requirement.
Implementation: Implementation is the testing of Applications.


Q2: What are the Types of Customizations?
Ans: There are two types of customizations.
1). Customization by extensions
2). Customizations by Modifications.

Customization by extensions: Customization by extension means developing
new:
Component for existing Oracle applications and develop new application using the
Development feature of AOL (Application object Library).
Customization by extensions means Copying an Existing Oracle Application
Component (Forms, Report, PL/SQL etc.) to a custom application directory and
modifying the Copy.

Customizations by Modifications: Modifying existing oracle application
Component to meet your specific Requirement.



Q3: What are the most Common Types of Customization?
Ans: TYPE 1: # Changing Forms:
1) . Changing Forms
2) . Validation logic
3) . Behavior
TYPE2: # Changing Report or Program
1) . Appearance
2) . Logic
TYPE3: # Database Customizations:
1) . Adding read only Schema
2) . Augment (add) logic with database Triggers.
TYPE4: # integrating third Party Software

(NOTE: For more Information on customization goes 115devg.pdf Chapter
Twenty-Seven)

Q4: What is Legacy system?
Ans: System other than Oracle is legacy System. Like FoxPro, spreadsheet.

Q5: What is ERP?
Ans: Resource Planning with in Enterprise. ERP is a term that covers whole
Product line. ERP means integration of different module. Any business will greatly
benefits by


adapting this feature because u can customize it or integrate it with other
Packages to satisfy unique requirements.

BENEFITS OF ERP: 1). Flow of Information Effectively.
2). Maintaining Standardizations.
Q6: What is Oracle Apps ?
Ans: Oracle-apps is an ERP Package. The Key Feature of all the oracle-Application
module is Data Integration.
Master data is Integrated: All the application share common files of customers,
suppliers, employee, items and other entities that are used by multiple
applications.

Transaction data is Integrated: Oracle automatically bridge transactions from one
system to another.

Financial data is integrated: Financial data is carried in a common format, and
financial data is transmitted from one application to another.

Q7: What is ad-hoc Report?
Ans: Ad-hoc Report is made to meet one-time reporting needs. Concerned with or
formed for a particular purpose. For example, ad hoc tax codes or an ad hoc
database query

Q8: What is Localization?


Ans: Localization is designed to meet the specific needs of certain territories or
countries. Most localization is necessary because the local laws or accountings
practice differ from country to country.
Region of Localization: Three Region of Localization.

1). EMEA REGION: Europe, Middle East, Asia pacific and Africa.
2). America REGION: Canada plus Latin America.
3). Global REGION: localization that applies territories through the world. For
example
Localization used in both Europe and Latin Americaare classified in the Global
Region.

Q9: Library used in Localization?
Ans: #Globe: Globe library allows Oracle Application developer to incorporate
global
Or regional feature into oracle application forms without
modification of
The base Oracle Application forms.
# JA: JA library contains codes specific to Asia\Pacific Region. And is
called
Globe Library.
# JE: JA library contains codes specific to EMEA Region. And is
called
By Globe Library.


# JL: The JL Library contains code specific to Latin America Region.
And is called by Globe Library.

Q10: How forms are attached.
Ans: STEP- ONE: First put the form in corresponding module like AP, AR, GL
In appropriate server directory.
STEP-TWO: Second step register form with AOL.
STEP-THREE: Attach form with Function.
STEP-FOUR: Attach function with menu.
STEP-FIVE: Attach menu with responsibility.
STEP-SIX: Attach responsibility to user.

Q11: How Report is attached.
Ans11: STEP- ONE: Register the application.
STEP-TWO: Put Report in appropriate server directory.
STEP-THREE:

STEP-FOUR: Define Program (Concurrent Program Define)
STEP_FIVE: Define Responsibility (Sysadmin responsibility).
Define).

STEP-SIX:




STEP-SEVEN:

STEP-EIGHT: Run the request through SRS. A request Id is created
Through which u can view the request.
Q12: What is workflow?
Ans: To automate and continuously increase business process we use workflow.
Workflow processes represent business process flows and information
routings.
Main Function:
1). Routing Informations (sending or receiving information).
2). Defining & modifying Business Rule.
3). Delivering electronic notification. (By emails).

Q13: What is main workflow Component?
Ans13: 1). Workflow Builder. Workflow is the component that provides user
interface For creating, reviewing and maintaining workflow Definitions.
2). Workflow Engine.:workflow is the component that executes and
enforces The defined workflow Process.
3). Workflow Monitor Workflow is the component of oracle workflow that
Allow you to review the state or status of an item through any particular
workflow process.


4). Workflow Definition Loader: allows u to download the text file.
5). Workflow Directory Services: Tells workflow how to find users.
6). Notification System: Send emails and receives responses from the
Oracle Workflow notification system.

Q14: What are Interface table in AP, AR & GL?
Ans:
AP INTERFACE TABLE: 1). AP_INTERFACE_CONTROLS.
2). AP_INTERFACE_REJECTIONS
3). AP_INVOICE_INTERFACE
4). AP_INVOICE_LINES_INTERFACE.
AR INTERFACE TABLE:
1). AR_PAYMENTS_INTERFACE_ALL
2). AR_TAX_INTERFACE
3). HZ_PARTY_INTERFACE
4). HZ_PARTY_INTERFACE_ERRORS
5). RA_CUSTOMERS_INTERFACE_ALL
6). RA_INTERFACE_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL
7). RA_INTERFACE_ERRORS_ALL
8). RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL
9). RA_INTERFACE_SALESCREDITS_ALL
GLINTERFACE TABLE:


1). GL_BUDGET_INTERFACE
2). GL_DAILY_RATES_INTERFACE
3). GL_IEA_INTERFACE
4). GL_INTERFACE
5). GL_INTERFACE_CONTROL
6). GL_INTERFACE_HISTORY

Q15 Total numbers of Tables in AP, AR, GL?
Ans; AP 173
AR 294
GL 165
FA 160
PO 132
OE 109

Q16: How will u customize a form?
Ans: STEP1: Copy the template.fmb and Appstand.fmb from AU_TOP/forms/us.
Then put in custom directory. The libraries (FNDSQF, APPCORE,
APPDAYPK, GLOBE, CUSTOM, JE, JA, JL, VERT) are automatically attached.
STEP2: Create or open new Forms. Then customize.
STEP3: Save this Form in Corresponding Modules.



Q17: What are non-financial modules?
Ans: 1). Projects
2). Manufacturing
3). Supply chain management
4). HR
5). Front Office
6). Strategic Enterprise management.

Q18: Explain Order- cycle in OE.
Ans: Step1: Enter sales order.
Step2: Book the sales order.
Step3: Pick release order.
Step4: Ship or confirm order.
Step5: Backorder Release
Step6: Receivable Interface
Step7: Complete line
Step8: Complete order

Q19: What is AU_TOP.
Ans: This is the Application utility contains PL/SQL library used by oracle forms,
reports, oracle form source files and a copy of all Java used to generate the
desktop Client.



Q20: What is ad_top?
Ans: ad_top (Application DBA). Contain installation and maintenance utility.
Such as Auto upgrade, Auto Patch and Admin Utility.

Q21: Can we make transaction in close Periods?
Ans: No, we can make only reports.

Q22: If Period is closed how we can enter transactions? (Doubt)
Ans: No, we cannot enter transaction.

Q23: what is SQl*Loader?
Ans: This tool is used to move data from a legacy system to oracle database.
In this two type of inputs to be provided to SQL * Loader.
First is data file, containing the actual data.
Second is the control file containing the specification which drive the
SQL* Loader.

Q24: How can u relate order management with AR?
Ans: sales orders are displayed after confirm release of sales in order
management.



Q25: What is the Field of GL_interface?
Ans: 1). SET_OF_BOOKS_ID
2). ACCOUNTING_DATE
3). CURRENCY_CODE
4). DATE_CREATED
5). CREATED_BY
6). CURRENCY_CONVERSION_DATE
7). ENCUMBRANCE_TYPE_ID
8). BUDGET_VERSION_ID
9). CURRENCY_CONVERSION_RATE
10). ACCOUNTED_DR
11).ACCOUNTED_CR
12).TRANSACTION_DATE

Q26: In which directory u store your custom form?
Ans:
App_Top is top directory. We have Core directory Adm., ad (application dba),
Au (application utility), fnd (Foundation), Cust-Dem is Custom directory where
Have 11.0.28 version then we have forms directory. Inside the form we have US
Directory. Where we stand forms.

Q27: Who is Holder of Alerts?
Ans: ALERT Manager.




Q28: Steps for upgradation of 11 to 11i?
Ans28: STEP1: Perform category 1,2,3. (Preupgrade steps).
STEP2: Run auto grade
STEP3: Apply database patch to bring your database to the
Current oracle apps release level.
STEP4: Install online help (optional).
STEP5: Perform Category 4, 5, 6 Steps (Post-upgrade steps).
STEP6: Perform product specific implementation steps as listed in your products
Users guide.
STEP7: perform upgrade finishing step.

Q28: How interface program is written and for what purpose
Ans28: Interface Program is written through SQL, PL/SQL.
PURPOSE: 1)Basic Integration
2)Imports valid data that is meaningful to Organization 3).
Validate the integrity of any data
Before introducing into oracle apps.
4). Imports data from legacy system.
5). Import data from one module to another.

Q29: What is AOL.


Ans: AOL stands for Application Object Library used for customization
And implementation of forms and Reports.

Q30: which Columns are taking care of descriptive flex fields?
Ans: Attribute Columns

Q31: Can u attach two sets of books with single profile?
Ans: yes we can attach.

Q32: How U Can u attaches two sets of books with single profile.
Ans: we can attach different set of Books with different responsibility
In a single profile.

Q33: can we run FSG report other than GL?
Ans: No, we cannot run. Because FSG reports can only run in GL.

Q34: What are the common libraries in AOL.
Ans34: libraries contain reusable client-side code.
Common Libraries in AOL.

FNDSQF: Contain packages for procedures for Message Dictionary,
Flex fields, profiles, and concurrent processings.


APPCORE: Contain packages for procedures for Menus and Toolbar.
APPDAYPK: contain packages that control application Calendar.
APPFLDR: packages for Folder.

Qns35: What is Multilanguage support.
Ans35: Oracle Application provides some feature to support multi language
support.
Qns36: Can u delete the posted Journals? Can U make Changes in Posted
Journals?
Ans36: No, once the posting program in oracle financial has updated accounts
balances, you cannot alter the posted journals; you can only post additional
entries that negate the original values. These entries contain either the negative
values of the original posted amounts or the original values but with the debit
amounts and credit amounts reversed.
These approaches are known as reversal method.

Qns37: When u r taking bulk of reports.
Ans37: At midnight because traffic is less.

Qns38: Who is Holder of Alerts?
Ans38: Alert Manager.

Qns39: What is TOAD.
Ans39: Tool for managing database activity,



Qns40: What is Flexfield?
Ans40: Oracle Application uses Flexfield to capture information about
Your organization. Flexfield have flexible structure for storing key
information.
Like Company, Cost Center, and Account. They also give u highly
adaptable
Structure for storing customized information in oracle Applications.

Qns41: What are the elements of Flex field?
Ans41: 1). Structure 2). Segment
3). Segment value 4). Value set


Qns42: What do u means by structure?
Ans42: Structure as the name implies defines how Flexfield is constructed. A Flex
field structure determines how many Segments it has, as well as how the
segments are sequenced. Each structure is mapped to a structure ID Column in
the database table for key Flexfield. Each Structure is mapped with context
sensitive column in the database table for descriptive Flexfield.

Qns43: What do u means by Segment?
Ans 43: Each Segment represents an element of your business structure
Such as Employee, Cost Center, Account. A Flexfield can have


Multiple Field. A segment is a single field with in a Flexfield.

Qns44: What do u means by Value set?
Ans 44: Value set identifies a list of valid value for the segment.
Value set also governs the segment values length, its data type.

Qns45: What do u means by Segment value?
Ans45: Value for each segment of flex field.

Qns46: What is Key and Descriptive Flexfield.
Ans46: Key Flexfield: #unique identifier, storing key information
# Used for entering and displaying key information.
For example Oracle General uses a key Flexfield called Accounting
Flexfield to uniquely identifies a general account.
Descriptive Flexfield: # To Capture additional information.
# To provide expansion space on your form
With the help of []. [] Represents descriptive flexfield.
Qns47: Difference between Key and Descriptive Flexfield?
Ans47:
Key Flexfield Descriptive Flefield
1. Unique Identifier 1.To capture extra information


2. Key Flexfield are stored in
segment
2.Stored in attributes
3.For key flex field there are flex
field Qualifier and segment Qualifier
3. Context-sensitive flex field is a
feature
of DFF.(descriptive flex field)

Qns48: Difference between Flexfield Qualifier and Segment Qualifier.
Ans48: Flexfield qualifier is used to identify a particular segment within a Key
flexfield.
While segment qualifier is used to capture value for any particular
Segment.

Qns49: What is Cross Validation Rule?
Ans 49: To prevent users from entering invalid combinations of segments Oracle
General Ledger allows u to set up cross validation rule. There are two types of
cross-validation
Rule element: include and exclude. For example, to secure a balance sheet
account to be associated with the balance sheet cost center or the corporate cost
center only,U must include every possible combination then exclude the balance
Sheet account range for the cost center.

Qns50: Purpose of Cross Validation rule.
Ans50: u can use Cross Validation rule to perform certain validations in
your Accounting flex field. For example, u can use Cross Validation rule To
secure all balance sheet account to be associated only with the balance Sheet cost


center, corporate cost center and profit and loss account to be associated with
the specific cost center other than the corporate Center.

Qns51: What are types of segment for Descriptive Flexfield.
Ans51: Two types
1). Global segments
2). Context-sensitive segment.
Global Segment: global segment maps one to one to a database column.
DFF segment stored in ATTRIBUTE. Global segment always
Displayed in a descriptive flex field.
Context-Sensitive Segment: Context sensitive segment can share a single
database
Column because the context sensitive will be Mutually
exclusive and will never overlap.

Qns52: What is Key Flexfield in AP, AR, GL.
Ans52: Key Flexfield in GL: Accounting Flexfield.
Accounting Flexfield is chart of account flex field.
It is used for identifying an account combination.
It must have a balancing segment, cost center segment, Natural account
segment.
Combination table in Acct. FF: GL_CODE_COMBINATION_ID.
Structure column: chart_of_accounts_id.


Maximum number of Segments: 30.

Key flex field in AR: 1). Sales Tax Location Flexfield.
2). Territory Flexfield
Sales Tax Location Flexfield: to calculate sales tax.
Combination table: AR_LOCATION_COMBINATION
Max number of segment: 10
Territory Flexfield: This is used to group territories according to
company needs
Combination table: RA_TERRITORIES.

Qns53: What is purpose of Token Field.
Ans53: To define parameter name defined in oracle reports.

Qns54: What is Template form?
Ans54 Template form is the starting point for all development of new form.
Start developing new form by copying template.fmb file located in
AU_TOP/forms/us to local directory and renaming it as appropriate.
Template Form Contains
--Several libraries like FNDSQF, APPDAYPK, and APPCORE.
--STANDARD_TOOLBAR, STANDARD_CALENDER
--Several form level trigger with required code.



Qns55: What are Handlers?
Ans55: Oracle application uses group of packaged procedure called handlers,
To organize PL/SQL code in the form so that it is easier to develop,
Maintain and debug.
Types Of handler: 1). Item handler
2). Event handler
3). Table handler.
Item handler: An item handler is a PL/SQL Procedure.
That encapsulates all of the code that acts upon an item.
Event handler: An item handler is a PL/SQL Procedure.
That encapsulates all of the code that acts upon an event.
Table handler: An item handler is a PL/SQL Procedure.
That manages interaction between block and base table.

Qns56: What is Appstand Form.
Ans56: Appstand form contains the Following.
1). Object Group STANDARD_PC_AND_VA.
Which contain the visual attribute and property class.
2). Object group STANDARD_TOOLBAR which contains the windows
Canvasses blocks and item of application toolbar.
3). Object group STANDARD_CALENDER which contains the windows


Canvasses blocks and item of application calendar.
4). Object groups QUERY_FIND, which contains a window, blocks and item
Used as a starting point for coding a find window.

Qns56: What is set of books.
Ans56: A financial reporting entity that uses a particular chart of accounts,
functional currency and accounting calendar. You must define at least one set of
books for each business location.

Qns57: what are four options that are tied to defined set of books.
Ans57: 1. Standard option (supenseposting, automatic posting, Average balance
posting)
2). Average Balance option.
3). Budgetary control option.
4). Reporting Currency option.

Qns58: What is FSG.
ns58: A powerful and flexible tool you can use to build your own custom
Reports without programming.

Qns59: What are the components of FSG?
Ans59: 1). Row set
2). Column set


3). Row order
4). Display set
5). Content set.

Qns60: What is MRC.
Ans60: The Multi Reporting Currency Feature allows u to report and
maintain records at the transaction level in more than one Functional currency.
You can do by defining one or more set of books in adition to primary set of
books.

Qns61: What are Alerts.
Ans61: Oracle alert is an application module that reports exception actions based
on detected exceptions. U can create alert when specific event occur or
that run periodically. Oracle alert provides a reliable way to monitor database
activity. As well as keeping u informed of unusual condition. We can monitor your
business performance through alerts.

Qns62: Types of alerts?
Ans62: Two types of alerts.
1. Event alert
2. Periodic Alert
Event alerts: An event alert is a database trigger that notifies u when a specified
database event occurs and a particular condition is met.
Periodic event: A periodic alert on the other hand is not immediate.


It is executed according to a predefined frequency

Qns63: What are three alert action types?
Ans63:1.Detail(An action defined atdetail level is initiated once for each exception
found Meaning once for each row returned by the
select statement in the alert definition.
2). Summary (An exception defined at the summary level is
initiated Once for all exceptions found or once for each unique
output combination.)
3). No Exception (An action defined at the no-exception level is initiated once if
no data is returned from the select statement).

Qns64: What are the advantages of alert.
Ans64: 1). Integration with email.
2). Automatic processing
3). Performing routine transactions
4). Maintaining information flow without a paper trail.

Qns65: What is Currency.
Ans65: Two types of Currency.
1). Foreign Currency: A currency that you define for your set of books for
recording and conducting accounting transactions in a currency other than your
functional currency



2). Functional Currency: The principal currency you use to record transactions
and
maintain accounting data within General Ledger. The functional currency is
usually the Currency in which you perform most of your Business transactions.
You specify the functional currency for each set of books in the Set of Books
window.

Qns66: Types of matching.
Ans66: Two way Matching: The process of verifying that purchase order and
invoice information matches within accepted tolerance levels. Payables uses the
following criteria to verify two-way matching:
Invoice price <= Order price
Quantity billed <= Quantity ordered

Three way matching: The process of verifying that purchase order, invoice, and
receiving information matches within accepted tolerance levels. Payables uses the
following criteria to verify three-way matching:
Invoice price <= Purchase Order price
Quantity billed <= Quantity ordered
Quantity billed <= Quantity received

Four way Matching: The process of verifying that purchase order, invoice, and
receiving information matches within accepted tolerance levels. Payables uses the
following criteria to verify four-way matching:
Invoice price <= Order price
Quantity billed <= Quantity ordered
Quantity billed <= Quantity received
Quantity billed <= Quantity accepted



Qns67: What is the difference between Master table, setup table, and
transaction table.
Ans 67: Master table: Created in any module and accessible across the
application.
Like GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS, GL_SET_OF_BOOKS.
Transaction Table: transaction tables are tables that store day-to-day
transaction
Data. Such as payable invoice, receivable invoice.

Set-Up table: Created once with in Application. Like FND_CURRENCY.


Qns68: Name Few Master tables, Set up table I, transaction table in AP, AR, GL.
Ans68:
Modul
e
Name
Master table setup table Transaction table


GL 1.GL_SET_OF_BOOKS
2.GL_CODE_COMBINATI
ONS
FND_CURREN
CY
GL_JE_LINES
GL_JE_HEADRES
GL_JE_BATCHES
GL_interface
GL_CONSOLIDATION
GL_SUSPENSE_ACCOUNTS
GL_INTERCOMPANY_ACCOUN
TS
AP PO_VENDORS
AP_BANK_BRANCHES
PO_VENDOR_SITES
AP_HOLD_CODES
FND_CURREN
CY
AP_BATCHES_ALL
AP_INVOICE_ALL
AP_DISTRIBUTION_ALL
AP_CHECKS_ALL
AP_PAYMENTS_HISTOTRY_ALL

AR HZ_CUST_ACCOUNT FND_CURREN
CY
AR_ADJUSTEMENT_ALL
AR_PAYMENTS_SCHEDULE_AL
L
AR_CASH_RECEIPT_ALL
AR_DISTRIDUTION_ALL
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATION
_ALL.


Qns69: What do u means by FIFO pick and FIFO ship.


Ans69: FIFO pick: First in first out. (Order comes from customer).
FIFO ship: order ship to customer.

Qns70: Difference between SC and NCA.
Ans70:
SC NCA
1. SMART CLIENT 1. Network computing Architecture
2. No form server in SC. All form is in
directory, which is on the client.
2. Forms are in the server. Thus
making security higher.

Qns71: What is first step in GL.
Ans71: Creating chart of account.

Qns72: What are standard reports in GL?
Ans72: Trial Balance Report
Journal Report
FSG REPORT
Account Analysis Report.

Qns73: What are standard reports in AP?
Ans73: 1. Supplier Report
2). Payment Report



Qns74: What are standards reports in AR.
Ans74: 1. Tax Report 2. Customer Profile Report
3. Aging Report 4. Dunning Letter Report

Qns75.What are customer table, transaction table, and Receipt table in AR.
Ans
Module Customer Table Transaction Table
AR HZ_CUST_PROFILE_CLASS
HZ_CUST_PROF_CLASS_AMTS
HZ_CUSTOMERS_PROFILES
HZ_CUST_PROFILE_AMTS
HZ_CUST_ACCOUNTS
HZ_CUST_ACCT_SITES_ALL
HZ_CUST_CONTACT_POINTS
HZ_CUST_ACCT_RELATES_ALL
HZ_CUST_SITES_USES_ALL


RA_CUTOMER_TRX_ALL
RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES_ALL
RA_CUST_TRX_TYPES_ALL
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL



RECEIPT Table


AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL
AR_RECEIPT_METHOD
AR_CASH_RECEIPT_HISTORY_ALL
AR_INTERIM_CASH_RECEIPT_ALL

Qns76: What is Custom-Library.
Ans76: The custom library allows extension of oracle application without
modification
of oracle application code. U can use the custom library for customization Such as
zoom (moving to another form), enforcing business rule (for example Vendor
name must be in uppercase letters) and disabling field that do not apply for your
site.
Custom library is placed in AU_TOP / resource directory.

Event Passed to Custom-Library:
1). WHEN_FORM_NAVIGATE
2). WHEN_NEW_FORM_INSTANCE
3). WHEN_NEW_BLOCK_INSTANCE
4). WHEN_NEW_RECORD_INSTANCE
5). WHEN_NEW_ITEM_INSTANCE.

Qns78: What is the Component of alerts.
Ans78: 1. Message


2.SQL SCRIPT
3.Operating system script
4. Concurrent request.

Qns79: What is difference between charge back and adjustment?
Ans79:
CHARGEBACK ADJUSTMENT
A new debit item that u assign to
your customer closing an existing,
outstanding debit item.
A receivable feature that allows u to
increase or decrease the amount
due of your invoice, debit memos,
charge back.

Qns80: What are types of invoice?
Ans80:
TYPES OF INVOICES
NINE Type:
Standard
Credit memo
Debit memo
Expense Report
PO default
Prepayment


Quick match
Withholding tax
Mixed


Qns81: What are sub modules in Financials?
Ans81:
Sub module in
Financials
GL
AP
AR
FA
CM (cash
management)
Financial Analyzer


Qns82: Concept of Multiorganisation, Explain?

Ans82: Multi organization allows u to setup multiple legal entities within a single
installation of oracle applications.

ARCHITECTURE OF MULTIPLE ORGANISATIONS



SET OF BOOKS : Within one set of books u may define one or more legal entities.

LEGAL ENTITY: each legal entity has its own employer tax identification number.
And prepare its own tax forms. Each legal entity has its own Tax forms. Each legal
entity has its own set of federal tax rule, State tax rule and local tax rule. Legal
entities consist of one or More operating units.
OPERATING UNIT: operating units represents buying and selling units with in your
Organization. Oracle order Entry, Oracle receivables, Oracle
Purchasing, And Oracle Payables.
INVENTORY ORGANIZATION: an Inventory organization is a unit that has
inventory
transactions. Possibly manufactures and or distribute products.

Qns83: How will u attach SOB?
Ans83: STEP1: Create a new Responsibility.

STEP2: Attach the new responsibility to an existing user.
STEP3: Defining a new Period Type.
STEP4: Defining an accounting calendar.
STEP5: Defining a set of books.

STEP7: Signing on as new responsibility.


Qns84: What are key functions provided by Oracle General Ledger?
Ans84:
Function Provided by GL
General Accounting
Budgeting
Multiple Currencies
Intercompany
Accounting
Cost Accounting
Consolidation
Financial Reporting

Qns85: What do u means by cost center?
Ans85: COST center gives the information about investment and returns on
different projects.

Qns86: what is Fiscal Year.
Ans86: Any yearly accounting Period without relationship to a calendar year.

Qns87: What is Credit-memo?
Ans87: A document that partially or reverse an original invoice.



Qns88: How data is transferred from legacy system to Oracleapps table.
Ans88: A system other than oracle apps system is called legacy System.

Qns89: What is Chart of Accounts?
Ans89: The account structure your organization uses to record transaction and
maintain account balances.

Qns90: What are different types of budgets?
Ans90:
Types of Budgets
Operating
Capital
Master Production Schedule
Variable
Time-Phased

Qns91: How others modules are integrate through GL.
Ans91: Integration of module With GL

Qns92: Explain Payable Cycles
Ans92: Four steps in AP Cycle



PAYABLE CYCLE
Four steps in Payable Cycles:
STEP1: Enter Invoice (this process may or may not include matching each invoice
with PO).
STEP2: Approve invoice payment.
STEP3: Select and pay approval invoices.
STEP4: Reconcile the payment with bank statement


Qns95: AGING BUCKETS?

A. Time periods you define to age your debit items. Aging buckets are used in the
Aging reports to see both current and outstanding debit items. For example, you
can define an aging bucket that includes all debit items that are 1 to 30 days past
due.
Payables uses the aging buckets you define for its Invoice Aging Report

Q96. CREDIT INVOICE?
A. An invoice you receive from a supplier representing a credit amount that the
supplier owes to you. A credit invoice can represent a quantity credit or a price
reduction.

Q97. CREDIT MEMO?
A document that partially or fully reverses an original invoice.



Q98.CUTOFF DAY?
The day of the month that determines when an invoice with proximate payment
terms is due. For example, if it is January and the cutoff day is the 10th, invoices
dated before or on January 10 are due in the next billing period; invoices dated
after the 10th are due in the following period.

Q99. DEBIT INVOICE?
A. An invoice you generate to send to a supplier representing a credit amount
that the supplier owes to you. A debit invoice can represent a quantity credit or a
price reduction.

Q100. JOURNAL ENTRY HEADERS?
A. A method used to group journal entries by currency and journal entry
category within a journal entry batch. When you initiate the transfer of invoices
or payments to your general ledger for posting, Payables transfers the necessary
information to create journal entry headers for the information you transfer.
Journal Import in General Ledger uses the information to create a journal entry
header for each currency and journal entry category in a journal entry batch. A
journal entry batch can have multiple journal entry headers.

Q101 What is Oracle Financials?
Oracle Financials products provide organizations with solutions to a wide range of
long- and short-term accounting system issues. Regardless of the size of the
business, Oracle Financials can meet accounting management demands with:
Oracle Assets: Ensures that an organization's property and equipment investment
is accurate and that the correct asset tax accounting strategies are chosen.



Oracle General Ledger: Offers a complete solution to journal entry, budgeting,
allocations, consolidation, and financial reporting needs.

Oracle Inventory: Helps an organization make better inventory decisions by
minimizing stock and maximizing cash flow.

Oracle Order Entry: Provides organizations with a sophisticated order entry
system for managing customer commitments.

Oracle Payables: Lets an organization process more invoices with fewer staff
members and tighter controls. Helps save money through maximum discounts,
bank float, and prevention of duplicate payment.

Oracle Personnel: Improves the management of employee- related issues by
retaining and making available every form of personnel data.

Oracle Purchasing: Improves buying power, helps negotiate bigger discounts,
eliminates paper flow, increases financial controls, and increases productivity.

Oracle Receivables:. Improves cash flow by letting an organization process more
payments faster, without off-line research. Helps correctly account for cash,
reduce outstanding receivables, and improve collection effectiveness.



Oracle Revenue Accounting gives organization timely and accurate revenue and
flexible commissions reporting.

Oracle Sales Analysis: Allows for better forecasting, planning and reporting of
sales information.

Q102 What is the most important module in Oracle Financials?
The General Ledger (GL) module is the basis for all other Oracle Financial
modules. All other modules provide information to it. If you implement Oracle
Financials, you should switch your current GL system first. GL is relatively easy to
implement. You should go live with it first to give your implementation team a
chance to be familiar with Oracle Financials.

Q103 What is MultiOrg and what is it used for?
MultiOrg allows multiple operating units and their relationships to be defined
within a single installation of Oracle Applications. This keeps each operating unit's
transaction data separate and secure. Use the following query to determine if
MultiOrg is intalled: Select multi_org_flag from fnd_product_groups;






Oracle apps Interview questions - 4



1. Q: How do you make your own query when you are in forms query
mode? A: You can use a placeholder to achieve this. If you enter a single
colon ( : ) in one of your query fields during the Enter Query mode, Oracle
Forms Run Query will prompt you to enter the text of SQL Where clause.
2. Q: What is concurrent processing? A: Concurrent processing is a
process that simultaneously runs programs in the background (usually on
the server rather than your workstation) while working online.
3. Q: What is a Concurrent Manager? A: A Concurrent Manager is a
component of concurrent processing that monitors and runs requests while
you work online. Once the user submits a request to run the job, the
information is stored in the request table. A concurrent manager gets the
information from the request table and executes the specified concurrent
job.
4. Q: What is a request set? A request set is a collection of reports or
programs grouped together. Once you submit a request set job, it executes
all the programs in a report set sequentially or in a parallel manner as
defined in the request set.
5. Q: What are the four phases of a concurrent request? The four
phases are as follows: inactive, pending, running, and completed.
6. Q: How would you identify the results of the request in the
Concurrent View Requests window? Whenever a concurrent job is
submitted, Applications creates a Request ID. You can use this Request ID
to view the results.
7. Q: What are the profile options? How many levels of profile options
are available? Profile options are set to determine how the applications
look and feel. There are four levels of profile options available: site level,
application level, responsibility level, and user level. You can have various
categories of profile options, such as personal options, system options,
auditing profile options, currency options, Flexfield options, online
reporting options, personal output viewer options, and user profile options.
8. Q: What is a document sequence? A document sequence assigns
unique numbers to the documents (transactions) generated by Oracle
Applications. For example, each invoice has its own unique invoice number
and each purchasing document has its own unique purchase order (PO)
number.


9. Q: What are the steps involved in adding a custom program to Oracle
Applications?
a) Develop a concurrent program or report.
b) Identify the corresponding executable and register it with the application.
c) Create a concurrent program and its parameters.
d) Add a concurrent program to a request set.

10. Q: How do you register a printer? To add a new printer, go to Install
Printer Register.
11. Q: What is a Flexfield? How many types of Flexfields exist? A Flexfield
is a field made up of segments. Each segment has an assigned name and a
list of valid values. Two types of Flexfields exist: Key Flexfields and
Descriptive Flexfields (DFFs).
12. Q: What is a Key Flexfield? A Key Flexfield is a unique identifier that is
made up of meaningful segments to identify GL account numbers and item
numbers. Key Flexfields are usually stored in SEGMENT1...SEGMENTn
database columns.
Some examples would be Item No 34H-AFR-223-112.G and GL Account No:
100-00-1000-324-11100.

For an example GL Account, segments could be identified as
Organization,Cost Center, Account, Product, Product Line.

13. Q: What are the Key Flexfields in Oracle Applications? The following
table lists some of the Key Flexfields available in Oracle Applications.
Key Flexfields
Using Applications
Accounting
General Ledger
Asset Key
Fixed Assets
Location
Fixed Assets
Category
Fixed Assets
Account Aliases
Inventory


Item Catalogs
Inventory
Item Categories
Inventory
System Iitems
Inventory
Stock Locators
Inventory
Sales Orders
Inventory
Sales Tax Location
Receivables
Territory
Receivables
Job
Human Resources
Grade
Human Resources
Position
Human Resources
Soft Coded Key
Human Resources

14. Q: What is a Descriptive Flex Field? A DFF lets you define the custom
fields into Oracle Application forms without customizing the program code.
DFFs in forms are represented by a "beer mug" field (a single space field
enclosed by brackets) that looks like the following symbol: [ ]. They are
usually stored in ATTRIBUTE1...ATTRIBUTEn database columns. DFFs can
also be used to accept report parameters.
15. Q: What types of segments can be set up for DFFs? Global or context-
sensitive.
16. Q: What is a value set? A value set is a list of values validated against
segments. You can create a value set and assign it to a Flexfield segment.
17. Q: How many validation types are there? Six validation types
exist:none, dependent, independent, table, special, and pair.
18. Q: What are the required and optional steps for setting up
Flexfields? The required steps are as follows: define the value sets, define


the structures, and define the values, if needed. The optional steps are as
follows: define the security rules, define the cross-validation rules, and
define the shorthand aliases, if necessary.
19. Q: Can you define cross-validation rules for DFFs? No, you cannot.
You can only define them for Key Flexfields.
20. Q: Can a value set be shared between Flexfields? Yes, value sets can
be shared between Flexfields.
21. Q: Can a value set be shared within a Flexfield structure? No, value
sets cannot be shared between segments within a Flexfield as long as they
do not carry the same type of information. For example, date information
can be shared between segments within a Flexfield.
22. Q: What are the advanced validation options? Three types of
advanced validation options are available. $PROFILES$, which references
the current value of a profile option. An example would be
$PROFILES$.profile_option_name. Block.field, which references the block
field. $FLEX$, which refers to the current value of a previously used value
set. An example would be $FLEX$.value_set_name (cascading
dependencies).
23. Q: What is the next step after defining the segments for
Flexfields? Freezing and compiling the structure.
24. Q: What are the steps required to set up value security rules? Make
sure security is enabled, define rules for the value set, and assign rules to
the user's responsibility.
25. Q: What is Oracle Alert? Oracle Alert is an exception reporting
system. It keeps you informed on an as-needed basis. It also communicates
with other users through e-mail regarding exception messages.
26. Q: How many types of alerts are there? Two types of alerts exist:
Periodic Alerts and Event Alerts. Periodic Alerts fire at a time interval, and
Event Alerts are fired by database table changes.
27. Q: What are Quick Codes? Quick Codes, also known as Quickpicks,
are standard sets of user-defined values. Lookup is a combination of a code
and a description. The lookup tables are generally populated by the scripts
located in /install/odf directory.
28. Q: What is an Open Interface in Oracle Applications? Open Interface,
also known as the Application Programmer Interface (API), is a process
whereby the Oracle Applications are linked with external or legacy systems.


Open Interface works as a temporary staging area to load the external
information into Oracle Applications tables. Once the data is validated, it
sends the information to the permanent tables. Rejected transactions can
be corrected and resubmitted.
29. Q: Which schema has complete access to the Oracle Applications
data model? The APPS schema. AutoInstall automatically sets the FNDNAM
environment variable to the name of the APPS schema.
30. Q: What is the top directory in Oracle Applications? $APPL_TOP.
31. Q: What is a product top directory? It starts with the product
shortname and is suffixed with TOP, such as TOP. For example, General
Ledger's top directory is GL_TOP.
32. Q: What are the log and output directory names for a product
group? The product group environment file sets the APPLLOG variable to
log and APPLOUT to out. For example, the output directory for General
Ledger is $GL_TOP/$APPLOUT. For log, it is $GL_TOP/_$APPLLOG.
33. Q: What data dictionary tables do you use to obtain detailed
information regarding? You can write a query by joining the FND_TABLE
and FND__COLUMNS tables. FND_INDEXES and FND_INDEX_COLUMNS
tables are part of the data dictionary. All the FND_ table names are self-
explanatory.
34. Q: What are the primary underlying tables for concurrent
processing? FND_CONCURRENT_PROGRAMS,
FND_CONCURRENT__REQUESTS, FND_CONCURRENT_PROCESSES, and
FND_CONCURRENT_QUEUES tables.
35. Q: What are the primary underlying tables for
Flexfields? FND_DESCR_FLEX_CONTEXTS,
FND_FLEX_VALIDATION__RULES, FND_FLEX_VALUE_SETS, FND_ID_FLEXS,
FND_ID__FLEX_SEGMENTS, and FND_ID_FLEX_STRUCTURES tables.
36. Q: What is the primary underlying table for AOL
QuickCodes? FND_LOOKUPS table.
37. Q: What is the application dummy table used by a form
block? FND_DUAL table.
38. Q: What is the main underlying table for Profile
Options? FND_PROFILE_OPTIONS table.


39. Q: What are the main prerequisites for creating a custom application
or responsibility? Set up a directory structure for a custom application, and
define an environment variable that translates to your application base
path.
40. Q: What are the WHO columns? WHO columns are used to track the
changes to your data in the application tables. WHO columns exist in all
Oracle Applications standard tables. The following five are considered WHO
columns:
Column Name
CREATED_BY
CREATION_DATE
LAST_UPDATED_BY
LAST_UPDATE_DATE
LAST_UPDATE_LOGIN

41. Q: Do I need to have WHO column information in custom forms? Yes.
It is strongly recommended to add WHO columns to the custom tables and
call standard API, FND_STANDARD.SET_WHO in PRE-INSERT, and PRE-
UPDATE triggers in each block of the form. Also, specify these fields as
hidden in each block of the form.

42. Q: What are the additional WHO columns used for concurrent
programs? Concurrent programs use all the following WHO inncluding the
following four.
Column Name
PROGRAM_APPLICATION_ID
PROGRAM_ID
PROGRAM_UPDATE_DATE

43. Q: Can you disable the WHO columns' information in a form
block? Yes. You can disable HELP -> ABOUT THIS RECORD information
within a block. Call the following procedures in a block level WHEN-NEW-
BLOCK-INSTANCE
Trigger:app_standard.event('WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE');
app_standard.enable('ABOUT','PROPERTY_OFF');



44. Q: How do you register your custom tables in PL/SQL? You can use
AD_DD package to register custom tables in PL/SQL.
45. Q: How do you define the passing arguments in SQL/PLUS and
PL/SQL concurrent programs? You must name your passing arguments as
&1, &2, &3 and so on.
46. Q: How do you call your custom reports from a form? You can call
your custom Oracle reports in a form using
the FND_REQUEST.SUBMIT_REQUEST procedure.
47. Q: What is a template form? A template form is a starting point for
the development of custom forms. Copy the Template.fmb file from
$AU_TOP/forms/US directory to your local directory and rename it.

48. Q: Which libraries are attached to the template form? The following
main libraries are directly attached to the template form. APPCORE
contains packages and procedures for standard menus, toolbars, and so on.
APPDAYPK contains a calendar package. FNDSQF contains packages and
procedures for Flexfields, concurrent processing, profiles, and a message
dictionary.

49. Q: What is a calendar? A calendar is an object that lets you select the
date and time. It is automatically included in the template form. A Calendar
package example would be calendar.show.

50. Q: Which template form triggers require some modifications? The
ACCEPT, FOLDER_RETURN_ACTION, KEY-DUPREC, KEY-MENU, KEYCLRFRM,
ON-ERROR, KEY-LISTVAL, POST-FORM, PRE-FORM, QUERY_FIND, WHEN-
NEW-FORM-INSTANCE, WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE, WHEN-
NEWRECORD-INSTANCE, and WHEN-NEW-ITEM-INSTANCE triggers.

51. Q: Which template form triggers cannot be modified? The
CLOSE_WINDOW, EXPORT, FOLDER_ACTION, KEY-COMMIT, KEY-EDIT, KEY-
EXIT, KEY-HELP, LASTRECORD, WHEN-WINDOW-CLOSED, WHENFORM-
NAVIGATE, and ZOOMtriggers.

52. Q: What are the main template files for Pro*C concurrent
programs? The main template files are EXMAIN.c and EXPROG.c .



53. Q: What is the Oracle-recommended application short name for
extensions? Oracle recommends an application short name begin with XX.
As an example, extensions to Oracle Purchasing would be XXPO.

54. Q: Where do you maintain the list of your custom programs? All
custom programs should be listed in the applcust.txt file. This file is located
in the $APPL_TOP/admin directory. When you apply the patches, Oracle
Applications uses this file for informational purposes.

55. Q: What are the steps involved in modifying an existing form? First,
you identify the existing file and then you copy the file to a custom
application directory, making sure to rename it. You then make the
necessary modifications, generate the form, and document it in the custom
program list using applcust.txt file.

56. Q: Where do you maintain database customizations? You can
maintain all your table changes by creating a new schema. You can use your
custom application short name (such as XXPO) as your Oracle schema name
for easy identification. The new schema must be registered in the Oracle
AOL.

57. Q: Can you create extensions to Oracle Applications without
modifying the standard form code? Yes. This can be done using the
CUSTOM library, which is an Oracle Forms PL/SQL library. You can integrate
your custom code directly with Oracle Applications without making changes
to your Oracle Applications forms code. The CUSTOM library is located in
the $AU_TOP/res/plsql directory. Once you write the code, you compile
and generate the CUSTOM procedures to make your changes.

58. Q: When do you use the CUSTOM library? You can use the CUSTOM
library in a variety of cases. You can use it to incorporate Zoom logic, logic
for generic events, logic for product-specific events, and to add entries for
the special menu.

















1. What are the various types of Exceptions?
User defined and Predefined Exceptions.
2. Can we define exceptions twice in same block?
No.


3. What is the difference between a procedure and a function?
Functions return a single variable by value where as procedures do not return
any variable by value. Rather they return multiple variables by passing
variables by reference through their OUT parameter.

4. Can you have two functions with the same name in a PL/SQL block ?
Yes.

5. Can you have two stored functions with the same name ?


Yes.

6. Can you call a stored function in the constraint of a table ?
No.

7. What are the various types of parameter modes in a procedure ?
IN, OUT AND INOUT.

8. What is Over Loading and what are its restrictions?
Over Loading means an object performing different functions depending upon
the no. of parameters or the data type of the parameters passed to it.

9. Can functions be overloaded?
Yes.
10.
Can 2 functions have same name & input parameters but differ only by
return data type

No.
ORACLE APPS


1. What is the Diff between APPS Schema and other Schemas?
Apps schema contains only Synonyms we can't create tables in apps schema,
where as other schemas contains tables, & all the objects. Here only we will
create the tables and giving grants on created tables. Almost all every time we
will connect to apps schema only.

2. What is meant by Custom Top and what is the Purpose?
Custom Top is nothing but Customer Top, which is created for customer only.
we can have multiple custom
tops based on client requirement. It is used to store developed & customized
components. Whenever oracle corp applying patches it will over ride on all the
modules except custom top. Thats why we will use custom top.

3. What is the Significance of US Folder?
It is nothing but language specification by default it is in american language.
We can have multiple languages folders based on installed languages. from
backend we can get it from
FND_LANGUAGES -- COL --INSTALLED_FLAG I,B,D



I--INSTALLED,
B--BASE,
D--DISABLE
select language_code,nls_language from fnd_languages where
installed_flag like 'B'
4. Where did U find the Application short name and basepath names?
select basepath,application_short_name from fnd_application from the
backend. From the from end we can get it Navigation Application Developer.---
--> Application---->Register The application name we will get from
FND_APPLICATION_TL

5. Where can U find the release version from backend?
SELECT release_name from FND_PRODUCT_GROUPS; ---11.5.10.2 .
6. What are the Folders we will find below the 11.5.0 Folder?
Reports,forms,sql,lib,log,out,bin,admin,html,xml,msg,def, etc
7. Can we create Tables in the Apps Schema?
No.
8. Can we have custom schema when it it required?
yes, we can have custom schema, when we want to create a new table we
required custom schema.
9. What is meant by concurrent Program?
It is nothing but Instance of the execution along with parameters &
Incompatables. Here Incompatables nothing but if we are submiting cc
programs if any one can be execute in those program , which programs r not
imp yet this time we will mention those programs in incompatables
tab.
10.
What are the steps we will follow to register Reports as Concurrent
Program?
First develop the report & save it in local machine. upload into
custom_top/11.5.0/reports/us/ go to system administrator open executable
form create executable by mentioning executable method as reports
,executable as report name which was created. go to cc program form create
ccprogram by attach executable name in executable section. then attach
this ccprogram to request group, Request group to
Responsibility.Responsibility to User.


11. What is meant by Request group?
It is nothing but collection of cc programs.


12. What is Application Top? What are the types and Purpose?
A) When we connect to the server we will find the top called application top.
Under application top we have


Product top.

Custom top

Product top is the default top built by the
manufacturer. Custom top is used to select the
Client for his business purposes. Customizations
are done with the Custom top.
13. What is US folder in the Custom Top?
It is a language specific folder used to store the G.U.I like reports and
forms.
14. What are mandatory parameters of Procedures and what the use of those?

Errorbuf: It is used to returns the error messages and sent it to
the log file.

Retcode: It is used to show the status of the Procedure with 0, 1,
and 2 0 for Completed Normal

1 for Completed Warning
2 for Completed Error
15 What is Apps Schema and Schema?

Schema: Schema is the location in database contains database
objects like views, tables, and synonyms.

Apps Schema: It is used to connect the all schemas to get the
information from The database.
16. What is Token?
a) Use to transfer values to report builder and it is not case sensitive.
17. Difference between FORM, Function and Menu?

a) A menu is a hierarchical arrangement of functions and menus.
Each responsibility has a menu assigned to it. A function is a part
of an application that is registered under a unique name for the
purpose of assigning it to be including it from a menu.
18. Tell me something about SQL-LOADER.

Sql * loader is a bulk loader utility used for moving data from



external files into the oracle database.
Sql* loader supports various load formats, selective loading, and
multi-tables loads.

1) Conventional --The conventional path loader essentially loads
the data by using standard insert statement.
2) Direct -- The direct path loader (direct = true) by possess of logic
involved with that, and loads directly in to the oracle data files.
EX:- My data.csv file
1001, scott tiger,1000,40
1002,gvreddy,2345,50
Load data
Infile c:\data\mydata.csv
insert Into table emp Fields terminated by , optionally enclosed
by
(empno, empname,sal,deptno)
>sqlldr scott/tiger@vis control=loader.ctl log= gvlog.log
bad=gvbad.bad discard=gvdis.dsc .
19. What is SET-OF-BOOKS?



Collection of Chart of Accounts and Currency and Calendars is
called SOB
20. Tell me what r the Base tables in the AR?


hz_parties (party_id) (store info about org, groups and people)
HZ_PARTIES stores information about parties such as
organizations,
people, and groups, including the identifying address information
for the party.
hz_cust_accounts (cust_account_id)
HZ_CUST_ACCOUNTS stores information about customer
relationships. If a
party becomes a customer, information about the customer
account is stored in this table. You can establish multiplecustomer
relationships with a single party, so each party can have multiple
customer account records in this table.
hz_cust_acct_sites_all (cust_acct_site_id)
HZ_CUST_ACCT_SITES_ALL stores information about customer
sites. One



customer account can have multiple sites. The address is
maintained in HZ_LOCATIONS.
hz_cust_site_uses_all (site_use_id)
HZ_CUST_SITE_USES_ALL stores information about site uses or
business
purposes. A single customer site can have multiple site uses, such
as bill to or ship to, and each site use is stored as a record in this
table.
hz_party_sites (party_site_id)
HZ_PARTY_SITES stores information about the relationship
between Parties
and Locations. The same party can have multiple party sites.
Physical addresses are stored in HZ_LOCATIONS.
hz_locations (location_id)
HZ_LOCATIONS stores information about physical locations.
hz_Person_Profiles (person_profile_id)
HZ_PERSON_PROFILES stores detail information about people.
hz_Organization_Profiles (organization_profile_id)
HZ_ORGANIZATION_PROFILES stores credit rating, financial
statistics,
socioeconomic and corporate linkage information for business
sites. The primary key for this table is ORGANIZATION_PROFILE_ID.

21. FND USER EXITS:-



FND SRWINIT sets your profile option values, multiple
organizations and allows
Oracle Application Object Library user exits to detect that they
have been called by an Oracle Reports program.
FND SRWEXIT ensures that all the memory allocated for AOL user
exits have been freed up properly.
FND FLEXIDVAL are used to display flex field information like
prompt, value etc
FND FLEXSQL these user exits allow you to use flex fields in your
reports
FND FORMAT_CURRENCY is used to print currency in various
formats by using formula column



22. What is Value Set?



The value set is a collection (or) container of values.
Whenever the value set associated with any report parameters. It
provides list of values to the end user to accept one of the values
as report parameter value.

If the list of values needed to be dynamic and ever changing and
define a table
based values set.

12) What are the validation types?

1) None -------- validation is minimal.
2) Independent ------input must exist on previously defined list of
values
3) Dependent ------input is checked against a subset of values
based on a
Prior value.
3) Table ----- input is checked against values in an application table
4) Special ------values set uses a flex field itself.
5) Pair ------ two flex fields together specify a range of valid values.
6) Translatable independent ----- input must exist on previously
defined list
of values; translated values can be used.
7) Translatable dependent ------- input is checked against a subset
of values
based on a prior values; translated value can be used.
23. Form development process?


a) Open template form
b) Save as <your form>.fmb
c) Change the form module name as form name.
d) Delete the default blocks, window, and canvas
e) Create a window.
f) Assign the window property class to window
g) Create a canvas (subclass info)
h) Assign canvas property class to the canvas
I) assign the window to the canvas and canvas to the window



j) Create a data block
k) Modify the form level properties. (sub class item Text item)
l) Modify the app_custom package. In the program unit.
m) Modify the pre-form trigger (form level)
n) Modify the module level properties ((console window, First
navigation
p) Save and compile the form.
Place the .fmx in the server directory.
24. How does u customize the Reports?



a. Identify the Short name of the standard report in which module
we have
to customize
Ex: - if u wants to customize in the AR module path is
Appl top\ar\11.5.0\reports\US\ .rdf
b. Open the .rdf file in Report builder and change the name of the
module.
c. Open the data module and modify the query (what is client
requirements)
assign the columns to the attributes.
d. Go to report wizard and select, what r the newly created
columns.
e. Then Compile it. Then u will get a .rep file in the specified
module. If it is
not in the specified directory then we have to put in the server
directory.
f. Then Register in the AOL Concurrent Executable and
Concurrent Program.
g. Go to system administrator Security Responsibility request.
h. Add and assign a concurrent program to a request group
25. FLEX FIELDS?


Used to capture the additional business information.
DFF KFF
Additional Unique Info, Mandatory
Captured in attribute prefixed
columns
Segment prefixed
Not reported on standard Is reported on standard reports



reports
To provide expansion space on
your form With the help of [].
[] Represents descriptive Flex
field.
FLEX FILED : DESCRIPTIVE :
REGISTER
Used for entering and displaying
key information
For example Oracle General uses
a key Flex field called Accounting
Flex field to uniquely identify a
general account.
FLEX FILED : KEY : REGISTER
26. Difference between Bind and Lexical parameters?



BIND VARIABLE:
are used to replace a single value in sql, pl/sql
bind variable may be used to replace expressions in select, where,
group, order
by, having, connect by, start with cause of queries.
bind reference may not be referenced in FROM clause (or) in
place of
reserved words or clauses.
LEXICAL REFERENCE:
You can use lexical reference to replace the clauses appearing
AFTER select,
from, group by, having, connect by, start with.
You cant make lexical reference in pl/sql statements.
27. what is Flex mode and Confine mode?



Confine mode:

On: child objects cannot be moved outside their enclosing parent
objects.
Off: child objects can be moved outside their enclosing parent
objects.

Flex mode:

On: parent borders "stretch" when child objects are moved
against them.
Off: parent borders remain fixed when child objects are moved
against
them.


28. What is Place holder Columns?



A placeholder is a column is an empty container at design time.
The placeholder can hold a value at run time has been calculated
and placed in to It by pl/sql code from anther object.
You can set the value of a placeholder column is in a Before
Report trigger.
Store a Temporary value for future reference. EX. Store the
current max salary as records are retrieved.
29. What is Formula Column?



A formula column performs a user-defined computation on
another column(s) data, including placeholder columns.
30. What is Summary columns?



A summary column performs a computation on another column's
data. Using the Report Wizard or Data Wizard, you can create the
following summaries: sum, average, count, minimum, maximum,
% total. You can also create a summary column manually in the
Data Model view, and use the Property Palette to create the
following additional
summaries: first, last, standard deviation, variance.
31. What is TCA (Trading Community Architecture)?



Ans. Oracle Trading Community Architecture (TCA) is a data model
that allows you to manage complex information about the parties,
or customers, who belong to your commercial community,
including organizations, locations, and the network of hierarchical
relationships among them. This information is maintained in the
TCA Registry, which is the single source of trading community
information for Oracle E-Business Suite applications.
32. Difference between Application Developer and System Administrator?


Ans.
Role of Technical Consultant:

a. Designing New Forms, Programs and Reports
b. Forms and Reports customization
c. Developing Interfaces
d. Developing PL/SQL stored procedures
e. Workflow automations
Role of System Administrator:



a. Define Logon Users
b. Define New/Custom Responsibility
c. Define Data Groups
d. Define Concurrent Managers
e. Define Printers
f. Test Network Preferences
g. Define/Add new Modules
Role of an Apps DBA:
a. Installing of Application
b. up gradation
c. Migration
d. Patches
e. Routing maintenance of QA
f. Cloning of OA
33. What are Flex fields?



Ans.
Ans. A Flex field is a customizable field that opens in a window
from a regular Oracle Applications window. Defining flex fields
enables you to tailor Oracle Applications to your own business
needs. By using flex fields, you can:
(a) Structure certain identifiers required by oracle applications
according to your own business environment.
(b) Collect and display additional information for your business as
needed.
Key Flex fields: You use key flex fields to define your own structure
for many of the identifiers required by Oracle Applications. Profile
Flexfields:Open Key Window (FND_ID_FLEXS)
Descriptive Flex field: You use descriptive flex fields to gather
additional information about your business entities beyond the
information required by Oracle Applications. Profile Flex fields:
Open Descr Window (FND_DESCRIPTIVE_FLEXS)

34. Report registration process?


Ans.
1. Create the report using the report builder.
2. Place the report definition file in the module specific reports
directory.



3. Create an executable for the report definition file.
4. Create a concurrent program to that executable.
5. Associate the concurrent program to a request group.

35. Define Request Group?



Ans.
A request security group is the collection of requests, request
sets, and concurrent programs that a user, operating under a
given responsibility, can select from the Submit Requests window.

36. Value Sets?


Ans.
Oracle Application Object Library uses values, value sets and
validation tables as important components of key flex fields,
descriptive flex fields, Flex Builder, and Standard Request
Submission.
When you first define your flex fields, you choose how many
segments you want to use and what order you want them to
appear. You also choose how you want to validate each of your
segments. The decisions you make affect how you define your
value sets and your values.
You define your value sets first, either before or while you define
your flex field
segment structures. You typically define your individual values
only after your flex field has been completely defined (and frozen
and compiled). Depending on what type of value set you use, you
may not need to predefine individual values at all before you can
use your flex field.
You can share value sets among segments in different flex fields,
segments in
different structures of the same flex field, and even segments
within the same flex field structure. You can share value sets
across key and descriptive flex fields. You can also use value sets
for report parameters for your reports that use the Standard
Report Submission feature.
Navigation Path:
Login Application Developer -> Application -> Validation -> Set




37. Value Validation Types?



Ans.
1. Dependant
2. Independent
3. None
4. Pair
5. Special
6. Table
7. Translate Independent
8. Translate Dependent

38. Incompatibility in report registration and Run Alone?



Ans.
Identify programs that should not run simultaneously with your
concurrent program because they might interfere with its
execution. You can specify your program as being incompatible
with itself.
Application: Although the default for this field is the application of
your concurrent program, you can enter any valid application
name.
Name: The program name and application you specify must
uniquely identify a
concurrent program. Your list displays the user-friendly name of
the program, the short name, and the description of the program.
Scope: Enter Set or Program Only to specify whether your
concurrent program is zincompatible with this program and all its
child requests (Set) or only with this program (Program Only).
Run Alone: Indicate whether your program should run alone
relative to all other programs in the same logical database. If the
execution of your program interferes with the execution of all
other programs in the same logical database (in other words, if
your program is incompatible with all programs in its logical
database, including itself), it should run alone.




Oracle apps Interview questions - 7

1. Q: How do you make your own query when you are in forms query
mode?
A: You can use a placeholder to achieve this. If you enter a single colon ( : ) in one
of your query fields during the Enter Query mode, Oracle Forms Run Query will
prompt you to enter the text of SQL Where clause.

2. Q: What is concurrent processing?
A: Concurrent processing is a process that simultaneously runs programs in the
background (usually on the server rather than your workstation) while working
online.


3. Q: What is a Concurrent Manager?
A: A Concurrent Manager is a component of concurrent processing that monitors
and runs requests while you work online. Once the user submits a request to run
the job, the information is stored in the request table. A concurrent manager gets
the information from the request table and executes the specified concurrent job.

4. Q: What is a request set?
A: A request set is a collection of reports or programs grouped together. Once you
submit a request set job, it executes all the programs in a report set sequentially
or in a parallel manner as defined in the request set.

5. Q: What are the four phases of a concurrent request?
The four phases are as follows: inactive, pending, running, and completed.

6. Q: How would you identify the results of the request in the
Concurrent View Requests window?
Whenever a concurrent job is submitted, Applications creates a Request ID. You
can use this Request ID to view the results.

7. Q: What are the profile options? How many levels of profile options
are available?


Profile options are set to determine how the applications look and feel. There are
four levels of profile options available: site level, application level, responsibility
level, and user level. You can have various categories of profile options, such as
personal options, system options, auditing profile options, currency options,
Flexfield options, online reporting options, personal output viewer options, and
user profile options.

8. Q: What is a document sequence?
A document sequence assigns unique numbers to the documents (transactions)
generated by Oracle Applications. For example, each invoice has its own unique
invoice number and each purchasing document has its own unique purchase
order (PO) number.

9. Q: What are the steps involved in adding a custom program to Oracle
Applications?
a) Develop a concurrent program or report.
b) Identify the corresponding executable and register it with the application.
c) Create a concurrent program and its parameters.
d) Add a concurrent program to a request set.

10. Q: How do you register a printer?
To add a new printer, go to Install Printer Register.

11. Q: What is a Flexfield? How many types of Flexfields exist?
A Flexfield is a field made up of segments. Each segment has an assigned name
and a list of valid values. Two types of Flexfields exist: Key Flexfields and
Descriptive Flexfields (DFFs).

12. Q: What is a Key Flexfield?
A Key Flexfield is a unique identifier that is made up of meaningful segments to
identify GL account numbers and item numbers. Key Flexfields are usually stored
in SEGMENT1...SEGMENTn database columns.

Some examples would be Item No 34H-AFR-223-112.G and GL Account No:
100-00-1000-324-11100.



For an example GL Account, segments could be identified as
Organization,Cost Center, Account, Product, Product Line.

13. Q: What are the Key Flexfields in Oracle Applications?
The following table lists some of the Key Flexfields available in Oracle
Applications.
Key Flexfields
Using Applications
Accounting
General Ledger
Asset Key
Fixed Assets
Location
Fixed Assets
Category
Fixed Assets
Account Aliases
Inventory
Item Catalogs
Inventory
Item Categories
Inventory
System Iitems
Inventory
Stock Locators
Inventory
Sales Orders
Inventory
Sales Tax Location
Receivables
Territory
Receivables
Job
Human Resources
Grade
Human Resources
Position


Human Resources
Soft Coded Key
Human Resources

14. Q: What is a Descriptive Flex Field?
A DFF lets you define the custom fields into Oracle Application forms without
customizing the program code. DFFs in forms are represented by a "beer mug"
field (a single space field enclosed by brackets) that looks like the following
symbol: [ ]. They are usually stored in ATTRIBUTE1...ATTRIBUTEn database
columns. DFFs can also be used to accept report parameters.

15. Q: What types of segments can be set up for DFFs?
Global or context-sensitive.

16. Q: What is a value set?
A value set is a list of values validated against segments. You can create a value
set and assign it to a Flexfield segment.

17. Q: How many validation types are there?
Six validation types exist:none, dependent, independent, table, special, and pair.

18. Q: What are the required and optional steps for setting up Flexfields?
The required steps are as follows: define the value sets, define the structures, and
define the values, if needed. The optional steps are as follows: define the security
rules, define the cross-validation rules, and define the shorthand aliases, if
necessary.

19. Q: Can you define cross-validation rules for DFFs?
No, you cannot. You can only define them for Key Flexfields.

20. Q: Can a value set be shared between Flexfields?
Yes, value sets can be shared between Flexfields.

21. Q: Can a value set be shared within a Flexfield structure?


No, value sets cannot be shared between segments within a Flexfield as long as
they do not carry the same type of information. For example, date information
can be shared between segments within a Flexfield.

22. Q: What are the advanced validation options?
Three types of advanced validation options are available.
$PROFILES$, which references the current value of a profile option. An example
would be $PROFILES$.profile_option_name. Block.field, which references the
block field. $FLEX$, which refers to the current value of a previously used value
set.
An example would be $FLEX$.value_set_name (cascading dependencies).

23. Q: What is the next step after defining the segments for Flexfields?
Freezing and compiling the structure.

24. Q: What are the steps required to set up value security rules?
Make sure security is enabled, define rules for the value set, and assign rules to
the user's responsibility.

25. Q: What is Oracle Alert?
Oracle Alert is an exception reporting system. It keeps you informed on an as-
needed basis. It also communicates with other users through e-mail regarding
exception messages.

26. Q: How many types of alerts are there?
Two types of alerts exist: Periodic Alerts and Event Alerts. Periodic Alerts fire at a
time interval, and Event Alerts are fired by database table changes.

27. Q: What are Quick Codes?
Quick Codes, also known as Quickpicks, are standard sets of user-defined values.
Lookup is a combination of a code and a description. The lookup tables are
generally populated by the scripts located in /install/odf directory.

28. Q: What is an Open Interface in Oracle Applications?
Open Interface, also known as the Application Programmer Interface (API), is a
process whereby the Oracle Applications are linked with external or legacy


systems. Open Interface works as a temporary staging area to load the external
information into Oracle Applications tables. Once the data is validated, it sends
the information to the permanent tables. Rejected transactions can be corrected
and resubmitted.

29. Q: Which schema has complete access to the Oracle Applications
data model?
The APPS schema. AutoInstall automatically sets the FNDNAM environment
variable to the name of the APPS schema.

30. Q: What is the top directory in Oracle Applications?
$APPL_TOP.

31. Q: What is a product top directory?
It starts with the product shortname and is suffixed with TOP, such as TOP. For
example, General Ledger's top directory is GL_TOP.

32. Q: What are the log and output directory names for a product group?
The product group environment file sets the APPLLOG variable to log and
APPLOUT to out. For example, the output directory for General Ledger is
$GL_TOP/$APPLOUT. For log, it is $GL_TOP/_$APPLLOG.

33. Q: What data dictionary tables do you use to obtain detailed
information regarding?
You can write a query by joining the FND_TABLE and FND__COLUMNS tables.
FND_INDEXES and FND_INDEX_COLUMNS tables are part of the data dictionary.
All the FND_ table names are self-explanatory.

34. Q: What are the primary underlying tables for concurrent
processing?
FND_CONCURRENT_PROGRAMS, FND_CONCURRENT__REQUESTS,
FND_CONCURRENT_PROCESSES, and FND__CONCURRENT_QUEUES tables.

35. Q: What are the primary underlying tables for Flexfields?
FND_DESCR_FLEX_CONTEXTS, FND_FLEX_VALIDATION__RULES,


FND_FLEX_VALUE_SETS, FND_ID_FLEXS, FND_ID__FLEX_SEGMENTS, and
FND_ID_FLEX_STRUCTURES tables.

36. Q: What is the primary underlying table for AOL QuickCodes?
FND_LOOKUPS table.

37. Q: What is the application dummy table used by a form block?
FND_DUAL table.


38. Q: What is the main underlying table for Profile Options?
FND_PROFILE_OPTIONS table.

39. Q: What are the main prerequisites for creating a custom application
or responsibility?
Set up a directory structure for a custom application, and define an environment
variable that translates to your application base path.

40. Q: What are the WHO columns?
WHO columns are used to track the changes to your data in the application
tables. WHO columns exist in all Oracle Applications standard tables. The
following five are considered WHO columns:
Column Name
CREATED_BY
CREATION_DATE
LAST_UPDATED_BY
LAST_UPDATE_DATE
LAST_UPDATE_LOGIN

41. Q: Do I need to have WHO column information in custom forms?
Yes. It is strongly recommended to add WHO columns to the custom tables and
call standard API, FND_STANDARD.SET_WHO in PRE-INSERT, and PRE-UPDATE
triggers in each block of the form. Also, specify these fields as hidden in each
block of the form.



42. Q: What are the additional WHO columns used for concurrent
programs?
Concurrent programs use all the following WHO inncluding the following four.
Column Name
PROGRAM_APPLICATION_ID
PROGRAM_ID
PROGRAM_UPDATE_DATE

43. Q: Can you disable the WHO columns' information in a form block?
Yes. You can disable HELP -> ABOUT THIS RECORD information within a block. Call
the following procedures in a block level WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE
Trigger:app_standard.event('WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE');
app_standard.enable('ABOUT','PROPERTY_OFF');

44. Q: How do you register your custom tables in PL/SQL?
You can use AD_DD package to register custom tables in PL/SQL.

45. Q: How do you define the passing arguments in SQL/PLUS and
PL/SQL concurrent programs?
You must name your passing arguments as &1, &2, &3 and so on.
46. Q: How do you call your custom reports from a form?
You can call your custom Oracle reports in a form using the
FND_REQUEST.SUBMIT_REQUEST procedure.

47. Q: What is a template form?
A template form is a starting point for the development of custom forms. Copy
the Template.fmb file from $AU_TOP/forms/US directory to your local directory
and rename it.

48. Q: Which libraries are attached to the template form?
The following main libraries are directly attached to the template form.
APPCORE contains packages and procedures for standard menus, toolbars, and so
on. APPDAYPK contains a calendar package. FNDSQF contains packages and
procedures for Flexfields, concurrent processing, profiles, and a message
dictionary.



49. Q: What is a calendar?
A calendar is an object that lets you select the date and time. It is automatically
included in the template form. A Calendar package example would be
calendar.show.

50. Q: Which template form triggers require some modifications?
The ACCEPT, FOLDER_RETURN_ACTION, KEY-DUPREC, KEY-MENU, KEYCLRFRM,
ON-ERROR, KEY-LISTVAL, POST-FORM, PRE-FORM, QUERY_FIND, WHEN-NEW-
FORM-INSTANCE, WHEN-NEW-BLOCK-INSTANCE, WHEN-NEWRECORD-INSTANCE,
and WHEN-NEW-ITEM-INSTANCE triggers.

51. Q: Which template form triggers cannot be modified?
The CLOSE_WINDOW, EXPORT, FOLDER_ACTION, KEY-COMMIT, KEY-EDIT, KEY-
EXIT, KEY-HELP, LASTRECORD, WHEN-WINDOW-CLOSED, WHENFORM-NAVIGATE,
and ZOOM triggers.

52. Q: What are the main template files for Pro*C concurrent programs?
The main template files are EXMAIN.c and EXPROG.c .

53. Q: What is the Oracle-recommended application short name for
extensions?
Oracle recommends an application short name begin with XX. As an example,
extensions to Oracle Purchasing would be XXPO.

54. Q: Where do you maintain the list of your custom programs?
All custom programs should be listed in the applcust.txt file. This file is located in
the $APPL_TOP/admin directory. When you apply the patches, Oracle
Applications uses this file for informational purposes.

55. Q: What are the steps involved in modifying an existing form?
First, you identify the existing file and then you copy the file to a custom
application directory, making sure to rename it. You then make the necessary
modifications, generate the form, and document it in the custom program list
using applcust.txt file.

56. Q: Where do you maintain database customizations?


You can maintain all your table changes by creating a new schema. You can use
your custom application short name (such as XXPO) as your Oracle schema name
for easy identification. The new schema must be registered in the Oracle AOL.

57. Q: Can you create extensions to Oracle Applications without
modifying the standard form code?
Yes. This can be done using the CUSTOM library, which is an Oracle Forms PL/SQL
library. You can integrate your custom code directly with Oracle Applications
without making changes to your Oracle Applications forms code. The CUSTOM
library is located in the $AU_TOP/res/plsql directory. Once you write the code,
you compile and generate the CUSTOM procedures to make your changes.

58. Q: When do you use the CUSTOM library?
You can use the CUSTOM library in a variety of cases. You can use it to
incorporate Zoom logic, logic for generic events, logic for product-specific events,
and to add entries for the special menu.




Frequently Asked Questions in Oracle Apps Order Management (OM) Drop Ship
process
Q1. What is a Drop ship PO?
A: Oracle Order Management and Oracle Purchasing integrate to provide drop
shipments. Drop shipments are orders for items that your supplier ships directly
to the customer either because you dont stock or currently dont have the items
in inventory, or because its more cost effective for the supplier to ship the item
to the customer directly. Drop shipment was introduced in R11.





Q2. How is a Drop Ship PO created?
A: Drop shipments are created as sales orders in Order Management. The
Purchase Release concurrent program or workflow in Order Management creates
rows in the Requisition Import tables in Purchasing. Then Purchasings Requisition
Import process creates the requisitions. Drop shipments are marked with the
Source Type of External in Order Management and Supplier in Purchasing.


Q3. What is the setup required for Drop ship PO?
A: ITEM ATTRIBUTES:
Navigate: Inventory -> Items - > Organization items
Purchased (PO) Enabled
Purchasable (PO) Enabled
Transactable (INV) Enabled
Stockable (INV) Optional
Reservable (INV) Optional
Inventory Item (INV) Optional
Customer Ordered (OM) Enabled
Customer Orders Enabled (OM) Enabled
Internal Ordered (OM) Disabled
Internal Orders Enabled (OM) Disabled
Shippable (OM) Optional
OE Transactable (OM) Enabled
All Drop Ship items must be defined in the organization entered in the profile
option OE: Item Validation Organization and in the Receiving Organization.
All drop ship sub-inventory must have Reservable box checked. If the sub-
inventory is not Reservable the sales order issue transaction will not be created in
MTL_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE. After drop ship inventory organization is
created, subinventories should be defined. To create the subinventory, go to an
inventory responsibility and navigate to Setup -> Organizations -> Subinventories.
Asset subinventories must have the reservable and Asset boxes checked. Expense
subinventories must have the Reservable box checked and the Asset box


unchecked.
Subinventory Attributes for Asset Subinventory
Reservable/Allow Reservations
Asset Subinventory
Subinventory Attributes for Expense Subinventory
Reservable
Asset-must NOT be enabled.

Q4. How can we avoid the miscounting of supply as logical organization is
involved?
A: You must receive drop-ship items in a logical organization. If you use Oracle
master Scheduling/MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning, to avoid miscounting
supply you may not want to include logical organizations in your planning. If you
choose to include logical organizations, ensure that doing so does not cause
planning and forecasting complications.

Q5. If you make changes to a sales order after the Purchase Order (PO) has been
generated, will the order changes automatically be updated on the PO?
A: Order changes will not be automatically updated on the PO. Pulling up the
Discrepancy report will allow you to view the differences between the Sales Order
and PO. However, you will have to manually update the POs in the Purchasing
application.

Q6. If items on a Drop Ship order are cancelled, does the system automatically
generate a PO Change to the PO originally sent to the supplier?
A: No, Drop Ship functionality in this regard remains the same as in R11. There is a
discrepancy report available that will report differences between the PO and the
Sales Order.

Q7. Does Order Management 11i have functionality to do serial number
management with Drop Shipments?
A: You are able to receive serial numbered Drop Ship stock. Order Management
will receive the serial number noted on the PO.



Q8. Can Configurable Items be drop shipped?
A: Currently only Standard Items can be drop shipped. Functionality for
Configurable Items will be added in future releases.

Q9. How do I drop ship across operating units?
A: Release 11i does not currently support this functionality.

Q10. How are over/under shipments handled in drop shipment?
A: If part of a drop-ship line ships, and you do not wish to fulfill the remaining
quantity, cancel the line. Over shipments must also be handled manually. If the
supplier ships more than the ordered quantity, you can bill your customer for the
additional quantity or request that they return the item. Use the Drop Ship Order
Discrepancy Report to view differences between your drop-ship sales orders and
their associated purchase requisitions and orders.

Q11. Will Blanket PO's work with Drop Shipment?
A: Blanket PO's will not work with Drop shipment because the PO must be
created when OM notifies PO that a drop ship order has been created. This PO is
linked to the drop ship order so that when the receipt is done (partial or
complete) .OM is updated to receiving interface eligible. Drop ship lines do not
use the pick release, ship confirm or inv interface order cycles.

Q12. Can we cancel drop shipment after it is received?
A: Drop shipments cannot be cancelled once Oracle Purchasing obtains the
receipt. A user who wants to cancel a drop ship sales order line must ensure no
receipts have been created against the line and that the requisition and/or
purchase order associated with the line is cancelled. Cancellation of a Partial Drop
Ship receipt is allowable. But only the portion that has not been received can be
cancelled. If you cancel a drop shipment line for which you have not shipped the
entire quantity, the order processing splits the line. The first line contains the
quantity shipped and the second line contains the non-shipped quantity in


backorder. You can cancel the second line the backorder on the sales order.
The PO line quantity should be changed to reflect the new quantity.

Q13. What debugging tools are available for Drop shipments?
A: 1. Diagnostic scripts can be used for troubleshooting problems with sales
orders.
2. Debugging receipt transaction or the sales order issue transaction, Set the
following profile options:
RCV: Processing Mode to Immediate or Batch
RCV: Debug Mode to Yes
OM: Debug Level to 5
INV: Debug Trace to Yes
INV: Debug level to 10
TP: INV Transaction processing mode to Background
-Then go to Sys Admin: Concurrent: Program: Define; query up the Receiving
Transaction Processor and check the Enable Trace box.
-Save the receipt for the deliver transaction (destination type will say Inventory
for the deliver transaction).
-View the Receiving Transaction Processor log file, the Inventory Transaction
Worker log file, as well as, the trace for the errors.

Q14. What is the Import source and status of PO generated from Drop
Shipment?
A: Import source is Order Entry.
Status of PO will always be Approved.




FAQs on Oracle Alerts
What are Oracle Alerts?


Oracle Alerts are used to monitor unusual or critical activity within a designated
database. The flexibility of ALERTS allows a database administrator the ability to
monitor activities from table space sizing to activities associated with particular
applications (i.e. AP, GL, FA). Alerts can be created to monitor a process in the
database and to notify a specific individual of the status of the process.

What types of Oracle Alerts are there?
There are 2 types of Alerts: Event Alerts and Periodic Alerts.
a) EVENT ALERTS are triggered when an event or change is made to a table in the
database.
b) PERIODIC ALERTS are activated on a scheduled basis to monitor database
activities or changes.

What types of actions can be generated when an Alert is triggered?
When an alert is executed, the alert can send an email message, run a concurrent
program, run an operating system script, or run a
SQL statement script. Using response processing, Oracle Alerts can solicit a
response from a specific individual and perform an action
based on the response that it receives.

Can I build an Alert to run with my custom applications or tables?
Event or Periodic Alerts can work with any custom application, as long as the
application is properly registered within Oracle
Applications.

Which Email packages work with Alerts?
Since 11i.RUP4, all email is routed through Workflow Mailer.



Can Alerts be triggered using other Tools? (i.e. other than Oracle Forms or
concurrent programs)
Oracle Event Alerts can only be triggered from an application that has been
registered in Oracle Applications. Alerts cannot
be triggered via SQL updates or deletes to a table.

What is Response Processing?
Response processing is a component of Alerts which allows the recipients of an
alert to reply with a message and have the
applications take some action based on the response.

Do I need Oracle Applications to use Alerts?
Yes. Oracle Applications is required to create and run Alerts using Alert Manager
Responsibility.



Oracle Apps Order Management FAQs
Delivery:
A delivery consists of a set of delivery lines that are scheduled to be shipped to a
customers ship-to location on a specific date and time. In a delivery, you can
include items from different sales orders as well as back orders. You can group
multiple deliveries together to create a trip.
More than one trip may be required to complete a delivery. For example, a
delivery can consist of two trips, the first trip by truck and the second trip by rail.
Picking Rules


Move orders will use the picking rules set up in Oracle Inventory to locate the
material required to fulfill the move order line. Together with item-sub inventory
defaults (required if the staging sub inventory is locator controlled), the picking
rules suggest the staging transfer transaction lines with appropriate source
information that will be required to obtain enough material in the staging location
for the delivery. The process where the Picking Engine generates these
transaction line suggestions is called allocating.

How system determines Pick from Sub inventory/Locator to do pick release
from shipping Transaction form?
Thru Pick Rule
Based on Picking rule, assigned to the Item (1st in mtl_system_items)
if Null then from mtl_parameters then where it looks for that inv. org

Configuring Your Picking Process:
You can determine the number of pick release steps the system will prompt to
move material from pick release to ship confirmation. These steps are:
1. Pick Release
2. Move Order Line Allocation (detailing)
3. Move Order Line Pick Confirmation
4. Ship Confirmation

Pick Release
Pick Release finds and releases eligible delivery lines that meet the release
criteria, and creates move orders. You can pick release by order, trip, stop,
container, delivery, warehouse, and customer, scheduled, or requested dates,
shipment priority or combinations of the above criteria. The default release
criteria are set up in Shipping Parameters, but you can override the default
criteria in the Release Sales Order window at pick release.

The move orders create a reservation, determine the source, and transfer the
inventory to staging areas. Pick Slips can be created after the detailing process
completes, and the quantity and source can be manually verified at pick confirm.

Detailing and pick confirmation can be manually transacted through inventory or
set up in Shipping Parameters to occur automatically at pick release.



You can run one or more releases and customize release criteria to meet your
requirements. You can define:

Release Rules to specify youre picking criteria through pick release
parameters.
Release Sequence Rules specify the order in which eligible delivery lines are released.
The order in which delivery lines are released using a Release Sequence Rule is
based on the following attributes:
Order number
Outstanding invoice value
Scheduled date
Departure date
Shipment priority

Pick Slip Grouping Rules to determine how released move order lines are grouped
onto pick slips.


Oracle Shipping Executions Pick Release process creates move orders. One order
is created per pick release batch per organization, so if you pick release across
multiple organizations, one move order is generated in each facility. One move
order line is generated for each order line included in the picking batch. That
move order line includes the item, quantity, the staging location (the destination
sub inventory and locator) and a source sub inventory and locator if one was
specified on the sales order line or on the Release Sales Orders window.

For non-transactable items, pick release does not use the value of Enforce Ship
Sets and Ship Models in the shipping parameters. However, ship confirm does
validate non-transactable items for broken ship sets and ship models.

For non-reservable items, allocation and pick release run, but suggestions are not
created during pick release, and pick confirm will not run for the item. You can
print pick slips, but they will not be detailed with sub inventory and stock locator
to pick from, however they will list the item and quantity to be picked. Auto-
allocate should be Yes and Auto-pick-confirm can be set to any.

Detail Line Allocation (Detailing)


To release the move order lines created at Pick Release to the warehouse and to
print pick slips, the lines must be allocated. The allocation process for a pick wave
move order line also creates a high level (organization level) reservation for the
item(s) if no previous reservations exist for them. You can choose to do this
immediately after the move order lines are created or to postpone this step until
a later point in time. Once the lines are allocated, they have a status of Released
to Warehouse.

Postponing the detailing process might be employed by organizations that pick
release across multiple warehouses but prefer to enable each warehouse to
determine when to release their order lines to the floor. Detailing the order lines
immediately after they are created is called auto-detailing. Postponing the
detailing process is referred to as manual-detail. You can set up a default detailing
mode in the Shipping Parameters window. This default can be overridden at each
Pick Release through the Release Sales Orders window.

Pick Confirmation
The move order line details must be transacted (in Inventory) to confirm the
material drop-off in staging. Pick confirmation executes the sub inventory transfer
that systematically moves the material from its source location in the warehouse
to the staging location. Pick Confirmation automatically transfers the high level
reservation to a allocated reservation (including lots, sub inventory and locators)
in the staging location. Inventory updates Shipping Execution with the results of
the pick confirm:
Pick Confirmed quantity is assigned a status of Staged/Pick Confirmed.
Unconfirmed quantity is assigned a status of Backordered.

At pick confirmation, you can report a missing quantity or change information if
material is picked from a different lot, serial, locator, or sub inventory. Auto pick
confirm can be set up as the default to occur immediately after the lines are
detailed if an organizations picks rarely deviate from the suggested picking lines
or the overhead of requiring a Pick Confirmation is unmanageable. You can set up
a default Pick Confirm policy in the Inventory organization parameters. This
default can be overridden at each Pick Release.

Pick confirmation follows the allocation and reservation process automatically if
both the Auto Allocate and Auto Pick Confirm options are selected in the Release


Rules window. Pick Confirm always follows the detailing and reservation process.
If Auto Allocate is not chosen, it is not possible to Auto Pick Confirm.

After you perform a partial move transaction on a move order, the delivery detail
shipped quantity is usually blank. However, if the move order is for a serial
controlled item, the shipped quantity appears. Generally, the requested quantity
of a staged delivery detail is the shipped quantity because the non-shipped
quantity is split into separate backorder delivery lines. However, for delivery
details with serial controlled items, the shipped quantity has a value so that you
can enter the serial numbers when transacting.


Pick Release can be run using the following methods:
On-line: You can pick release one order immediately, thereby eliminating time spent
waiting for the order to process through the Concurrent Manager queue. This is
done in the Release Sales Orders for picking window. This window can also be
accessed from the Tools menu in the Shipping Transactions window.

Concurrent: You can run pick release in the background, enabling you to run other
processes simultaneously. This is done in the Release Sales Orders for picking
window. This window can also be accessed from the Tools menu in the Shipping
Transactions window.

Standard Report Submission (SRS): You can run a specific release at the same time
every day. SRS runs pick release in the background multiple times. This is done in
the Release Sales Orders for Picking SRS window.

Shipping Transactions window: You can run pick release in the Shipping Transactions
window by selecting Launch Pick Release from the Actions menu.


Material Picking or Pick Release:
Oracle shipping execution enables you to use move orders Transactions for
generating pick requests and reservation in Oracle Inventory. With the new pick
release engine, you can pick release all items together on a trip or stop. You can
also pick release items on a delivery. Using the new engine can be performed a
one-two or three-step process.



One Step process consists of select both auto-detail and auto pick confirm
checkboxes on the inventory tab when you pick release, which means that the
pick recommendation is automatically created and pick confirmed without any
manual interaction.

Two Step process consists of selecting auto-detail, but not auto pick confirm,
which creates a move order that is automatically detailed but enables you to view
the pick recommendation and provides the opportunity to change quantity,
location, sub inventory and to report a missing quantity at the pick confirmation
step in the transact move orders window. Once you have made your changes you
can transact the move order to pick confirm the inventory.

Three Step process consists of selecting neither the auto-detail or auto pick
confirm check boxes, which creates a move order that you can manually or
automatically detail in the transact move order window. Once detailed, you can
transact the mover order to pick confirm the transaction.

What does Detailing mean?
Detailing is the process which Oracle Order Picking and Shipping uses the picking
rules to determine where to source the material to fulfill the request line (move
order line). The detailing process fills in the move order line details with the actual
transactions to be performed. If adequate quantity is not available to detail the
mover order, this process can be repeated later. If no reservations exist before
the detailing process, it also creates reservation for the material.

What is the difference between Available Qty and On-Hand Qty?
Available Qty + Reserved Qty = On-Hand Qty


What is the difference between concurrent or on-line pick releases?
Concurrent pick release releases one or more orders in the background
improving the performance for the user. The user can continue working with the
application even though the pick release has not completed yet.



On-line pick release releases the orders while the user waits for the application to
returns the control to the user. The user may feel a lower performance in the
applications depending of how many lines are being processed.

What is meant by Trips? How to create Trips?
Overview:
A trip is an instance of a specific freight carrier departing from a particular
location containing deliveries.

A trip is carrier specific and contains at least two stops such as a stop to pick up
goods and another stop to drop off goods, and may include intermediate stops.
Trips can be created automatically or manually.

Creating a Trip
There are several ways to create a trip:
Automatic
Manual

Automatic
If your shipping process does not require advanced planning, you may prefer to
automatically create trips:

Auto-creating a trip for a delivery: You can find the delivery you want to ship, and
auto-create a trip and related trip stops.
Auto-creating a trip for containers and lines: You can find the lines and containers
you want to ship and auto-create a trip which creates a trip, related deliveries,
and trip stops.

Manual
During transportation planning, you can manually create a trip and later assign
delivery lines or find the delivery lines and create a trip. For example, for a regular
trip scheduled to depart every Friday, you can manually set up a trip ahead of
time and then assign delivery lines. When you manually create a trip, you can
manually assign stops, deliveries, and delivery lines to that trip.

Ship Confirmation


The material picking process ends when the items are ship confirmed out of
inventory. Ship confirming the items removes the existing reservations and
performs the sales order issue transaction. You may choose to ship confirm only
part of the sales order quantity. In this case, the balance of the sales order may be
backordered. Back ordering at Ship Confirm automatically splits the sales order
into two lines. The first line represents the shipped quantity, and the second line
represents the backordered quantity. The backordered line is automatically Pick
Released by Oracle Shipping Execution. A move order line is automatically
generated for the backordered quantity.

What is Item Cross References used for?
Cross Reference types define relationship between Items and entities such as
Customer Items or Supplier Items.

What is the effect of the following transactions on On-Hand Qty? Sub Inventory
Transfer
Miscellaneous Issue

On-Hand Qty remains same on a Sub-Inventory transfer.
On-Hand Qty reduces on Miscellaneous Issue

What is a Modifier?
Modifiers enable you to setup price adjustments. (For example, discounts and
surcharges), benefits (for example, free goods, coupons) and freight and special
charges that the price Engine applies immediately to pricing requests or accrues
for later disbursement.

What are the different types of Modifiers?
Discount List, Freight and Special Charges, Promotion surcharge.

Is the Customer Site data available across the operating units?
No, only header data is available.

What are defaulting Rules?
Information that Oracle Order Management automatically enters depending on
other information you enter.



What does Pick Release mean?
An order cycle action to notify warehouse personnel that orders is ready for
picking.

Pick release rule
A user-defined set of criteria to define what order lines should be selected during
picks release.

What does ATP mean? What is the significance of ATP?
Available to Promise.

What is meant by RMA?
Return Material Authorization- Return Material Order.

Explain Credit Check and Credit Hold for a Customer Site?
Credit Check is a check carried by the System the customer is exceeded his credit
limit. Credit hold is a hold applied on orders when he exceeds his credit limit.

What is Over Picking?
Over picking is a new enhancement included in the Order Management
family pack G(2118482) that allows the Pick Confirm transaction to pick in
excess of the requested quantity as long as it is within the over shipment
tolerance.

It also allows the user to prevent breaking LPNs or lots by small amounts when
the quantity requested does not match the quantity in inventory. For example, if
the customer ordered 5 cans and the warehouse have only 6-packs, and the
warehouse either is out of individual cans or has a policy against loose cans. The
over picking functionality allows the picker to pick a 6-pack (6 cans wrapped) to
fulfill the order, instead of picking exactly 5 cans.

This functionality will not be offered prior to OM Family Pack G code release. This
means that there will not be an option for backporting of this code. In order to
receive this code, OM Family Pack G or higher family pack needs to be applied.

What is Back order? When it occurs?


In the Back Order the material gets unreserved. . Backorders caused by Pick
Releasing (PR) order lines when there is no or not enough stock available. And
backorders caused by shipping less, at Ship confirm, than what was released.


How are Backorders handled /processed?
As in previous releases, Order Management and Shipping Execution has two types
of Backorders. Backorders caused by Pick Releasing (PR) order lines when there
is no or not enough stock available. And backorders caused by shipping less, at
Ship confirm, than what was released.

A. Backorders after Pick Releasing with Insufficient Stock
Pick Release will process all order (more correctly shipping) lines that you selected
when submitting PR. It will create move order lines for each line, whether there is
stock available or not. You (or the system) will however, not be able to (auto)
detail and (auto) Pick Confirm the lines where there is not enough stock
available. In R11i, you cannot switch off reservations for PR. Also, the system will
not print pick slips for lines that are not detailed.

The delivery line, which was 'Ready to Release' before running PR will be split into
a quantity that was available for picking and a unavailable quantity. The first
delivery line will become status Released (Pick Confirmed), the second
'Submitted for Release' (Move Order created, but not confirmed). In the latter
case, the Details Required' status is checked. The order line will not split at this
point, but receives a 'Picked partial' status. After Ship Confirming the Released
delivery line, the original order line will be split into a 'Shipped' and a 'Submitted
for Release' line (unless the shipped quantity falls within the under shipment
tolerance). The latter will be available for Pick Release as a 'Backorder' as soon as
there is stock available. On the sales order, there is no order or workflow status
called 'Backorder'. You will not really see any difference between a scheduled
order line that was never released and a backordered line. Pick Release is able to
distinguish between the two, because it allows you to release them separately.


B. Backorders Caused by shipping less than what was Released
Before Ship Confirming a Released (Pick Confirmed) delivery line, you have the
option to update the shipped quantity. If the shipped quantity is less than the


picked quantity, you have can either designate the remaining quantity as
'Backordered' (meaning the quantity was lost somewhere along the
picking/staging process) or leave it in staging in to assign it to a different delivery
(i.e. truck was full and wait for next pick up).

At Ship Confirm, any staged quantities will be split off in a separate delivery line
that is immediately ready to be shipped in a subsequent delivery. A backordered
quantity will remain noted on the same delivery line. Only when the original
delivery line is interfaced through Inventory Interface/Order Management
Interface, will the order line be split into a line for the shipped quantity and a new
line for the backordered quantity (Awaiting shipping). This enables you to pick
the remaining quantity again in order to fulfill the complete order quantity. This
split will only happen if the backordered quantity is greater than the Under
Shipment Tolerance.


How come when I ship confirm a delivery the Inventory and OM Interface are
not run?
When ship confirming a delivery, there is a check box labeled Close Trip. If that
check box is checked, the Trip and associated stops are closed when the delivery
is closed.

If the check box is not checked, then you have to manually go to the stop tab and
close a stop. Once a stop is closed, the Inventory and OM Interface are
submitted.

How can lines that were unassigned from a delivery a time of ship confirm due
to a credit hold, be released after the hold has been removed?
Create a new delivery, assign the lines to the new delivery and perform the ship
confirm process.



How can I ship the fastest way?
Check the Autodetail option in Pick Release. It can be defaulted from the
Shipping Parameters form. Set the profile INV: Detail Serial Numbers to
Yes. Inventory will then suggest serial numbers during the


Detailing process. Do not check the Pick Confirmation Required flag in the
Organization Parameters form.

What criteria use the process to release the eligible order lines?
This is indicated by the Release Sequence Rule. It uses the following attributes:
order number, outstanding invoice value, schedule date, departure date and
shipment priority.

How does the pack slip report groups the released lines?
It uses the pick slip grouping rule assigned during the pick release. A pick release
process may print more that one report for the same picking batch.

ORG_ID can be set at Master Level or Transaction Level?
ORG_ID can be set at Transaction Level.

How do restrict data for a responsibility as per the ORG_ID?
Through Multi-Org you can restrict data for a responsibility as per the ORG_ID.
Only in GL, Set of book id should have the value to restrict the data for a
responsibility.

What is meant by drop shipment order type? What are the different steps
involved in executing sales order?
In the Drop shipment order, there is no shipping involved. The steps involved are
Book the Order, Purchase release, Invoicing. The invoice can be done only after
the receipt is made for the purchase order created by the purchase requisition
created from the Purchase release.

Warehouses are what organizations in Oracle Manufacturing?
Inventory

What is meant by shipment tolerance?
Over/Under shipment tolerance, While shipping we can over/under shipping the
quantity in the sales order.

What is the difference between Standard Sales Order Cycle and Drop Shipment
Order Cycle?
Shipment is the difference.



What is Hold management?
Hold
A feature that prevents an order or order line from progressing through the order
cycle. You can place a hold on any order or order line.

Hold criteria
A criterion used to place a hold on an order or order line. A hold criteria can
include customers, customer sites, orders, and items.

Hold source
An instruction for Order Management to place a hold on all orders or lines that
meet criteria you specify. Create a hold source when you want to put all current
and future orders for a particular customer or for a particular item on automatic
hold. Order Management gives you the power to release holds for specific orders
or order lines, while still maintaining the hold source. Oracle Order Management
holds all new and existing orders for the customer or item in your hold source
until you remove the hold source.

Hold type
Indicates the kind of hold you place on an order or order line.

What is the Item attributes for an Item to create Drop Ship Order?
Purchased (PO) Enabled
Purchasable (PO) Enabled
Translatable (INV) Enabled
Stock able (INV) Optional
Reserveable (INV) Enabled
Customer Ordered (OM) Enabled
Customer Orders Enabled (OM) Enabled
Default SO Source Type Optional
Shippable (OM) Enabled
Transact able (OM) Enabled
Costing Enabled (enabled for items that are
to be costed)
Inventory Asset Value Enabled (for asset items) (non-
expense items)



What is the Item attributes for an Item to create Internal Sales Order?
Main Tab Standard
Inventory Tab *Inventory Item,*Stock able,
Transact able, Revision Control
Receivable, Check Material Storage
Bill of Material Tab BOM Allowed
Purchasing Tab Purchased Purchasable Use
Approved Supplier
General Planning Tab Make or Buy Source Type: Supplier
Lead Times Tab Preprocessing give some values
Work-in-process Tab Build in WIP
Order Management Tab Customer Ordered, Customer
Enabled, Shippable, *Internal Order,
*Internal Order Enabled,
*OE Transact able, Assemble To
Order, Returnable
*Customer should be Internal



Can you update the Sales Order once it is Booked?
Depends on the Processing Constrains setup.

What are the prerequisites of the Sales Order?
Customer, Price List and Order Type.



What are different order types?
Order
Return
Mixed
Oracle Apps Purchasing FAQs


Q1. What is the difference between 'Accrue On Receipt' and 'Accrue at Period
End'?

A: Accrue On Receipt means that when a receipt is saved, accrual transactions are
immediately recorded and sent to the general ledger interface. This is also known
as "online" accruals. Accrue at Period End means that when a receipt is saved, the
accrual transactions are not immediately recorded and sent to the general ledger;
instead, the accounting entries are generated and sent at the end of the month by
running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End Process.

All items with a destination type of either Inventory and Outside Processing are
accrued on receipt. For items with a destination type of Expense, you have the
option of accruing on receipt or at period end.


Q2. Why are expense items typically accrued at period-end, and why are
inventory
items always accrued on receipt?

A: One should accrue on receipt if perpetual inventory is adopted to facilitate
reconciliation between inventory valuation reports and accounting entries.
Expense items typically are not accounted for on a daily basis, and most
companies find it easier to account for and reconcile these expenses at month-
end rather than at the time each individual expense is incurred.

When both inventory and expense items are accrued on receipt, the following
problems may be encountered:
A) Receiving inspection balances will include both inventory assets and expenses,
so at the end of the month, they will need to be manually reclassified.
B) The number of entries needed to research and reconcile the perpetual A/P
Accrual Account(s) becomes significantly increased. Since the expense receipts
could double the number of accrual accounting entries to process, the Accrual
Reconciliation Report could take twice as long to run. The amount of time
required by your staff to research any discrepancies would also increase.




Q3. Which Purchasing report should be used to review period-end accruals?

A: The Uninvoiced Receipts Report should be used to view period-end accruals.


Q4. Which Purchasing report should be used to review online accruals?

A: The Accrual Rebuild Reconciliation Report should be used to view accrual
transactions for inventory items and expense items which are set to accrue on
receipt (online accruals). These transactions can also be included on the
Uninvoiced Receipts Report by setting the parameter 'Include Online Accruals' to
Yes when submitting the report.


Q5. After entering receipts and running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End
Process, the new journals do not appear in the General Ledger. Should the
transactions automatically appear in GL after performing these steps?

A: The transactions from Oracle Purchasing are only sent to the GL_INTERFACE
table; in order to create the journals and see them in General Ledger, the Journal
Import concurrent program must be run from a General Ledger responsibility. Be
sure to review the output file from the Journal Import request to ensure that the
records imported successfully.


Q6. How can one tell whether each journal in the general ledger is for period-
end or on receipt (online) accruals?

A: Period-end and online accrual entries may be contained in the same GL batch,
but there will be separate journals created for each. Journals created by the
Receipt Accruals - Period-End Process will have a category of 'Accrual'; journals
created for online accruals with have a category of 'Receiving'. Here is some
technical table-level information that may provide assistance: Table:
GL_INTERFACE Column : USER_JE_SOURCE_NAME = Purchasing Column :
USER_JE_CATEGORY_NAME = Accrual (for period-end accruals) - OR -
USER_JE_CATEGORY_NAME = Receiving (for online accruals) Table:
GL_JE_HEADERS Column : JE_SOURCE = Purchasing JE_CATEGORY = Accrual (for


period-end accruals) - OR - JE_CATEGORY = Receiving (for online accruals)


Q7. Does the process of reversing journals for period-end accruals occur
automatically in GL?

A: The process of reversing the accrual journals does not occur automatically;
they must be manually reversed in the general ledger.


Q8. For the Uninvoiced Receipts Report, what is the purpose of the parameter
'Accrued Receipts'?

A: This parameter should be set to 'No' to see only the uninvoiced receipts which
have not yet been accrued by running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End process.
This parameter should be set to 'Yes' to see all uninvoiced receipts, including
those which have been accrued by running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End
Process.


Q9. Records are appearing on the Uninvoiced Receipts report for expense items
which have been received but not invoiced. How can these records be removed
from the report and kept from accruing each month?

A: There are a couple of methods that can be used to remove records from the
report and to keep them from accruing each month: A) Close the purchase order
shipment line. Closing the purchase order at the Header or Line level will also
have the same effect. On the Purchase Order Summary form, select Special ->
Control, then 'Close'. NOTE: Selecting 'Cancel' will not keep receipts from accruing
each month. Refer to question/answer #10 below for an explanation of this. B)
Create an invoice in AP and match it to the purchase order for the entire received
quantity. Some users choose to create a 'dummy' invoice for $0.00 in this case.


Q10. A purchase order shipment was received against, then canceled. It now
appears on the Uninvoiced Receipts report and accrues each month when


running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End process. Why is this happening?

A: When a purchase order is canceled (whether at the header, line, or shipment
level), only the unreceived quantity is actually canceled. Cancellation does not
effect quantities already received, as an obligation still remains for these receipts.
If the quantity received is equal to the quantity invoiced (billed), or if no receipts
have been entered against the purchase order shipment, then cancellation sets
the Canceled flag of the shipment to 'Yes' and the Closure Status to 'Closed'. In
this case, no accrual transaction will be generated. If the quantity received is not
equal to the quantity invoiced, then cancellation sets the Canceled flag of the
shipment to 'Yes' and the Closure Status remains in its current status (i.e., not
'Closed'). The difference between quantity received and quantity invoiced will
appear on the Uninvoiced Receipts report, and will continue to accrue each
month until an invoice is matched for the entire received quantity, or until the
received items are returned to the Supplier.


Q11. What is the difference between the Accrual Reconciliation Report and the
Accrual Rebuild Reconciliation Report?

A: The report is available as two (2) separate concurrent programs: the Accrual
Reconciliation Report and the Accrual Rebuild Reconciliation Report. Both reports
run using the same report definition file: POXACREC.rdf. When the Accrual
Rebuild Reconciliation Report is selected, the following events occur: - The
program will delete all records currently stored in the
PO_ACCRUAL_RECONCILE_TEMP_ALL table - Accounting entries are selected from
the appropriate sources (sub ledgers) based on the parameters entered at the
time of report submission - The temporary table
PO_ACCRUAL_RECONCILE_TEMP_ALL is repopulated with these accounting
entries - Report output is generated based on this information When the Accrual
Reconciliation Report is run, the report does not reselect the information from
the sub ledgers; instead, it reports only on the data currently stored in the
PO_ACCRUAL_RECONCILE_TEMP_ALL table. This feature saves time and
decreases the performance impact on the system, because the accrual
information does not have to be regenerated from the original sources every time
the report is submitted. Typically, the Accrual Rebuild Reconciliation Report is run
at the end of the period, and the Accrual Reconciliation Report is used for interim


reporting. Note that the title showing on the report output remains the Accrual
Reconciliation Report regardless of which process is actually submitted.


Q12. How do transactions which have subtotals of $0.00 get removed from the
Accrual Reconciliation Report?

A: When submitting the report, setting the following parameters as shown will
allow for these transactions to not show on the report output: Include All
Transactions = No Transaction Amount Tolerance = 0 (or higher)


Q13. Several transactions appear on the Accrual Reconciliation Report which
were charged to the accrual account in error. Manual journal entries have
already been created in GL to correct these transactions. How do these
transactions now get removed from the report?

A: In Oracle Purchasing, go to the Accrual Write-Offs form. Responsibility:
Purchasing Super User Navigation: Accounting/Accrual Write Offs Select the lines
that need to be removed from the report and save Then, run the Accrual
Reconciliation Report again, setting the parameter 'Include Written-Off
Transactions' to No. The written-off transactions will no longer be included in the
report. NOTE: You can run the Accrual Write-Off Report to review the
transactions that were written off; this can be used to support the manual journal
entry created in the general ledger.

FAQ Details
Q1. Is it possible to show more than two decimal places in the "PRICE" column
that is currently being printed on the 'Printed Purchase Order Report -
(Landscape or Portrait)'?

A: Currently, it is not possible to print more than two decimals in the 'PRICE' field
without customizing the reports. There is currently an enhancement request
(628857) under review that will, if approved, bring this desired functionality to
future releases. This answer holds true to Releases 10.7, 11.0, and 11.5 (11i).




Q2. When I print out a purchase order from the Document Approval window,
does it only print in Portrait style?

A: Currently this is the only way it will print from the Document Approval window.
An enhancement request (466551) has been filed to allow the choice of either
Portrait or Landscape as the format when printing purchase orders from the
Document Approval window.


Q3. Why does the blanket purchase agreement print every time a release is
printed?

A: This is the current functionality of the application. The blanket purchase
agreement will be printed every time you choose to print an associated release.
An enhancement request (432017) has been filed to allow only the release to be
printed.


Q4. What is the name of the file that controls printing of reports related to
Oracle Purchasing, and where is it located on the system?

A: The name of the file is porep.odf. This file creates the Oracle Purchasing views
which generate the data that is printed by the reports. The file can be found in
the following locations:

$PO_TOP/admin/odf This is where the base release version of the file is seeded
by the install.
$PO_TOP/patch/110/odf This is where the most current version of the file resides
on your system for Release 11.
$PO_TOP/patchsc/107/odf This is where the most current version of the file
resides on your system for Release 10.7.
For Windows NT, it is best to use the FIND FILE utility to locate the various
versions of the file.


Q5. How can a report file name and version be located?



A: There are two methods that can be used to find the report short (file) name:

1. Please see Note 106968.1, titled "Purchasing: PO Report Short Names". This
note contains an alphabetical listing of all Oracle Purchasing reports and lists the
short name for each one.

2. Each report is a concurrent process that can be found in System Administration.
- Responsibility: System Administrator
- Navigation: Concurrent > Program > Define
- Select the Program Name
Under the Program Name field, you will see a field called Short Name. This is the
name of the report file. This name should be the same as the name of the file in
the Executable field.

To find the version of the file:

For Unix
********
For Release 10.7, go to $PO_TOP/srw
For Release 11, go to $PO_TOP/reports

Type the following command at a Unix prompt:
strings -a <FILENAME.rdf>|grep Header:

For Windows NT
**************
Use the FIND FILE utility to locate the file. Use MS-DOS to navigate to the
file and type the following command at the prompt:
find /i "Header:" <FILENAME.rdf>


Q6. Why do asterisks (******) appear on report output in place of the
quantity?

A: Oracle Reports will allow a maximum of 13 characters to be printed in the
Quantity column. These characters include a -/+ sign at the beginning and then a
combination of 12 more characters, including commas, periods, and digits.


Therefore, if the quantity on a report contains more than 13 characters, you will
see the asterisks show in place of the quantity.

Examples:
9,999,999.00 actually contains 13 characters and will be displayed. Remember,
the + sign is holding the first character position in the database.
-1.2245833524335 would print asterisks, as more than 13 characters are involved.

You do have the ability to change the way your reports print out the numbers in
the Quantity region; this may make the difference in allowing you to see the
actual quantity. You cannot change the number of characters in the field, but you
can change the way they display. This will give you more options. To do this:
Responsibility: System Administrator
Navigation: Profiles/System
Query the profile 'INV: Dynamic Precision Option for Quantity on Reports'
Click on the List of Values and you will see the different options available for you
to use on your reports. You will notice that all options still only represent 13
characters; it just changes the way they are represented.

See Note 1072855.6 for further clarification.


Q7. When a report has been submitted to print, the output can be viewed by
using the View Output button, but no hard copies of the report print out. What
causes this to occur??

A: The number of copies Oracle Reports will print is controlled in System
Administration.
Responsibility: System Administrator
Navigation: Profiles/System
Query the profile 'Concurrent: Report Copies'
If this profile is not populated, Oracle will not print any copies of any report.


FAQ Details
Q1. Will end-dating a position with approval authority have no effect on the
employees who are tied to that position in terms of their ability to approve?



A: End-dating a position would not directly affect the approval capability of the
employees who still have active assignments to that position. Basically the
approval activities are meant to revolve around the position assignments rather
than the position itself. The integration coupling point of HRMS and PO is at the
position assignment level. Until the assignments are also modified, end-dating a
position would not immediately change the forwarding hierarchy.

Q2. What impact, therefore, would end-dating a position have? The customer
knows that in HR they cannot assign employees to end-dated positions.

A: End-dating a position would prevent new assignments to be made to this
position. Besides, this position should not be used in new hierarchies that
customers might design. The System gives a warning if the end-dated position is
chosen in a new hierarchy. But end dating a position would not directly translate
into the position assignments becoming end-dated that has to be done by
customers. Now, since the assignments are still active, employees should be
enabled in continuing to do the tasks (e.g. approval) pertaining to those
assignments.

Q3. What does the status 'INVALID' do to the position?

A: This is same as what end dating does to the position.

Q4. The errors in the log file of the Fill Employee Hierarchy report are a result of
employees not being tied to a position. In the hierarchy, won't there be
positions with no Employees tied to them from time to time? Does it mean that
the customer has to disassociate the employees from the end-dated positions
manually? Wouldn't this cause this type of error?

A: Yes there can be positions which are vacant. That is perfectly valid. But having
employees with assignments on expired positions is different and not so
desirable. Therefore, you should indeed terminate the existing assignments and
make new ones for the employees on an expired position. This need not be done
manually. Check the 'Mass Move' functionality.



Q5. What are the actions for which we need to run the Fill Employee Hierarchy
process?

A: You must run this process before any of the following changes can take effect:
- Add or delete an employee.
- Change an employee name or an employee position. (See: the online help for
the Enter Person window.)
- Add, delete, or modify a position. (See: Representing Jobs and Positions,Oracle
Human Resource Management Systems User's Guide.)
- Add, delete, or modify a position hierarchy. (See: Representing Jobs and
Positions, Oracle Human Resource Management Systems User's Guide.)

Q6. Why does the Fill Employee Hierarchy report take a long time to complete?

A: There have been lot of performance improvements done to this process. The
Fill Employee Hierarchy report first deletes all the records from the
po_employee_hierarchies table and then recreates the hierarchies and this
process will take some time.

Q7. Is the PO_EMPLOYEE_HIERARCHIES_ALL table defined at the operating unit
level or at the Business Group level?

A: Before the bug fix 2058578, we used to define the data in this table at the
operating unit level. But we have changed the design and populate the data at the
Business Group level. This is because Positions and Employees are defined at the
Business Group level but not at the operating unit level, therefore now we define
the data in the PO_EMPLOYEE_HIERARCHIES_ALL table at Business Group level.


FAQ Details
Q1. What does the status Pre-Approved mean, and how does a document reach
this status?

A: The status of Pre-Approved is the outcome of a person forwarding a document


for approval even though the forwarding person has the necessary authority to
approve it. The document may have been forwarded by mistake or for business
reasons. It is not possible to perform a receipt against a document with a status of
Pre-Approved.


Q2. What is the difference between DIRECT and HIERARCHY forwarding
methods?

A: The document forwarding method is selected in the Document Types form:
Responsibility: Purchasing Super User
Navigation: Setup -> Purchasing -> Document Types
The two choices for the document forwarding method are Direct and Hierarchy;
both options are always available regardless of whether Position Hierarchies
(positions) or Employee-Supervisor Relationships (jobs) are being used.

A. Direct Forwarding Method
Using this forwarding method, at the time which a document is submitted for
approval, validation will occur up the approval chain until an approver is located
that has the ability to approve the document in question.
- If Position Hierarchies are being used, then the validation will occur against
positions listed in the position hierarchy specified in the document approval
window. Once a position that has approval authority has been located, the system
will locate the employee assigned to this position and designate him as the
Forward-To. The selection of the employee is based on alphabetical context.
- If Employee/Supervisor Relationships are being used, then validation will occur
against, first, the supervisor's job of the employee submitting the document for
approval; then, if that supervisor does not have authority, the system will look to
the supervisor's supervisor. The validation process will continue up this
employee/supervisor chain until an approver with the proper authority is
located.

B. Hierarchy Forwarding Method
Using this forwarding method, validation is not performed to locate the next
possible approver with sufficient authority; the documents will simply route to
each person in the approval chain. The document, once submitted for approval,
will move to either the person assigned to the next position in the position


hierarchy if positions are being used, or the employee's supervisor if
employee/supervisor relationships are being used.
The key difference between the two options is that Direct forwarding will move
the document to the first person with authority to approve, whereas Hierarchy
will simply move the document to the queue of the next employee in the
approval chain, whether that
person has the approval authority or not.


Q3. What is the significance of the Document Total and Account Range types on
the Approval Groups form?

A: The Document Total type sets the maximum limit for any approval actions
taken by the user whom the approval group applies to. If multiple Document
Totals are specified, the restriction will be to the Document Total, which is the
lowest. The Account Range also allows for a document total which is then tied to
a specific range of accounts listed on the same line. It is possible to have different
account ranges with different amount Limits. This allows the same user to have a
different dollar/account limit. It is mandatory to have an account range specified
in each approval group defined. By default, if there is not an account range
defined, all accounts will then be excluded from the document approval process,
which means that the documents will not have an ability to become approved.


Q4. What is the significance of using jobs or positions, and what effect will
choosing one or the other have on the document approval routing?

A: The choice of whether or not jobs or positions are going to be used is made at
the operating unit level within the Financial Options form. Responsibility:
Purchasing Super User
Navigation: Setup -> Organizations -> Financial Options select the Human
Resources alternate region
If the option Use Approval Hierarchies is checked, then positions and position
hierarchies are going to be utilized for the operating unit in question; if left
unchecked, employee/supervisor relationships will be used for the approval
hierarchy routing path.
NOTE: If positions are being used, then position hierarchies will need to be


created as they are going to be the roadmap for document approvals. If jobs are
being used, then the employee/supervisor relationship will serve as the roadmap.


Q5. What is the difference between archiving on Approve versus Print?

A: The archiving method determines at which point revision data will be written
to the document archive tables. Archive on Approve designates an update to the
Purchasing archive tables at the time of document approval; each time a revision
is made to a document and the document enters a Requires Re-approval state,
the new revision information will be archived at the time the document is
approved again. Archive on Print designates an update to the document archive
tables at the time the purchase order is printed.
The following graph illustrates the difference between the two settings. The
Archive Rev columns denote the highest revision of the purchase order currently
residing in the purchase order archive tables. The Current Rev columns denote
the current revision level of the purchase order, as seen in the header region of
the Purchase Orders form.

Step# Action
Archive
on
Approve
Archive
on
Approve
Archive
on Print
Archive
on Print

Archive
Revision
Current
Revision
Archive
Revision
Current
Revision
1.
Create
Purchase
Order
None 0 None 0
2.
Change
Controlled
Information
None 0 None 0
3.
Approve
Purchase
Order
0 0 None 0
4.
Change
Controlled
Information
0 1 None 0


5.
Approve
Purchase
Order
1 1 None 0
6.
Print Purchase
Order
1 1 0 0
7.
Change
Controlled
Information
1 2 0 1
8.
Approve
Purchase
Order
2 2 0 1
9.
Print Purchase
Order
2 2 1 1
10.
Change
Controlled
Information
2 3 1 2
11.
Print Purchase
Order
2 3 2 2
12.
Approve
Purchase
Order
3 2 2 2



Q6. In Release 11.X, every time attempting to approve a document it remains in
the status of 'Incomplete' - why?

A: Sometime, a documents may still have a status of Incomplete after an attempt
to approve the document has been made; this indicates a failure in the validation
of the approval authority for the document creator, along with the inability to
locate an employee with the proper authority to forward the document.


Q7. How is it possible to approve a blanket release when the blanket purchase
agreement is showing that the full amount has already been released?



A: The validation of a release dollar amount is not against the amount agreed on
the header of the blanket purchase agreement; instead, it validates against the
Amount Limit specified in the Terms and Conditions window of the Purchase
Orders form. If this field is left blank, then the release can be for any amount.
Therefore, it is imperative that the Amount Limit field be populated with the
same dollar amount as the Amount Agreed field in the header region of the
Purchase Orders form, depending on the business needs. It should also be noted
that Release 11i also has introduced an Amount Limit field that can be defined at
the line level of the blanket agreement.


Q8. I am delegating the approval of a PO to someone who doesn't have access
to open this PO. Would he be able to approve it?

A: Since he has been 'delegated' the approval authority from you, his approval
actions would be adjudged as if you were taking those actions on this document.
However, the document would remain inaccessible to him. This is because by
'Delegating', you are only allowing him to act on approval decisions on your
behalf, rather than also delegating him the access authority.


Q9. I have end-dated a position but still have the employees assigned to this
position. These employees continue to be able to approve the POs as before.
Why?

A: They would continue to be able to approve as long as they have valid
assignments!
When you are altering your organization structure by expiring a position, you
MUST also make alternatives for the open assignments on this position. This
should be a part of your organization structure migration process. Once you have
migrated completely to the new Position Structure, including the proper
employee-position assignments, run the Fill Employee Hierarchy program. This
would affect the PO Approval accordingly.
FAQ Details
Q1. Does autocreate copies descriptive flexfields from the requisition to the
document you create?



A: Yes, but it does not validate the information. For example: If in the requisition
desc flex is not mandatory and in the purchase order it is mandatory, autocreate
will not error out. It will just copy as is.


Q2. Does autocreate copy Notes from the requisition to the document you are
creating?

A: Yes, Notes are copied from the requisition lines and the corresponding
requisition header.

Q3. What are the columns on which autocreate combines the requisition lines
into a single document lines?

A: For purchase order, Purchasing combines the quantities of all requisition lines
that have the same item, item revision, line type, transaction reason, and unit of
measure onto a single document line. For RFQs, quantities of all requisition
lines that have the same item, revision, and line type are combined.


Q4. What price becomes the actual price in case multiple requisition lines with
different prices are combined to single PO line?

A: The lowest unit price from the combined requisition lines becomes the actual
price of the purchase order line.


Q5. What are the columns based on which Shipping information is combined in
case of autocreate?

A: For purchase orders and releases, Purchasing combines shipment information
only if the requisition lines have the same needby date, shipto location,
organization, Accrual type (periodend or online), and shipment type




Q6. Does autocreate add to an existing PO shipment that has been
encumbered?

A: Purchasing does not add to an existing purchase order shipment if that
shipment has been encumbered even though all the grouping columns necessary
to combine shipping information are there.


Q7. What can be done to open the created document directly once autocreate is
done successfully?

A: Set the profile option PO: Display the autocreated Document to Yes,
Purchasing displays the Purchase Orders, Releases, or RFQ window, as
appropriate, after creating your document lines.


Q8. Can requisition line with item number and without item number [one time
item] be combined to single document line in autocreate?

A: If you want to combine two requisition lines for the same item, one with an
item number and one without, you have to manually autocreate the document
and use Modify on the Tools menu to add the predefined item to the requisition
line for the onetime item.
Note: You cannot use Modify with outside processing items or if you are using
encumbrance or budgetary control.


Q9. Can you autocreate a release if the description of the requisition created in
PO is different of the description of the Blanket?

A: No, If we do not choose an item, that is if the requisition and blanket are
created with one time/expense items the autocreate process tries to match the
descriptions as item id's are null. The only differentiating factor in one time items
(item id null) is the description.




Q10. How do you prevent autocreate from seeing requisitions from another
organization?

A: Requisitions and Purchase Orders are not organization specific. If you do not
want to be able to see or access requisitions across different organizations, then
you need to set up different operating units with different responsibilities tied to
each one.


Q11. Can you autocreate from a quotation and tie the PO to the associated
quotation and requisition?

A: Yes, you can autocreate from a Quotation.
Navigation:
1. Create and approve a requisition.
2. Go to the AutoCreate Screen, chose the requisition form the pool of approved
requisitions.
3. Change the Document Type field to RFQ and click the automatic button.
4. The RFQ is created and appears on the screen.
5. Enter the required fields on the RFQ (quote affectivity), click on the Supplier
button and choose the list of suppliers.
Change status to active and save.
6. To enter the vendor responses a Quote must be created.
Go to the RFQ screen and query up the RFQ you just created.
Click Special on the Tool bar and choose Copy Document.
This will create your quotation.
7. Go to the Quotation screen and query up the new quotation and enter
the price break information. Change the description (if PO attribute is set to allow
the description to be changed).
8. Approve the quotation.
9. AutoCreate the PO from the requisition.
Delete the description if the quote has a description different than the requisition
Click on the catalog button - Receive message
Your can update only the price for the saved record.
Open the Catalog to select price only
Click YES
10. Select the quote.


11. You will now have both the requisition and quote tied to the PO.


Q12. Where does the note to buyer show on an autocreated PO?

A: On the AutoCreate form, go to the Folder menu and choose Show Field. Select
Note to Buyer and click OK. The field will now be displayed.
If you would like this field to be displayed every time you use autocreate, go to
Folder -> Save As... Give the folder a name and check the Open as Default box.


Q13. Does the supplier name from a requisition get carried over to an
autocreated purchase order?

A: The standard functionality is that if the requisition has a the "suggested
supplier name" field populated, it would carry over to the autocreated PO. The
"suggested supplier name" field will only carry to the autocreated PO if it was
selected from the list of values on the requisition. If it is typed in manually, it will
not carry over.


Q14. What causes the app-14090 error when autocreating a requisition?

A: There are several things that must be performed to address this issue:
* Profile Option in MRP must be set as follows:
- MRP: Sourcing Rule Category Set value must be set to Purchasing in the
Purchasing application.
* AutoCreate Blanket PO
- Revisions do not default for Items when autocreating Blanket PO and the Item
Revision # must be entered.
- The Item Revision number on the requisition must match the Item Revision
number on the PO.
* Navigate: Setup -->Organization -->Financial Options; and in the Alternate
Region ENCUMBRANCE, verify if the REQUISITION ENCUMBRANCE checkbox is
checked.


* In the Sys Admin Responsibility navigate to:
Profiles=> query for the Profile Option PO: AUTOCREATE GL DATE.
If using the Encumbrance for Requisitions, then this Profile Option can be set to
either AUTOCREATE DATE or REQUISITION GL DATE. If not using Encumbrance,
then you may set it to NULL. This will solve the problem.
The Profile Option PO: AUTOCREATE GL DATE is applicable only if you are using
Encumbrance for Requisitions.


Q15. How do you autocreate a requisition with a document type as blanket
release when requisitions were imported from a 3rd party system?

A: Ensure the line types selected for Requisitions are appropriate.
You need to have Requisition Line types and PO Line types correctly associated.
Rerun the process and verify that the system does not error out.
Submit the request for requisition import and use the AutoCreate window to
create document with type as Blanket Release against the requisition.
Navigation:
Purchasing -> Reports -> Submit a request for Requisition Import
Purchasing -> AutoCreate


Q16. How do you autocreate mrp generated requisitions to a blanket purchase
order?

A: First initiate the Release Purchase Requisitions from the Planners Workbench.
Navigation:
Material Planning -> MRP -> Workbench
Second, in the Purchasing Responsibility, AutoCreate the requisition to a Blanket
PO.
Navigation: AutoCreate
For Autocreate to find these requisition lines from MRP, the Blanket PO line type
must be set to Goods because the MRP Purchase Requisition is always created
with a line type of Goods. The reason that MRP uses the line type of Goods is
because Goods is seeded data and because the MRP Planner Workbench uses
MRPPRELB.pls to insert a record into the PO_REQUISITION_INTERFACE table.




Q17. Can you autocreate more than one standard PO in one autocreate
session?

A: Yes,
1) Find the requisition lines to be autocreated.
2) Choose a line.
3) Autocreate the purchases order using the automatic button.
4) Do not leave the requisition lines screen.
5) Choose a different line.
6) Try to autocreate another standard purchase order by clicking the automatic
button.
7) The system gives the message: app-14090: no requisition lines were
autocreated.


Q18. Try to autocreate, but the system hangs, how to cancel the requisition that
are locked?

A: Check if there is a lock on the PO related tables.
Select object_id, session_id, oracle_username, os_user_name,
Process, locked_mode
From sys.v_$locked_object;
Select a.object_name, b.oracle_username
From all_objects a, v$locked_object b
Where a.object_id = b.object_id
And a.object_name like 'po%';
If you have any records returned, you have a lock. To disable the lock, kill the
session. Regenerating the form and bouncing the database will unlock all the
objects.


Q19. What is the package or procedure that stores the autocreate process?

A: Poxbwp1b.pls - autocreate po package body.


Description: this package contains all the functions to create purchase orders,
releases and rfq's from data stored in the po_headers_interface,
po_lines_interface and po_distributions_interface tables. When a user selects a
line to be autocreated, it loads the above interface tables. At that point the
functions which are part of this package are called and move to create the req line
into a release or purchase order.


Q20. What does the grouping method 'default' indicate in the autocreate form?

A: With the grouping method 'default' requisition lines for the same item,
revision, line type, unit of measure, and transaction reason are combined into
individual purchase order lines; and requisition lines for the same item, revision,
and line type are combined into individual rfq lines.


Q21. I autocreated a PO with two lines. When I go to the purchase order entry
screen and query the PO, instead of showing the lines created, it only shows a
new line with number 3. Why?

A: Make sure Inventory organization field is populated in Financial Options.
FAQ Details
Q1. What do I do if I am unable to Approve a Requisition?

A: 1. Check that the Document Manager is up.
2. Check and resolve the Document Manager error.
3. Run wfstat.sql and check its output.
4. If the above have been performed, check if you have set up approval
assignments correctly.
To set up approval assignments navigate to:
Purchasing>Setup>Approvals>Approval Assignments
On the find job approval assignments form, search and select the appropriate
position (e.g. VPM200 Vice President of Materials) which will display the "Assign
Approval Groups" window. On this window, make sure you have an approval
group selected for each document type you work with.




Q2. How do I check the Status of Deferred Activities?

A: 1. Run wfbkgchk.sql available at $FND_TOP/sql
2. For example, log on to the database by doing sqlplus
username/password@database
3. Then run the sql file, wfbkgchk.sql, by doing @wfbkgchk.sql

Q3. What do I do if I get the 'PO_ALL_EXIT_ERROR' error?

A: Have you performed the following?
1. Check if the message file is <lang.msb> is present. If not regenerate messages
using adadmin utility.
2. Set the Profile Option 'PO: Document Approval Mode' correctly.
Set the profile for one of the following options:
- Standard User Exit
- Document Approval Manager ( Which occurs twice in the List of values for the
Profile option. The correct profile option is the one which occurs the second
time)
Explanation:
As the System Administrator responsibility, the list of values for the system profile
option 'PO: Document Approval Mode' should contain 3 entries:
1. Document Approval Manager
2. Standard User Exit
3. Document Approval Manager
Note that the option 'Document Approval Manager' appears twice in the list.
The first one listed was actually obsoleted in 10.7 . Development will not be
providing a script which will remove or inactivate the old profile option. The
application does not offer the ability to inactivate or remove profile option
values.
To resolve the issue, either of the other two values (the second and third as
mentioned above) in the list of values can be used for the profile option and users
should then be able to approve a purchase order.


Q4. How do I identify Document Manager failures while Approving a
Document?



A: To identify the document manager error number, please look at the attribute
DOC_MGR_ERROR_NUM in the wfstat log provided.

DOC_MGR_ERROR_NUM VALUE - MEANING:
1 Document Manager Timed Out (It is taking more than 180 sec to complete the
activity). Bounce the Database and Restart the PO Approval Document Manager.
2 Document Manager is Down. Please restart the PO Approval Document
Manager.
3 Exception in the Code. In this case look at SYSADMIN_ERROR_MSG attribute for
more details.

Q5. What do I do when I get a Document Manager Failure Notification?

A: For customers on Family Pack and above:
1. A new item type POERROR is created for handling the error process in case of
any document manager related issues.
2. The following workflow attributes are defined with implementation specific
values. (These need to be set in POERROR wf) DOC_MGR_WAIT_RELATIVE_TIME -
amount of time processes will have to wait before getting picked again. (default
0) RETRY_COUNT - number of attempts to get document manager for approval
(default 0) TIMEOUT_VALUE - amount of time for notification to automatically
close itself. (default 0) SYSADMIN_USER_NAME - application user (typically
system administrator) who can receive notifications for document manager
related errors in status 1 and 2. (MUST BE SET BY CUSTOMER TO A VALID
USERNAME)
3. The workflow background engine always needs to be running for the POERROR
item type.
The interval between document manager retries is dependent on the following
factors
- attribute DOC_MGR_WAIT_RELATIVE_TIME
- work flow background engine wait period
Irrespective of the approval mode, there has to be separate workflow background
process for the POERROR item type which will "poll" those processes to complete
their "wait" periods and get picked for processing again. Once the background
engine is started, it will try to approve the document again. Users are not sent any
notifications for status 1 and 2 errors. Status 3 errors are reported to the user and
not to the system administrator.




Q6. What is the title of the executable file that represents the Document
Approval Manager, and where is it located on the server?

A: The executable file that contains the code for 'PO: Document Approval
Manager' is POXCON. This file can be found on the database server in the
$PO_TOP/bin directory. For a Windows NT environment, the file will be named
POXCON.EXE and the FIND FILE tool should be utilized to locate it.


Q7. Is it necessary to have the Document Approval Manager running, and how
many target processes should be available?

A: Yes, it necessary for the PO Document Approval Manager to be running in
order for the approval process to complete. The number of target processes
should be greater than or equal to the number of processors in the database
server (actual processes). Number of Target Processes => Number of Processors
on Server (actual process)


Q8. How does the Document Approval Manager get restarted?

A: The Document Approval Manager gets restarted on the Administer Concurrent
Managers form, using the following steps:

Responsibility: System Administrator
Navigation: Concurrent -> Manager -> Administer
- Locate the PO Document Approval Manager.
- In the Status column, you should see something saying the manager is not
running.

To reactivate the PO Document Approval Manager:
- Click on the line containing the PO Document Approval Manager
- Click the Deactivate button.
- Close and reopen the form.
- Locate the PO Document Approval Manager and click on the line


- Click on the Activate button.
The PO Document Approval Manager should now be restarted.

NOTE: The Internal Manager must be running for this process to work. If it is not
running, the DBA or System Administrator must restart the Internal Manager first.
FAQ Details
Q1. What are the setups required for Encumbrance Accounting?

A: 1) In General Ledger
a) Enable budgetary control in your Set of Books:
Navigation: Setup->Financials->Books
Alternative Region : Budgetary Control Options Flag Enable Budgetary Control.

b) Create budgetary control groups:
Navigation: Budgets->Define->Controls
Create name, description and enter Budgetary control rules. e.g.. Add Purchasing
as Source with category Purchases.
This control group has to be attached at the Site level or User level Profile Option
(Budgetary Control Group) and this will control the behavior regarding the
tolerance of budgetary control.

c) Define Budget:
Navigation->Budget->Define->Budget
In Budget, basically you set period boundary for your budget i.e. time frame.
Remember to open the periods for the budget by pressing the Open next year
button.
NOTE: A prerequisite to the above step is that Encumbrance year should be open
at Set of Books level.
Navigation: Setup->Open/Close

d) Define Budget Organization:
Navigation: Budget->Define->Organization
In this step you choose the accounts for which you want to have control and link
it to your Budget defined in step 'c'. Complete Header of form and Navigate to
Ranges and define your ranges for your organization.

e) Encumbrance types:


Navigation: Setup->Journals->Encumbrances.
Encumbrance types are defined so as to bifurcate the reservation of funds done
at different levels i.e. Requisition, PO or Invoice level, it helps management
people in having better financial control.

2) In Purchasing
a) Enable encumbrance: Encumbrance has to be enabled in Financial Options
form in Purchasing modules.
In Purchasing: Setup->Organization->Financial Options (Alternative region
Encumbrance)
Select different encumbrance types for different levels i.e. Requisition, PO and
Invoice. Here you attach the types that you defined in step 1.e of GL setup.
FAQ Details
Q1. What reference columns does Oracle Purchasing populate in the table
gl_bc_packets? And what information is populated in these columns?

A: Oracle Purchasing populates four of the five reference fields.
Reference1 with the document type, e.g. PO or REQ.
Reference2 with the document header id, po_header_id or requistion_header_id.
Reference3 with the distribution id, po_distribution_id or distribution_id.
Reference4 with the document number, purchase order number or requisition
number.


Q2. If over receipt of goods, will Oracle Purchasing reverse encumbrances
associated with the over receipt quantity?

A: No, this is not possible as the budget is only updated with the encumbrance
amount when the purchase order was created. Since this transaction has already
been logged in gl_bc_packets and potentially picked up by the Create Journals
program there is no method to modify this transaction.


Q3. How do I liquidate excess encumbrances for the purchase order, purchase
order line or purchase order shipment?

A: By performing a Final Close on the document. However, this action is


irreversible, so be sure no other transactions need to be completed before the
Final Close.


Q4. How can I tell if Oracle Federal Financials is installed in my database?

A: To check if Federal Financials is installed in the application, join the tables
FND_APPLICATION and FND_PRODUCT_INSTALLATIONS as:

SELECT fa.application_id, fa.application_short_name,
fpi.status
FROM fnd_application fa,
fnd_product_installations fpi
WHERE fa.application_id= fpi.application_id
AND fa.application_short_name like 'FV%'
SQL> /

APPLICATION_ID APPLICATION_SHORT_NAME
-------------- ------------------------------------------- -
8901 FV I

In addition to the status of installed, you can also query the dba_objects view for
the object_name with a prefix of FV, for example:

SELECT object_name
FROM dba_objects
WHERE object_name like 'FV%'
AND owner='APPS';

If there are any objects in the database with the prefix FV, a row will be returned.
There are approximately 500 objects that belong to the Federal Vertical
application.


Q5. Is there a way to unreserve or reverse an encumbrance on a purchase
order?



A: Beginning with Oracle Applications Release 11, there is the functionality of
Unreserving an encumbrance at the header level of a purchasing document. The
unreserve works only if funds are currently reserved for the document. Once you
have unreserved the document you can modify as needed.


Q6. What is a Transaction Code and how is this defined?

A: Transaction codes are typically used when the budgetary or the fund
accounting model is employed. The vertical application Oracle Federal Financials
includes the profile Enable Transaction Codes which activates this functionality.

Once transaction codes have been enabled, they can be defined in General Ledger
(Setup - Accounts - Transaction Codes). Transaction codes are used as a shortcut
to create debit and credit pairs for a single transaction.


Q7. What steps do I take when the approval of the purchase order fails due to
insufficient funds?

A: 1. Identify the distribution that is failing, the error message will usually indicate
which distribution is in error. Obtain the ccid of this distribution account.

2. . Check the budget organization for which this code combination id is assigned.
This is accomplished in General Ledger (Budgets - Define - Organization).

a) First find the budget_entity_id (budget that this account is tied to)
select set_of_books_id , budget_entity_id ,
range_id, AUTOMATIC_ENCUMBRANCE_FLAG ,FUNDS_CHECK_LEVEL_CODE from
GL_BUDGET_ASSIGNMENTS where CODE_COMBINATION_ID = '&#####' ;

b) Using the budget_entity_id query the Budget Organization name.
select name, set_of_books_id , status_code from GL_BUDGET_ENTITIES
where budget_entity_id = '&####';

Specifically verify the Amount Type, the Boundary and the Funding Budget values.
The funding budget should be active and ensure that your encumbrance amount


has not exceeded the funds available for the funds checking interval (boundary).
For example, if the budget total is $100,000.00, the amount budgeted per quarter
is $25,000.00, the Amount type is YTD and the boundary is QTD, then check that
the purchase order encumbrance would not exceed the boundary amount of
$25,000.00.


Q8. The Encumbrance Detail Report does not pick up expected purchase orders.

A: Review the parameters passed to the report to verify that the selection criteria
did not exclude the purchase order. The selection of purchase orders on this
report is based on the following information in the database:
- the setting of the encumbered_flag in po_distributions, needs to be set to Y, and
the cancel_flag in po_line_locations must be set to N and
- the gl_encumbered_date in po_distributions must be between the dates passed
to the report for the encumbered dates and
- the vendor used on the purchase order must be included by the Vendor
parameter and
- the po_distributions.prevent_encumbrance_flag must be set to N


Q9. Records are appearing on the Uninvoiced Receipts report for expense items
which have been received but not invoiced. How can these records be removed
from the report and kept from accruing each month?
Q10. A purchase order shipment was received against, then cancelled. It now
appears on the Uninvoiced Receipts report and accrues each month when
running the Receipt Accruals - Period-End process. Why is this happening?

A: These questions pertain to Oracle Purchasing release 10.7. The quantity on an
approved, encumbered Purchase Order can be changed by deleting and creating a
new line with a revised quantity.

There are restrictions regarding modifications to encumbered Purchase Orders
after being approved, and the following is standard functionality:

An encumbered Purchase Order cannot be modified as follows:
- Cannot change price


- Cannot change shipment distribution
- Cannot change shipment quantity
- Cannot change accounts (distributions)
- Cannot change currency

The line quantity can be increased as this will create more encumbrance. Upon
doing so additional shipment lines have to be added to resolve the differences in
the new quantity. A change in price would require real time modification to
existing rows in the GL_BC_PACKETS table and there is no provision in the
software code to do this.

The most efficient and recommended manner for revision of Purchasing
Documents is to cancel the Purchase Order line, shipment or even the entire
Purchase Order then recreate the Purchase Order with the revised data.

This cancellation does not perform a reversal of funds, but it does a
corresponding debit to the respective accounts to nullify the encumbrance.


Q11. If I go to cancel an encumbered/reserved purchasing document and the
period in which it was created is closed, I cannot cancel the line or document
due to the closed period?

A: There are software fixes released which place the reversing funds in the next
available open Purchasing period.

10.7 - pofdo.lpc 80.28

11.0 - pofbd.lpc 110.13
pofin.lpc 110.5

This has been fixed in 11i.


Q12. I click on the Approve button for a Purchase Order and the reserved check
box in the approval window is already enabled as default.



A: This issue is addressed in bug 1535050. Fix will be available in Purchasing
Patchset H for Release 11.


Q13. I am using encumbrance accounting and when I forward a Purchase Order
for approval, I am encountering the following error: APP-14166: Please enter a
forward to employee or funds are not reserved.

A: You must check the Reserve Funds check box when forwarding and/or
approving a Purchase Order if you are using encumbrance. You can check to see if
you are using encumbrance in Purchasing by doing the following:

1. Setup/Organizations/Financial Options
2. Change the Alternate Region to Encumbrance and see if the Use PO
Encumbrance check box is checked.
3. Refer Note 1064155.6 for more details.


Q14. I am trying to approve the Purchase Order and get the following error:
"This record cannot be reserved for update. It has already been reserved by
another user".

A: This is resolved In file version POXAPAPC.pld 110.37 (758079). This fix moves
the document submission check from document approval manager to client side.


Q15. Blanket Purchase Agreement have "Reserved" box checked on the
purchase order lines. I am not using encumbrance accounting.

A: This issue is Fixed file POXPOEPO.fmb ver 110.88 and also in Release 11i
(889797).


Q16. I reserve a requisition with 2 distributions - the 1st distribution succeeds
but fails for the 2nd distribution. Distributions quantities for both distributions
are changed and re-reserved but the reserved amount for the 1st distribution is


not changed (and is wrong compared to the quantity on the distribution).

A: This issue has been fixed in the following file versions:
10.7 fixed in POXRQLNS.pld 916.68 Purchasing Patchset P-1618264
11.0 fixed in POXRQLNS.pld 110.65 Purchasing Patchset G-1525417
11.5 fixed in POXRQLNS.pld 115.53 - (Internal bug - 1363372)


Q17. I created a new requisition, then reserved (without approving) the funds
are reserved. Then I delete the requisition from the requisition form, which
does not un-reserve funds.

A: This issue has been fixed in the following files:

10.7 -- Patchset O (Patch number 1267514)
POXRQRES.pls 80.1
POXRQREB.pls 80.4
po10sc.msg 80.20

11.0 -- Patchset F (Patch number 1330514)
POXRQR1S.pls 110.1
POXRQR1B.pls 110.5
po11.msg 110.25

11.5 -- Fixed in these files
POXRQR1S.pls-115.1
POXRQR1B.pls-115.1
poencmsg.ldt 115.0.

FAQ Details
Q1. What are Reminder notifications?

A: Once an approver doesn?t respond to approval notification for quite
sometime, then a reminder notification can be sent out to the approver. You can
send up to two reminders to an approver using the Timeout feature. You can also
specify that after a certain period of time, the document be forwarded
automatically to the next approver in the hierarchy. This feature has to be setup


by you by changing the PO and/or Requisition approval workflow in Oracle
Workflow Builder.


Q2. How do you setup the timeout feature?

A: In Oracle Workflow Builder, open the ?PO Approval? workflow (for purchase
orders) or the ?PO Requisition Approval? workflow for requisitions. To enable the
Timeout feature in the PO Approval workflow, modify the following activities in
the Notify Approver sub process by entering a Timeout period in their Properties
windows:
Approve PO Notification, PO Approval Reminder 1, and PO Approval Reminder 2.
To enable the Timeout feature in the PO Requisition Approval workflow, modify
the following activities in the Notify Approver sub process by entering a Timeout
period in their Properties windows: Approve Requisition Notification, Requisition
Approval Reminder1, and Requisition Approval Reminder2.


Q3. Any prerequisite for timeout to work?

A: Workflow Background Process must be running for the reminder notifications
to be generated. Background process must be set to run periodically if you want
the reminders to be regularly generated. Run this program with parameter
?Timeout? set as ?Yes?, and ?Item Type? parameter as ?PO Approval Process? or
?PO Requisition Approval Process? whichever appropriate.


Q4. How do you generate the notifications for the documents that need to be
started up in approval yet?

A: You can run ?Send Notifications For Purchasing Documents? program to search
the documents that are incomplete, rejected, or in need of re-approval and send
notifications to the appropriate people informing them about the document?s
status.




Q5. What are the different types of reminders that the notifications can be sent
for?

A: When ?Send Notifications For Purchasing Documents? program is run,
Notifications are generated regarding the following situations:
- POs and requisitions are Incomplete, Rejected or may require re-approval.
- POs and Releases require acceptance and acceptance is not yet received.
?Acceptance past due? notifications is sent if the acceptance required date is over
and no acceptance is entered by this date.
- RFQ's and Quotations are in status of In Process.
- Active RFQ approaching expiration i.e. current date is between Due Date and
Close Date.
- Active Quotation approaching expiration.
General Information
Q: What are the Oracle Applications patch types?
A: All Applications patches are organized by aggregation level.
Stand-alone (one-off) Patch: Addresses a single fix or enhancement. Stand-
alone patches are released only when there is an immediate need for a fix or
enhancement that cannot wait until an aggregate bundling is available. Although
stand-alone patches are intended to be as small as possible, they usually include
any dependent files that have changed since the base release in order to form a
complete patch that can be applied by any customer. The actual number of files
changed will depend on the current code level on the system to which the patch
is being applied.
Rollup Patch (RUP): An aggregation of patches that may be at the
functional level, or at a specific product/family release level. For example, a
Flexfields rollup patch contains all the latest patches related to Flexfields at the
time the patch was created. A Marketing Family 11.5.9 rollup patch contains all
the latest Marketing patches released since, and applicable to, 11.5.9.
Mini-pack: An aggregation of patches at the product level. For example,
Inventory Mini-pack G (11i.INV.G) contains all the latest patches for the Inventory
product at the time the mini-pack was created. Mini-packs are named in
alphabetical sequence such as 11i.INV.E, 11i.INV.F, 11i.INV.G, and so on. Mini-
packs are cumulative. In other words, 11i.INV.G contains everything in 11i.INV.F,
which contains everything in 11i.INV.E, and so on. The terms patchset and mini-
pack are often used interchangeably. <


Family Pack: An aggregation of patches at the product family level. For
example, Financials Family Pack C (11i.FIN_PF.C) contains all the latest patches for
products in the Financials family at the time the family pack was created. Family
product codes always end in "_PF" and family packs are given alphabetical
sequence such as 11i.HR_PF.B, 11i.HR_PF.C, and 11i.HR_PF.D. Family packs are
cumulative. In other words, Discrete Manufacturing Family Pack G
(11i.DMF_PF.G) contains everything in 11i.DMF_PF.F, which contains everything
in 11i.DMF_PF.E, and so on.
Maintenance Pack: An aggregation of patches for all products in the E-
Business Suite. For example, Release 11.5.9 Maintenance Pack contains all the
latest code level for all products at the time 11.5.9 was created. Maintenance
packs are numbered sequentially such as 11.5.7, 11.5.8, 11.5.9, and are
cumulative. In other words, 11.5.9 contains everything in 11.5.8, which contains
everything in 11.5.7, and so on.

In addition to releasing a maintenance pack, Oracle also packages a new Rapid
Install at each maintenance pack release level. So Applications Release 11.5.9
Rapid Install contains the same applications code level that a customer would get
if they applied the Release 11.5.9 Maintenance Pack on an earlier 11i release
level. Note that the technology stack could still be different since Rapid Install
includes the latest certified technology stack, but the maintenance pack includes
only Applications code.

Patches can also be organized by purpose.
Diagnostic Patch: Used to gather additional information when a product
failure cannot be reproduced by Oracle. The additional information will assist
Oracle Support Services and Oracle Development in resolving the failure.
Interoperability Patch: Allows Oracle Applications to function properly with
a newer version of the technology stack. Interoperability patches are typically
required with new version of the database or Applications technology stack.
Translated Patch: A non-English version of a patch. Release 11i supports 30
non-English languages. Customers who are using languages other than English,
need to apply the corresponding translated patch(es) for the languages they are
using in addition to any base US patch(es).
Merged Translation Patch: Provided in real time (without requiring a
translator) in the event a translated patch is not available when a customer needs
it. A merged translation patch is applied just like a fully translated patch. The fully


translated patch is escalated and is usually available within 24 hours. It can be
applied safely on top of a merged translation patch.
Translation Fix: Provided in the event a translation word choice is
inappropriate. A translation fix is applied just like a translated patch, except
there is no corresponding base US patch.
New Feature Patch: Introduces new functionality and/or products. It is
applied using standard patching utilities.
Consolidated Update: Improves and streamlines the upgrade and
maintenance processes by consolidating certain post-release patches. Most
recommended patches and rollups for a particular maintenance release are
consolidated into a single patch that is installed immediately following the
Maintenance Pack or the Rapid Install.
Family Consolidated Upgrade Patch: All upgrade-related patches
consolidated from all the products within a product family. Family consolidated
upgrade patches are released as needed and are only available for upgrading to
Release 11i from Release 10.7 or 11.0. TheOracle Applications Release Notes lists
the most recent patches.
Documentation Patch: Updates online help.


Q: How often should customers apply mini-packs, family packs, and maintenance
packs?
A: You should keep your maintenance level up to date in order to:
Receive the latest fixes.
Reduce the number of file updates needed for emergency fixes.
Reduce the possibility of unfulfilled prerequisite patches when applying an
emergency fix.
Make it easier for Oracle Support and Oracle Development to assist you.
Keep core products such as AD (patches and maintenance fixes), FND
(security and technology stack updates), and HR (legislative updates) up to date.

At a minimum, apply maintenance packs to stay within two maintenance releases.
For example, since 11.5.9 is currently available, customers at the 11.5.7 (or
earlier) level should be planning their upgrade to 11.5.9.

Use mini-packs and family packs if you have an immediate need for the latest


patch level for a product or product family and cannot wait to apply the
corresponding maintenance pack.

Q: How do I know what patches or files have been applied to a system? What
happened to my applptch.txt?
A: Prior to AD Mini-pack E, patch history was stored in a text file called
applptch.txt in the $APPL_TOP/admin/<SID> directory. AutoPatch appended the
applptch.txt file with information about each patch applied.

With AD Mini-pack E, the new Patch History feature stores all patch information
in database tables. If the information cannot be written to the database, it is
stored in files in the file system, and is automatically loaded to the database the
next time AutoPatch is run. In AD Mini-pack E, the temp file is named
applptch.txt. In AD Mini-pack H, there are two patch history files:
javaupdates<timestamp>.txt to record patch history about changes to Java files,
and adpsv<timestamp>.txt to record patch history about changes to all non-Java
files.

The best way to review patch history information is to use the patch history
search pages provided by Oracle Applications Manager. The patch history
database feature allows you to query on patches or files applied and filter by
patch number or file name, as well as date, product, APPL_TOP name, server
type, or language. SeeOracle Applications Maintenance Utilities for more
information.

Q: What is the AD Features matrix printed on the AutoPatch screen and logfiles?
A: AD Feature Versions is a framework created to handle mismatches between
the AD code on the file system and the AD objects in the database. Both the
version of the feature on the file system and the version of the feature in the
database are tracked separately. When the two versions do not match, the
feature is disabled, and when the two versions match, the feature is (normally)
enabled.

The table below is an example of the information displayed by AD Feature
Versions in AD utility log files. The first four columns in the table below represent
the name of the feature, whether or not the feature is enabled, the version of the
feature in the APPL_TOP, and the version of the feature in the database.



Feature Active? APPLTOP Data Model Flags
CHECKFILE Yes 1 1 Y Y N Y
PREREQ Yes 2 2 Y Y N Y
CONCURRENT_SESSIONS No 1 1 Y Y Y N
PATCH_HIST_IN_DB Yes 3 3 Y Y N Y



The Flags Column values represent:
- 1st flag: Is the feature enabled in the APPL_TOP?
- 2nd flag: Does the feature depend on any database objects?
- 3rd flag: Is the value of the 4th flag relevant?
- 4th flag: Is the feature enabled in the database?

This message is informational in nature only, the AD Feature Versions framework
is only used by AD internally and should not be modified unless under explicit
instructions from AD Development.

Q: What is a patch driver file? What is the difference between the c driver, d
driver, g driver, and u driver?
A: Patch driver files contain commands used by AutoPatch to direct the
installation of a patch. There are four types of driver files, and a patch can contain
more than one driver.
Copy driver (c driver): Named c<patchnumber>.drv, and contains
commands to change Oracle Applications files. The commands include directives
to copy/update files, libraries, and/or Java, and commands for generating JAR files
and/or C executables. In a multi-node system, run it on all application tier
APPL_TOPs.
Database driver (d driver): Named d<patchnumber>.drv, and contains
commands to change Oracle Applications database objects, such as PL/SQL and
table definitions, or to update or migrate data. In a multi-node system, run it only
on the application tier APPL_TOP that implements the admin server.
Generate driver (g driver): Named g<patchnumber>.drv, and contains
commands to generate forms, reports, and/or graphics files. In a multi-node
system, run it on all application tier APPL_TOPs, unless the APPL_TOP only
implements the admin server.


Unified driver (u driver): Named u<patchnumber>.drv, it is a consolidated
driver containing all copy, database, and generate actions. Apply this driver to all
APPL_TOPs on all application tier servers. AutoPatch knows which command
should be run on each type of application tier. The unified driver requires only a
single execution of AutoPatch. It is currently used only in the Release 11.5.9
Maintenance Pack.

If you merge a patch that contains a unified driver with patches that contain other
drivers, the resulting merged patch will contain only a merged unified driver.



Q: What are the patching implications of a multi-node environment? How do I
know what type of server/tier/node I am patching?
A: In a multi-node environment, you need to apply the patch, in its entirety, to the
node implementing the admin server first. After that you can apply the patch in
any order on the remaining nodes.

In many cases the terms 'server', 'tier' and 'node' are used interchangeably and
the exact meaning must be inferred from the context. Officially, the terms are
different and have a distinct meaning.

A node (or machine) is a computer.
A server is a collection of one or more computer processes that perform a specific
function.
A tier is a logical grouping of one or more servers or computer processes.

In Release 11i there are three tiers: desktop, application, and database.
The desktop tier (generally an end-user PC) does not consist of any servers.
Rather it consists of a Web browser that makes use of HTML and a Java applet to
provide the user interface.
The application tier (also called the middle tier) consists of a number of
servers, such as the concurrent processing server, web server, forms server, and
admin server. These servers are also referred to as application tier servers.
Likewise, the nodes on which such servers run are referred to as application tier
server nodes.


The database tier consists of the database server, which stores all the data
in a Release 11i system.

For example, if a node contains only the database server and no other Release 11i
software, it is called the database server node, and it is part of the database tier
only. However, it is possible for the database server and any of the application
tier servers to run on the same node. In this situation, the node can be called the
database server node, the forms server node, the Web server node, and so on.
Because servers from other tiers are running on one node, the node belongs to
more than one tier.

For more information about the Release 11i architecture, see Oracle Applications
Concepts.
To determine what application tier servers are on each node, refer to the
Applications Dashboard in Oracle Applications Manager


Q: What is the AutoPatch checkfile feature?
A: This feature reduces patch application downtime by checking to see if a given
database action has been performed previously for the associated file contained
in the patch. If the action has been performed using the current (or higher)
version of the file, AutoPatch omits the action.

Q: Can I run multiple AutoPatch sessions at the same time?
A: You cannot currently run multiple sessions simultaneously. However, patches
can be merged and can be applied in a single patching session.

A new AD feature called AD Concurrent Sessions is currently being tested. It uses
a system of locks that will prevent incompatible actions from executing at the
same time, so compatible actions can be run in parallel. This will allow you to run
multiple AutoPatch sessions concurrently.


Help Applying Patches
Q: How can I shorten patch application time when applying patches?
A: There are several tips and tricks for shortening the time it takes to apply
patches.


Schedule periodic downtime for proactive maintenance. The more up-to-
date your system, the less likely you are to experience known problems, and the
easier it is to resolve new issues. Whenever you can test and schedule downtime
to apply the latest maintenance or family packs, do so.
Keep AD code up-to-date. Oracle has put tremendous effort in reducing
downtime and improving the maintenance experience. Running at the latest AD
mini-pack level allows you to take full advantage of these efforts.
Keep your test system current with your production system. As you test the
application of a patch, it is imperative that the test be realistic in terms of current
patch level and transaction data.
Use the novalidate option (this is the default in AD Mini-pack H) if you know
all Oracle passwords are correct.
Consolidate multiple patches into a single, merged patch with AD Merge
Patch.
AD Merge Patch is a utility that merges multiple Applications patches into a single
patch. Use it to apply more than one patch during a single downtime. AD Merge
Patch reduces patch application time by eliminating redundant patching tasks.

All 11i patches can be merged. If you merge translation patches, AD Merge Patch
performs necessary character set conversion at merge time. If you merge patches
containing both split (c,d,g) drivers and unified drivers, AD Merge Patch creates a
single, unified driver for the merged patch allowing the merged patch to be
successfully applied.
Employ sufficient space. This includes new tablespace for indexes created
by the patch. For patches containing large numbers of files, you should also make
sure there is sufficient space temporary space to contain the unzipped patch and
files to be copied into the APPL_TOP.
Use a Shared APPL_TOP if you have multiple application tier nodes.
In a Shared APPL_TOP installation, the APPL_TOP file system is installed onto a
shared disk resource mounted to each node used in the Applications System.
These nodes can be used to provide standard application tier services, such as
forms, web, and concurrent processing.
Use the Distributed AD feature to utilize additional hardware during
maintenance.
AD has always used a Parallel Jobs System, where multiple AD workers start and
are assigned jobs. Information for the Jobs System is stored in the database, and
workers receive their assignments by monitoring certain tables in the database.


AD Mini-pack H introduces Distributed AD, which allows workers to be started on
remote machines as well, where they can utilize the additional resources on those
machines when completing their assigned jobs. This capability improves
scalability, performance, and resource utilization because workers in the same AD
session can be started on additional application tier nodes.
Use a Staged APPL_TOP to reduce the downtime to just the database
update.
A staged Applications system represents an exact copy of your Production system
including a copy of the database. Patches are applied to this staged system, while
your Production system remains up. When all patches have been successfully
applied to the test system, the reduced downtime for the Production system can
begin. The staged APPL_TOP is used both to run the database update into the
Production database as well as synchronizing the production APPL_TOP.
Perform uptime maintenance, when possible. Examples of maintenance
activities that can be accomplished while users are on the system include:
Gather Schema Statistics
Patch the Online Help
Apply translation patches while users are using different languages (possibly in
another time zone)
Apply the database update component of a translation patch while using the
affected language


Top

Q: How do I run AutoPatch non-interactively?
A: The AD defaults file allows you to run AutoPatch (or AD Administration) in non-
interactive mode. It contains tokens to answer defaults-enabled prompts.
Oracle provides a file called adalldefaults.txt that has tokens for all possible
default-enabled prompts. This file is maintained by Autoconfig and can be used as
a template when creating defaults files.

See Oracle Applications Maintenance Procedures for information on running
AutoPatch non-interactively using a defaults file.

Top



Q: Do patches need to be applied in a particular order? What is a prerequisite
patch?
A: Patches do not need to be applied in a particular order, even though a readme
may state a specific order is required, unless one of the patches is an AD patch.
This is because you may need to patch the patching utility so that it works
properly when you use it to apply subsequent patches.

A prerequisite patch fulfills a dependency for another patch. Strictly speaking,
they are co-requisites and can be applied in any order before using the system.
We recommend that you merge a patch with its required prerequisites, with the
exception of prerequisite patches for the AD product.

Starting with AD Mini-pack H, AutoPatch has a Prereq feature that, when run with
patches containing metadata, automatically determines if prerequisites are not
fulfilled and informs you. At this point, you can download the prerequisites,
merge them with the patch, restart AutoPatch, and apply the merged patch.
Older patches, or patches whose metadata is missing the prerequisite
information, may list prerequisite patches in the patch README.

Top

Q: How can I determine the effects a patch will have on my system?
A: You can submit a specific patch analysis request through the Patch Advisor to
determine the impact of a patch on your system. Patch Advisor Impact Analysis
provides reports on:
The total number of files in the patch
The number of files the patch will install
The products that will have updated files
The files that will be introduced by the patch
The files on the target system that will be changed by the patch
The files with dependencies on patched files

See Oracle Applications Maintenance Utilities for more information.

Top



Q: What happens if I run a driver on the wrong application tier server?
A: Because AutoPatch applies only the necessary actions for each type of
application tier, any driver can be applied to any APPL_TOP on any node.
However, the sequence is important. Patches without unified drivers must have
the drivers applied in the following order: copy driver, database driver, and
generate driver.

Top

Q: What are AutoPatch restart files?
A: Restart files store information about completed processing in the event of a
patch or system failure. They allow AutoPatch, AutoUpgrade, and AD
Administration to continue processing at the point where they stopped. Do not
modify or delete restart files unless specifically told to do so by Oracle Support
Services.

The restart files reside in $APPL_TOP/admin/<SID>/restart (UNIX) or in
%APPL_TOP%\admin\<SID>\restart (Windows).

Top

Q: If I am applying a patch and it fails, should I simply rerun it from the beginning
after fixing the issue?
A: If a patch driver fails, fix the issue and restart AutoPatch. AutoPatch will allow
you to continue where the patch left off. Rerunning the patch from the beginning
may result in a patch being applied incorrectly.

Top

Q: What should I do when the Oracle Applications AutoPatch Prerequisite
Checking Feature Fails?
A: There are various issues that could cause a failure in the AutoPatch
Prerequisite Checking Feature.

Q: If a worker fails when AutoPatch is running, what should I do?


A: When a worker fails its job, the AD utility running the worker will take one of
several possible actions:
Defer the job to the end of the list of jobs to run, and assign the worker
another job
Set the worker status to Failed and continue to run jobs in other workers
If all other workers are in failed or waiting state, wait for user input
(interactive mode) or exit (non-interactive mode)

If the worker remains in a failed state, examine the worker log file and determine
the cause of the failure. The worker log files are named adwork<number>.log (for
example adwork01.log or adwork001.log). They are located in the same directory
as the main AD utility log file. By default this is under
$APPL_TOP/admin/<SID>/log.
Attempt to correct the problem and restart the failed job. If you cannot
determine the cause of the failure, try restarting the failed job to see if it works
the second time (it may have failed due to a concurrency or resource issue).
To restart a failed job, run AD Controller and choose the option to restart a failed
job. Enter the worker number when prompted. You can use AD Controller to see
the status of jobs both before and after restarting them. The status before
restarting should be Failed, and the status after restarting should be Fixed,
Restart.
If you are unable to fix the failed job, contact Oracle Support Services for
assistance.

If the AD utility exited after the job failed, you must use AD Controller to restart
the failed job before you can restart the AD utility. Otherwise, the AD utility will
detect the failed job and shut down again.

FAQ Details
Q1. Why does the create releases process not create a Release when we have
run the CREATE RELEASES program against a Blanket Purchase Order whose
EFFECTIVE DATES are in the future with a valid Sourcing Rule?

A: The CREATE RELEASE program must be run within the EFFECTIVE DATES of the
Blanket Purchase Order. This is because the program verifies whether the SYSTEM
DATE falls within the EFFECTIVE DATES, when looking for the Releases to be
created. This is a standard functionality.




Q2. Why cant we create a release of a blanket purchase order, When there
exists a valid BPA and in the release form we pick the blanket PO from the list of
values (LOV). Once selected, we cannot tab past that field and does not get any
error messages.

A: Check for the invalid objects in the database. Invalid objects can prevent
improper screen field action. There are numerous packages and library handling
code that the form utilizes.


Q3. When we try to run Requisition import after running a Min-Max planning
request why is it that requisitions are created from Requisition import but no
releases are created against blanket POs.

A: For Releases to get created automatically in the Requisition Import process:
- Check for the profile option PO: Release During Requisition Import which should
be set to 'Yes to create releases during requisition import.
- 'Sourcing Rule' must have current date between 'effective date' and 'to date'.
- Check that the requisition is sourced with the blanket, and the requisitions are
approved as part of the Requisition Import process.
- If the Encumbrance is ON, then the requisition will not get approved and will be
in pre approved status and hence release will not get created.
- Check the profile option MRP: Purchasing By Revision (If requisitions are coming
from MRP) and INV: Purchasing By Revision (If requisitions are coming from INV).
This must be set according and should not be null. This profile option must be set
to 'Yes' or 'No' according to the customers requirement.
- Verify the table PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE, column AUTOSOURCE_FLAG is
Y.
- Verify if this item has a blanket purchase agreement approved and it is not
closed or cancelled.


Q4. Why are we able to create releases against a Blanket Purchase Order even
though the sum of amount of all the releases that have been created is equal to


the amount on the Blanket Purchase Order?

A: Oracle Purchasing does not do any validation on the agreed amount limit on
the Blanket until approval of the release.


Q5. Why is it so that even though the Release is not approved, the amount
against this release is on the blanket gets updated?

A: This is standard functionality. As soon as a release is created, the amount
released on the blanket gets updated. In fact the amount released is not stored
anywhere, system always calculates It whenever the blanket is queried.


Q6. Why are the releases not getting generated automatically after the
requisition import is run successfully for those requisitions, which are created
from MRP?

A: Check that the Release Time Fence on the item in setup is defined. Creating a
Release Time Fence on the item in setup solves the problem. The Release Time
Fence on the item must fall within the established schedule in MRP. The Release
method should be set to Automatic Release.


Q7. Why is the Reqimport Automatically Creating Releases Although Profile PO:
Release During ReqImport is set to No?

A: This might be because of the Incorrect WorkFlow attribute setting. Check the
attribute "Is Automatic Creation Allowed" in the work flow process. This should
set to N. Then the release is not created automatically


Q8. Why is the amount released on the blanket PO is not updated and still
includes the amount of the cancelled release after a release is cancelled?

A: Released amount of the blanket PO is not automatically updated if an invoice


was previously matched and not cancelled before the release was cancelled.


Q9. Why is the Create Releases program, PORELGEN is not creating any releases
for requisitions, which are sourced to blanket agreements and have been
generated from a template?

A: The Source details on the requisition line have not been populated. The Create
Releases program will only create a releases if the Source Document Number has
been populated on the requisition line. When creating a requisition template, if
you manually enter the item line there is no where to enter the blanket
information. When the requisition is created from the template, the Source
details on the requisition line are left blank so the Create Release program does
not select the requisition. Instead of entering the lines manually while creating
the template, use the Copy button, enter the type as Purchase Order and enter
the blanket agreement number. The Source details will be correctly populated
with the blanket agreement number and the requisition will be picked up by the
Create Release program.


Q10. Is the user allowed to modify quantity on distribution zone of an approved
and reserved release?

A: Oracle Purchasing does not allow the user to modify the quantity on the
distribution of an encumbered shipment nor does it allow creation of new
distributions against encumbered shipments.


Q11. Is the user allowed to delete an Incomplete Release?

A: Yes, The users are allowed to delete the incomplete releases in the application.


Q12. Can we save and approve blanket PO releases without entering promised
and need-by date?



A: If the item is either MRP/DRP, MPS/DRP or DRP planned item the promised
date or need by date is mandatory and the user has to enter the date. If the item
is not planned, then it is not mandatory.


Q13. Can the users enter the P-Card number in the Enter Releases Form?

A: No. The users can not enter the P-Card number the core apps. A P-card may be
specified in iProcurement, but is only a display only in Core Apps. We can see the
P-Card data if the profile option PO: Use P-card in Purchasing is set to YES.


Q14. Can we cancel the releases if they are in 'incomplete' status?

A: Cancellation is an authorization provides to revert back the approved status. If
we cancel the 'Incomplete' release we will loose the traceability of the document
actions. Hence we will not be able to cancel an incomplete release.


Q15. Does the Blanket Purchase Orders get Automatically closed After the
Release is Fully Received and Invoiced?

A: The Blanket Purchase Orders will not automatically close after the Release is
fully received and invoiced. The roll-up of closed status for the Blanket Release
Shipment happens to the Blanket Release Header and not to Blanket Purchase
Order. This is the Standard Functionality.


Q16. What is the significance of "PO: Convert Requisition UOM to Source
Document UOM" profile option?

A: Earlier in Autocreate if the requisition UOM is different from the BPA UOM the
user would not be allowed to create a release. But in Create releases program this
was possible. To make the behavior consistent we have introduced this profile
option. If this profile is set to yes we allow the autocreation of the release with
the quantity and UOM converted to that of the BPA. If the profile is set to yes we


do not allow the creation of the req both in autocreate as well as the create
releases program.


Q17. Doesn't the Create Releases report support one time items? Is this a bug?

A: Create Releases report does not support one time items. This is the intended
functionality. This is not a Bug.


Q18. Is it correct functionality that the enter req form will not raise a warning
when the item is tied to a BPA when the selection is made from the catalog via a
Requisition Template?

A: Yes this is the correct functionality. We do not raise a warning when the item is
tied to a BPA when the selection is made from the catalog via a Requisition
Template. There is already an ER 690225, which is logged for this issue.
FAQ Details
Q1. Why doesn't cancel PO automatically cancel assigned requisition, even
when the checkbox 'Cancel requisition' is checked?

A: The intended functionality is that when a PO is canceled and the cancel
requisition option is selected, it only cancels the backing requisition lines not the
header. So only requisition lines will get canceled not the header.


Q2. Why do I get an APP-14056 error when canceling a PO shipment that has
been matched?

A: Please check to see if the shipment being canceled is not Over Billed [billed
more than received]. In that case it cannot be canceled.

Q3. Why doesn't 'Canceling of Standard PO' change the status of the document?
The Status stays in value 'Approved'.

A: The authorization status remains Approved. Even if PO is canceled, only the


canceled flag is set to 'Y'. It is intended functionality.


Q4. Can I automatically 'Close' the Purchase order without receiving the full
quantity?

A: The Receipt Close Tolerance lets you specify a quantity percentage within
which Purchasing closes a partially received shipment. For example, if your
Receipt Close Tolerance is 5% and you receive 96% of an expected shipment,
Purchasing automatically closes this shipment for receiving.


Q5. When does a Purchase Order line get Closure Status 'Closed for Receiving'?

A: Purchasing automatically closes shipments for receiving and invoicing based on
Tolerances that you specify in the Purchasing Options window. Once all shipments
for a given line are received and invoiced within these tolerances, Purchasing
automatically closes the line.


Q6. When does a Purchase order get Closure Status 'Closed'?

A: When all lines for a given header are closed, Purchasing automatically closes
the document.


Q7. What is the difference between the control actions 'On Hold' and 'Freeze'
for a Purchase order?

A: You can place a Purchase order 'On hold' only at the header level. This
unapproves the purchase order while preventing printing, receiving, invoicing,
and future approval until you remove the hold. You can 'Freeze' only at the
header and release level. You freeze a Purchase order when you want to prevent
any future modifications to the Purchase order. When you freeze a Purchase
order, you can still receive and pay for goods you already ordered. If you use a
Requisition template or AutoSource to source requisition lines from a Purchase


order line, Purchasing does not automatically update the corresponding sourcing
information when you freeze a purchase order with which you source requisition
lines. If you freeze a purchase order, you have to update the corresponding
information in the Requisition Templates or the AutoSource Rules window.


Q8. What are the different document statuses/actions used in Oracle
Purchasing?

A: This discusses mainly the statuses/actions of a purchase order:
Delete
Before documents are approved, you can delete them or their components from
the document entry window. If you use online requisitions, Purchasing returns all
requisitions associated with your delete action to the requisition pool. You can
reassign these unfilled requisitions to other purchase orders or releases using the
AutoCreate Documents window.
Cancel
Purchasing lets you terminate an existing commitment to buy from a supplier by
canceling document headers, lines, shipments, or releases. When you cancel a
purchase order entity, you are unable to receive or pay for cancelled items and
services, however, you can pay for all previously received orders. You also cannot
modify a cancelled entity or its components.
Final Close
Prevent modifications to or actions against completed documents, lines, and
shipments by final closing them. Final-closed documents are not accessible in the
corresponding entry forms, and you cannot perform the following actions against
final-closed entities: Receive, Transfer, Inspect, Deliver, Correct receipt quantities,
Invoice, Return to supplier, or Return to receiving.
You can approve documents that include final-closed entities, but you cannot
approve documents that are final closed at the header level. You can print final-
closed documents. Finally, you can Purge documents that were final closed at the
header level before the Last Activity Date that you specify when you submit
Purge.
Freeze
Freeze your purchase orders and releases to prevent changes or additions while


maintaining the ability to receive and match invoices against received shipments.
You cannot access frozen documents in the entry forms.
Hold
Place documents on hold to un-approve them while preventing printing,
receiving, invoicing, and future approval until you remove the hold.
Firm
When you firm an order, Master Scheduling/MRP uses the firm date to create a
time fence within which it will not suggest new planned purchase orders,
cancellations, or reschedulein actions. It continues to suggest rescheduleout
actions for orders within the time fence. If several shipments with different
promised or needby dates reference the same item, Master Scheduling/MRP
sets the time fence at the latest of all scheduled dates.
You can firm orders at the document header or shipment level. If you firm at the
header level, Purchasing applies this control to every shipment on the document.
Close
Purchasing automatically closes shipments for receiving and invoicing based on
controls that you specify in the Purchasing Options window. Once all shipments
for a given line are closed, Purchasing automatically closes the line. When all lines
for a given header are closed, Purchasing automatically closes the document.
Close for Receiving
The Receipt Close Tolerance lets you specify a quantity percentage within which
Purchasing closes a partially received shipment. For example, if your Receipt Close
Tolerance is 5% and you receive 96% of an expected shipment, Purchasing
automatically closes this shipment for receiving.
The Receipt Close Point lets you choose which receiving action (Received,
Accepted, or Delivered) you want to use as the point when Purchasing closes a
shipment for receiving based on the Receipt Close Tolerance. For example, if you
set a Receipt Close Tolerance of 5% and choose Delivered as your Receipt Close
Point, Purchasing closes shipments for receiving when you have delivered 95% or
more of the ordered quantity.
Close for Invoicing
The Invoice Close Tolerance lets you specify a similar quantity percentage within
which Purchasing automatically closes partially invoiced shipments for invoicing.
Open
You can open at the header, line, and shipment levels.


Open for Receiving
You can reopen for receiving at the header, line, and shipment level.
Open for Invoicing
You can reopen for invoicing at the header, line, and shipment level.
Unfreeze
You can unfreeze only at the header and release levels.


Q9. Will shipment of a PO be cancelled if these conditions are met?

A: Shipment Checks:
Quantity received >= quantity ordered -> Fully received
Quantity billed >= quantity ordered -> fully billed
Distribution Checks:
Quantity billed > quantity ordered -> over billed
Quantity delivered > quantity ordered -> over delivered
If you partially received a shipment corresponding to multiple distributions,
Purchasing cannot always cancel the shipment. To make sure Purchasing can
cancel a shipment, enter the delivery transactions for the receipts you entered
against that shipment. You can use express delivery to facilitate this process.
No records in receiving interface for this entity being cancelled. The ASN for this
entity being cancelled should be completely received.


Q10. What are need to be tried If USER_EXIT error is raised when 'Canceling'?

A: Regenerate the message file.
Disable all the custom triggers.
Check the quantities whether they are matching with the conditions.


Q11. Why Closed Code is set to 'I' when Cancellation failed with user exit error?

A: When using encumbrance, the funds checker will be called before canceling
the document. Fund checker will change the cancel flag to I. Now the
cancellation code will process the record and change the cancel flag to Y. In


our case the fund checker went through fine. But it failed in the cancellation code.


Q12. Is there anyway I can revert back the document if a Purchase
Order/Requisition is cancelled accidentally?

A: No. The cancellation is a non-reversible process. Once the document is
cancelled we cannot revert it back.


Q13. Can I Receive a shipment even when it is "Closed for Receiving"?

A: Yes, it does not prevent you from receiving.


Q14. Can a Closed / Finally Closed Purchase Order be reopened?

A: You can Open a Closed purchase order but you cannot take any control action
on Finally Closed PO.


Q15. Can I match an Invoice against a line even when it is 'Closed for Invoicing'?

A: The Close for Invoicing status does not prevent you from matching an invoice
to a purchase order or to a receipt.


Q16. What are the valid Statuses/Actions for Requisitions?

A: For requisitions, the only available actions are Cancel and Finally Close.
FAQ Details
Q1. What is the setup needed for using Create Documents workflow?

A: - If you want document creation to be launched online upon requisition
approval, then item Send PO Autocreation to Background in requisition
approval process should be set to N. Otherwise if this attribute is set to


Y (default) then the requisition approval process launches the create
document workflow when workflow background process is run. In this case,
workflow background process must be run with parameters: item type PO
Requisition Approval and deferred Yes.
- Sourcing should be set up, so that the requisition gets sourced while creating it.
- If you want Create Document workflow to create the documents, then the
Release Method in ASL attributes should be defined as Release Using
AutoCreate.
- In workflow definition for workflow PO Create Documents, the item
attribute Is Automatic Creation Allowed? should be set to Y (Default).
Also if attribute Should Workflow Create the Release? is set to Y
(default), then workflow tries to create the releases.


Q2. Can POs be automatically approved when created by this workflow?

A: In workflow PO Create Documents, set item attribute Is Automatic
Approval Allowed? to Y. By default this attribute is set to N. If you
change this attribute to Y, then upon document creation, PO approval
workflow is automatically launched.


Q3. How does the Create Document Workflow decide which buyer to use for the
automatically created documents?

A: Workflow tries to retrieve buyer information in following order:
- Buyer specified on the Requisition Line
- Default buyer from Master Item
- Category
- Buyer of the source document
When creating a release, workflow retrieves the buyers name from the blanket
agreement. If workflow cannot find a buyer, it doesnt create a document
FAQ Details
Q1. How do you generate a PO that includes tax and freight?

A: This is not handled under Purchasing. PO only sets a taxable flag for the item to


identify it as a taxable item which is calculated correctly upon being invoiced. -
Accounts Payables handles this. - Tax codes and freight costs are setup in AP. - Tax
code varies by state and freight costs may vary due to different packing methods,
etc. and these costs are summed when invoiced.


Q2. How do you reflect discount from a supplier on a Purchase orders?

A: Purchase order is a legal document, not the quotation. Therefore, the purchase
order should reflect agreed upon price. Secondly if the discount comes after the
PO then AP should be able to handle it while invoicing. If you are using a blanket
Purchase order then you can use price breaks.


Q3. What is 2-way, 3-way, 4-way matching? How is this set-up?

A: 2-way matching verifies that Purchase order and invoice information match
within your tolerances as follows:
Quantity billed <= Quantity Ordered
Invoice price <= Purchase order price
(<= Sign is used because of tolerances)
3-way matching verifies that the receipt and invoice information match with the
quantity tolerances defined:
Quantity billed <= Quantity received
4-way matching verifies that acceptance documents and invoice information
match within the quantity tolerances defined:
Quantity billed <= Quantity accepted.
(Acceptance is done at the time of Inspecting goods).
Whether a PO shipment has 2-way, 3-way or 4-way matching can be setup in the
Shipment Details zone of the Enter PO form (character)
RECEIPT REQUIRED - INSPECTION REQUIRED - MATCHING
Yes &n Yes 4-way
Yes No 3-way
No No 2-way
In Morealternative region of Shipments block, you define the Invoice
Matching option, where you can choose 2-way, 3-way or 4-way match. You can


find more detailed information about matching in the Oracle Payables Reference
Manual (Volume 3) Topical Essay on Integrating your Payables and Purchasing
Information.


Q4. Where are standard notes?

A: In 11.x, notes are replaced by attachments. Go to Setup -> Attachments ->
Create attachment. Go to Purchase Order and attach the attachment to the
Purchase Order.


Q5. What is the difference between the agreed amount and the amount limit
fields while entering a contract purchase agreement and issues related to these
fields?

A:1. The agreed amount field at the header level is copied to the amount limit in
the terms and conditions block. This is also the amount that is printed on the
blanket agreement and represents the contract amount between you and the
vendor.
2. The amount limit field will restrict the cumulative releases applied to this
purchase agreement from exceeding the specified dollar amount entered here.
The value of this field must be equal to or greater than the agreed amount field.
This column is used for release approval amount validation. If the total cumulative
releases exceed this amount approval will fail. The purpose of this field is to allow
user to set a higher approval amount limit than the amount agreed.


Q6. You are unable to view the PO from the Invoice Match window. It gives an
error: APP-14122: NO RECORDS MEET YOUR SEARCH CRITERIA.

A: This could happen if the document security setup of PO does not allow this
user to access the PO. - You need to ensure that user is set to Buyer in the
Purchase Order, or - You need to alter the setup (Security Level) to Public.




Q7. What is the difference between PO_LINE_ID and LINE_NUM in the table
PO_LINES_ALL?

A: PO_LINE_ID is the unique system generated line number invisible to the user.
LINE_NUM is the number of the line on the Purchase Order.


Q8. What's the difference between the due date and close date on the RFQ?

A: Enter the Due Date when you want your suppliers to reply. Purchasing prints
the reply due date on the RFQ. Purchasing notifies you if the current date is
between the RFQ reply due date and the close date and if the RFQ is Active.
Purchasing knows that a supplier replied to an RFQ if you enter a quotation for
this supplier referencing the RFQ. Enter the Close Date for the RFQ. Purchasing
prints the close date on the RFQ. Purchasing notifies you if the current date is
between the RFQ reply due date and the close date and if the RFQ is Active.
Purchasing warns you when you enter a quotation against this RFQ after the close
date.


Q9. When does a Purchase Order line get the closure status of 'Closed for
Receiving'?

A: Purchasing automatically closes shipments for receiving and invoicing based on
controls that you specify in the Purchasing Options window. Once all shipments
for a given line are closed, Purchasing automatically closes the line.


Q10. When does a Purchase order get the status of 'Closed'?

A: When all lines for a given header are closed, Purchasing automatically closes
the document.


Q11. What is the use of list price and market price on Purchase Order?



A: If you have entered an item, Purchasing displays the list price for the item. You
can accept the default list price or change it. You can use this field to help
evaluate your buyers. Purchasing uses the list price you enter here in the savings
analysis reports. Savings Analysis Report (By Buyer) and Savings Analysis Report
(By Category). If you enter an item, Purchasing displays the market price for the
item. Use this field to help evaluate your buyers. Purchasing uses the price you
enter here in the savings analysis reports if you do not provide a value in the List
Price field.


Q12. What is the significance of the fields 'Allow Price override' and 'Price
limit'?

A: For planned purchase orders and blanket purchase agreements only, check
Allow Price Override to indicate that the release price can be greater than the
price on the purchase agreement line. If you allow a price override, the release
price cannot exceed the Price Limit specified on the line. If you do not allow a
price override, the release price cannot exceed the Unit Price. You cannot enter
this field if the line type is amount based. If you allow price override, enter the
Price Limit. This is the maximum price per item you allow for the item on this
agreement line.


Q13. What is the difference between the control actions 'On Hold' and 'Freeze'
for a Purchase order?

A: You can place a Purchase order 'On hold' only at the header level. This un-
approves the purchases order while preventing printing, receiving, invoicing, and
future approval until you remove the hold. You can 'Freeze' only at the header
and release level. You freeze a Purchase order when you want to prevent any
future modifications to the Purchase order. When you freeze a Purchase order,
you can still receive and pay for goods you already ordered.


Q14. What is the difference between the Field 'Firm' in the 'Terms and
Conditions' window and in the alternate region 'more' in the PO shipments?



A: The Field 'Firm' in the 'Terms and Conditions' indicates that the Purchase order
is firm. Firm your purchase order when you want to indicate to Master
Scheduling/MRP or your manufacturing application that it should not reschedule
this purchase order. The Field 'Firm' in the alternate region 'more' in the PO
shipments indicates that the Purchase order shipment is firm. Firm your purchase
order shipment when you want to indicate to Master Scheduling/MRP or your
manufacturing application that it should not reschedule this purchase order
shipment.


Q15. Unable to open the Purchase Orders form due to error: You are not setup
as an employee.

A: The error is referring to the Buyer form setup in the Purchasing module. The
employee setup might state that they hold a Buyer position or job. However, in
order to access the Purchase Orders or Autocreate form you must define the
employee in the Buyer form (Setup/Personnel/Buyers). Also, ensure the
employee name is defined in the employee's login information (System
administrator/Security/User/Define)


Q16. How do I change the Supplier on a saved or approved PO?

A: The system does not allow Supplier update on a saved or approved PO. You will
need to cancel the PO and create a new PO with the correct Supplier.


Q17. I have accidentally cancelled a PO.

A: The System asks for your confirmation before canceling a PO. Canceling is not a
reversible process. You cannot retrieve back a cancelled PO.


Q18. Can I setup a different Purchase Order type default for the PO form?

A: The Purchase Orders form always defaults a PO type of 'Standard Purchase


Order', and there is no setup, which can change this. Although the default value
cannot be changed, the user can overwrite the defaulted type once the Enter PO
form is opened.


Q19. The Item is setup in the item master but is missing from the item List of
Values.

A: You should check the Financial Options setup and ensure in the alternate
region zone Supplier-Purchasing that you have in the Inventory Org the correct
organization. The majority of Oracle customers have this set to their Item Master
for the best results. Selecting another organization limits items and related
activity to that specific org. With the broad selection of item master the client will
have greater functionality across multiple organizations.


Q20. How do you change the unit price on a PO line once the line has been
received or invoiced?

A: Oracle Purchasing will not allow unit price update on Inventory line items when
the line is received or billed because accounting transactions have already taken
place. The difference between the PO price and invoice price will be recorded in
the Invoice Price Variance Account, which will show up on the Invoice Price
Variance report. If you have mistakenly entered the incorrect price on the PO,
then you can workaround this by canceling or backing out the invoice and
processing a return on the receipt, which will allow unit price update.


Q21. Can the original Purchase Order can be viewed in any way, for a revised
Purchase Order?

A: The original version of a revised PO cannot be viewed from the PO form or PO
summary form. Information on the original PO is stored in the
PO_HEADERS_ARCHIVE and PO_LINES_ARCHIVE tables, and can be obtained
through SQL, using the PO_HEADER_ID column as a common reference.




Q22. Where is the automatic numbering for Purchase Orders defined and
maintained?

A: It is defined in Purchasing Options window. The navigation is:
Setup/Organizations/Purchasing Options, Numbering alternate region.


Q23. Why is my Purchase Order closing before a receipt is processed?

A: Check the Receipt Closed Tolerance and the Matching setup. If Matching is set
to equal 2-way, the PO will close once the Purchase Order is approved. If the line
of the Purchase Order is received within the tolerance the line will close.


Q24. Create a Purchase Order. Input the Header and Line information and find
that the Shipments button at the bottom of the form is grayed out.

A: Setup the Receiving Options to enable the Shipment Button in the Purchase
Order form. Navigation: Setup --> Organizations --> Receiving Options. Once set-
up these options for your Organization you will have the Shipments button
enabled. Ensure that the Purchasing Options and Financial Options are defined for
your Organization.


Q25. Accessing the Purchase Order entry screen and getting the error: APP-
14142 GET_WINDOW_ORG_SOB 040 ORA-1403 No Data Found.

A: Attach the correct Operating Unit to the responsibility B. Define Purchasing
Options C. Define Financial Options.


Q26. When I enter a new PO, the Preparer is always defaulted as the buyer.
Why am I unable to change it?

A: Uncheck the check box 'Enforce Buyer Name in the Purchasing Options. Setup -
>Organization -> Purchasing Options (Alternative region 'Control')




Q27. Why is there no category displayed or list of values for the category field in
the purchase order you are creating?

A: You must also create category codes for your items. Then create a Category set
for Purchasing controlled at the master level. Assign your items to a category
code and the Purchasing category set you have created. Confirm that in Default
Category Sets the Purchasing application points to the Purchasing Category set.
This will populate the category and description when the item number is selected
at the PO line level.


Q28. I have enabled PO_LINES DFF with a context field capital_expense_flag as
reference. I now receive APP-FND-00676 error in Enter Quotations form.

A: This DFF is based on PO_LINES_ALL table. The Quotation lines as well as the PO
lines share this table as the base, as well as share the same DFF. Field
capital_expense_flag is not present in Quotations form. Therefore you may not
use this field as the reference field for PO Lines DFF. Other fields which you may
not use include: Inspection_Required_Flag, Item_Class_Lookup_Code,
List_Price_Per_Unit, Negotiated_By_Preparer_Flag, Reference_Num,
Taxable_Flag
FAQ Details
Q1. What does the Account Generator process do?

A: The Account Generator process builds charge, budget, accrual, and variance
accounts for each purchase order, release, and requisition distribution based on
the distributions destination type. It is a synchronous Workflow process.


Q2. What are the Pre-requisites to use Account Generator?

A: Before using the Account Generator you must:
- Define your Accounting flexfield structure for each set of books.
- Define flexfield segment values and validation rules.


- Set up Oracle Workflow.
- Decide whether you want to use the Account Generator processes as seeded in
Oracle Purchasing, or you need to customize them to meet your accounting
needs.


Q3. What are the workflow item types used in Account Generator?

A: For Purchase Orders: POWFPOAG
For Requisitions: POWFRQAG
Each Account Generator item type contains the following top-level workflow
processes:
Generate Default Account
Generate Account Using Flex Builder Rules
If you are upgrading from 10.7, and you have been using the flex builder to
generate the accounts, you have an option of upgrading your existing flex builder
rules to Account Generator. In which case, you should use the Generate Account
Using Flex Builder Rules process.


Q4. I have been using the Flex builder rules in Release 10.7 to build the
accounts. Can I continue using the same setup in account generator in 11.x also?

A: Yes. The same setup can be used with account generator also. To achieve this,
the following actions should be performed on up gradation to account generator.
- Run the program in $FND_TOP/bin/FNDFBPLS. This will create a PL/SQL package
that will contain all the flex builder rules.
- Apply the newly created PL/SQL file to the database. This will create a package
called PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT /
PO_REQ_CHARGE_ACCOUNT
- Verify that the package is created successfully and that it is valid in database.
- Choose the Account Generator Top level process as Generate Account Using Flex
Builder.
- Test the account generator.




Q5. The flex builder rules package PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT is being
overwritten whenever I apply a family pack. Why?

A: The family pack will contain POXWFB1S.pls and POXWFB1B.pls, which contains
a blank definition of the PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT for compilation purpose. This
will override the already existing PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT
package created from flex builder rules. So the Client must take a backup of the
Flex builder rules package before applying the patch, and revert back the package
PO_PO_CHARGE_ACCOUNT using that file.


Q6. What are the steps to generate the WFSTAT output for Account Generator?

A: 1. Set the following profiles:
- Account Generator: Run in Debug Mode=> Yes
- Account Generator: Purge Runtime Data=> No
PO: Set Debug Workflow On => Yes
2. Make sure that the concurrent program "Purge Workflow Obsolete Runtime
Data" is NOT running.
3. Open Purchase Order/Requisitions form, go to the distributions window, enter
necessary fields and click on charge account field to start generating the charge
account. After the account generator has done building the account, or errors
out, do the following from the toolbar (DO NOT exit the form or navigate to any
other block or record, otherwise this information would be lost):
Help=> Diagnostics => Examine
Enter in 1
st
field => parameter
Enter in 2
nd
field => charge_acc_wf_itemkey
Then tab out. The Item key will appear in the third field.
4. Now save the purchase order/requisition. If you are not able to save, then clear
the distribution record and navigate back to the shipment window and save the
form. Saving the form is must, because a commit is required to save the workflow
information in tables, for generating the wfstat output.
5. If step#3 could not give you an item key, then use the following query to
identify the relevant item key:
Select item_key, item_type, begin_date
from wf_items
where item_type = '&item_type'


order by begin_date desc;
For PO, use 'POWFPOAG' item type in above query, and for requisition, use
'POWFRQAG'.
6. To generate the WFSTAT output,
Run the sql in $FND_TOP/sql/wfstat.sql with above item_type and item_key.
Spool the output.
7. To get the wf debug information, run the following query:
SELECT item_key, item_type, debug_message
FROM po_wf_debug
WHERE item_key = '&Item_key'
ORDER BY execution sequence;


Q7. What exactly does profile option "Account Generator: Run in Debug Mode"
do?

A: This profile option controls whether the account generator workflow process
runs in synchronous mode (workflow-on-a-fly) or asynchronous/persistent mode
(save the runtime data).
When this profile is NULL or "No", the workflow runs in synchronous mode and it
will NOT store any runtime data in database. So you cannot generate the wfstat
etc for debug purposes. However once you set this profile option to "Yes", then
the process would run in persistent mode, thereby the runtime data would be
stored in database. Now you can generate the wfstat etc.


Q8. Will the account generator build the charge account based on project
information?

A: No. By default, the Account Generator process as seeded in Oracle Purchasing
would not consider the project information to build the account. To achieve this
functionality, you should customize the Account Generator to consider the
project details. There is a dummy sub process 'Build Project Related Account'
seeded in the Account Generator workflow, available for customization. You
would also have to modify function
PO_WF_PO_CHARGE_ACC.IS_PO_PROJECT_RELATED to return a value of "True".
For more information on how to customize the Account Generator, please refer


to the manual Oracle Purchasing Account Generator Workflow Customization
Example.


Q9. Will the account be generated for amount based/one time item lines?

A: No the Account will not be generated if you are using the Account Generator as
seeded in Oracle Purchasing. Either the account should be manually entered or
the account generator should be customized.


Q10. When the charge account field is non updateable?

A: In the following cases the charge account field is not updateable:
1. If the destination type code is INVENTORY or SHOP FLOOR.
2. If the distribution is already encumbered.
3. If the PO is created from a encumbered Requisition
4. If the destination type code is Expense and
If the project is entered and the profile option
PA_ALLOW_FLEXBUILDER_OVERRIDES is set to NO
If the expense accrual code= RECEIPT


Q11. If the account generator process raises a blank error message, what does it
mean?

A: Check the invalid objects in the database. Recompile the invalid objects.

FAQ Details
Q1. What should I do if the Purchase Document Open Interface (PDOI) process
fails?

A: The first thing is to check for the error message and examine description from
the po_interface_errors table for the given interface_header_id. The description
would be self explanatory. Accordingly check for the data in the
po_headers_interface, po_lines_interface tables and correct them and run the


PDOI again with the corrected data.


Q2. How do I to get the log file for the PDOI run?

A: To get the log file for the PDOI set the following profile option to Yes : PO:
Write server output to file.


Q3. How to view/purge and correct the errors tables?

A: To view the errors run the following Report:
Purchasing interface open report.
To Purge the error table run the following Report:
Purge purchasing open interface processed data report.


Q4. What do I do when POs are not being picked up by PDOI and these records
remain in pending status?

A: Check if the client is a single org instance. If you are using single org instance
then you are not supposed to populate the org_id in the interface tables. Org_id
should be null for a single org implementation.


Q5. How should I populate the project and task information in PDOI?

A: The point to be noted here is that always populate project name and task
name into the project and task column of po_headers_interface table instead of
project number and task number. Based on project name and task name PDOI
derives the project_id and task_id and inserts in the po_distributions table.


Q6. What should I do if PDOI errors out with "po_pdoi_invalid_dest_type
destination type (value = expense) is not valid" for expense items?



A: This Error can arise out of following situation:
1. Validation of destination organization id fails.
2. Validation of destination type code fails.
3. Item_id is NULL and destination_type_code is INVENTORY.
4. Validation of destination subinventory fails.
5. Destination_type_code in ('SHOP FLOOR','EXPENSE') and
destination_subinventory is not null.
6. Validation of destination organization id fails.


Q7. How and when are the Blanket effective dates updated though PDOI?

A: If you are using the UPDATE action code then PDOI only VALIDATES the line
level info. If you want to update headers then use REPLACE instead of UPDATE. By
using UPDATE you can only update some columns at the PO lines level as
mentioned in the users guide.


Q8. What should I do if PDOI errors out with "ship to organization id (value=769)
specified is inactive or invalid" when creating new items on the fly?

A: This has been taken upon as an enhancement. Previously we were not creating
an item for the destination/ship_to_org in the PDOI run. But as part of the
enhancement 2064961 now we create items for the ship_to_org also.


Q9. Why are supply records are not created for standard purchase orders?

A: Supply records are created in mtl_supply while approving the PO and since
prior to Procurement family pack G, we were not supporting approved standard
purchase orders we were not creating the supply records.


Q10. Can you update documents via PDOI which were created manually?

A: No. Please check the enhancement 2128450.




Q11. When using encumbrance accounting I want the funds to be reserved and
encumbrance entries created in gl_bc_packets?

A: The functionality is part of Procurement Family Pack G or Release 11.5.7.


Q12. Why does PDOI error out with "ora-00001 unique constraint violation in
po_headers_u2"?

A: Though this issue may occur rarely but it can and its explained below:
The document number is generated at the end of the PDOI process before
commit and updated in the po_headers table. When the PDOI process starts,
po_headers table is updated with poi_temp_po_b679535 value in segment1 and
then later after headers and lines are processed document_number is generated
and the po_headers is updated with that. Assume for any reason on account of an
incomplete transaction there is a record in po_headers table with
poi_temp_po_b679535 value in segment1 then PDOI would fail with the above
error message. So just check for a record in po_headers table with
poi_temp_po_b679535 value of the segment1 for this error.


Q13. What should I do when PDOI creates approved standard purchase orders
but no charge account is being generated?

A: We do not support importing approved standard purchase orders. But in the
Procurement Family Pack G onwards this feature has been added.


Q14. How do we debug when PDOI does not create any Pos?

A: Two methods can be employed:
1. Before running the PDOI program, set the profile option PO :Write server
output to file to 'Yes' and then you can view the log file thus generated while
running the PDOI.


2. After the PDOI is run, run the report 'Purchasing interface error report' to
debug what is the exact error.


Q15. I had submitted the PDOI conc. request for updating the unit_price of a
blanket purchase agreement line with an action of "UPDATE". PDOI instead of
updating the line, has created a new line with new price. Every updated line is
being created multiple times. How can this be avoided?

A: This might be because the line you are trying to update is already expired. PDOI
creates another line with the updated information if the line which is getting
updated is already expired.


Q16. How is data deleted from the interface tables after it has been loaded?

A: After successful creation of data through PDOI, the process_code in the
interface tables will be set to 'Accepted'. If the Customer wants to delete this
interface data which is used no more then they need to run the concurrent
request 'Purge purchasing interface processed data'.


Q17. Is there an example script to load new blanket, new item and new sourcing
rule?

A: Yes. Please see the script below:

insert into po_headers_interface
(interface_header_id,
action,
org_id,
document_type_code,
vendor_id,
vendor_site_code,
vendor_site_id,
effective_date,
expiration_date,


Vendor_doc_num,
load_sourcing_rules_flag)
values
(po_headers_interface_s.nextval,
'ORIGINAL',
204,
'BLANKET',
21,
'SANTA CLARA',
41,
'01-JAN-2001',
'01-JAN-2002',
'VENDOR02',
'Y');
insert into po_lines_interface
(interface_line_id,
interface_header_id,
action,
item,
item_description,
unit_price,
unit_of_measure,
effective_date,
expiration_date,
template_name,
sourcing_rule_name)
values
(po_lines_interface_s.nextval,
po_headers_interface_s.currval,
'ORIGINAL',
'BB54888',
'BB54888 Description',
10,
'Each',
'01-JAN-2001',
'01-JAN-2002',
'Purchased Item',


'Sourcing Rule BB54888');


Q18. I had loaded all the data into the interface tables and with process_code as
'PENDING'. I run the PDOI program, but data is not getting picked up by PDOI.
The records remain in status 'PENDING' in the interface tables. What do I do?

A: Check whether client is single org. If they are single org, then they should not
populate org_id into the interface tables. make the org_id null in the interface
tables and re-run PDOI.


Q19. I want to update header of a document. Is it possible via PDOI?

A: No. It is not possible to update header information but only line information
can be updated from PDOI. you can use 'Replace' option to replace the entire
document in this case.


Q20. I am trying to update item description through PDOI. The program is
updating the item description at the line level but is not updating the same at
item master.

A: This is desired functionality of PDOI. PDOI will only update the item description
at the line level and not at item master.
FAQ Details
Q1. What is Receiving functionality?

A: Receipt of goods from vendors/suppliers, internal organizations and customers
originating from procurement activities and documents including but not limited
to purchase orders, releases, internal requisitions, Return Material Authorizations
and intransit shipments


Q2. What are the different Source Types supported?



A: Internal Orders - An internal sales order sourced from Inventory.
These are generated from internal requisitions:
Inventory - A transfer within inventory
Vendor - A purchase Order/releases from a vendor


Q3. What are the different Destination Types used?

A: Multiple - One shipment has more than one distributions.
When choosing receiving routing = Direct Receipt or Substitute Direct, you need
to click the "+" sign on the receipt line to open the distributions, then do the
receipt and delivery.

Receiving - When choosing receiving routing = Standard Receipt or Substitute
Standard, destination type = Receiving. The Goods are only received to Receiving
dock, Not Expense or Inventory destination. Delivery is not performed.

Expense - The goods are delivered directly to the requestor and expensed out of
inventory.

Inventory - The goods are received directly into inventory upon delivery.
Destination organization and subinventory are required.
The locator or serial numbers are required if the item is locator controlled or
serial controlled.

Shop floor - The goods are received from an outside processing operation defined
by Oracle Work in Process.


Q4. What can Receiving Routing be used for and how does it default?

A: Direct Delivery - Perform Receive and Delivery on Receipts Screen at the same
time.
3-way matching.
Standard Receipt - Perform Receive on Receipts screen.
Perform Delivery on Receiving Transactions screen.
3-way matching.


Inspection Required - The inspection is required after Receiving and before
Delivery.
4-way matching.

You can override the Receiving Routing on the Receipts screen only if the Profile
RCV: Allow Routing Override is set to 'Yes'.

The Receiving Routing on the receipts screen is defaulted as follows:
1. Purchase Order shipment
2. if 1 is null, then Item Attribute
3. if 2 is null, then Vendor Attribute
4. if 3 is null, then Receiving Option


Q5. What Receiving Mode will be used?

A: This is determined by the value from Personal Profile RCV: Processing Mode

On-Line - Receiving Transaction Manager processes the receipts just after you
save the receipt.

Immediate - After you save the receipt, the receipt records are inserted into
rcv_transactions_interface.
The System will run the Receiving Transaction Processor to process the records in
the rcv_transacitons_interface as background process. The user can do other
things while the process is running.

Batch - Receipt records are inserted into rcv_transactions_interface.
The user needs to manually to run the Receiving Transaction Processor as
concurrent request to process the records in
the rcv_transacitons_interface.


Q6. How many Transaction Types exist?

A: Receive - Receive the items into Receiving Dock.
Deliver - Deliver the items into expense or inventory destination.


Return to Vendor - Return the received items directly to vendors.
Return to Receiving - Return the delivered items to Receiving Dock or inspection.
Accept - Accept items following an inspection.
Reject - Reject items following an inspection.
Transfer - Transfer items between locations.
Correct - Enter a positive or negative adjustment to a receiving or delivery
transaction.
Match - Match unordered receipts to purchase orders.
Unordered - Receive items without purchase orders


Q7. How does Receipt Close Point work?

A: Navigate: Define Purchase Option -> Control Options -> Receipt Close Point

There are three choices:
Accepted - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record
the shipment as being fully accepted.

Delivered - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record
the shipment as being fully delivered.

Received - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record
the shipment as being fully received.
Oracle Purchasing displays this option as the default.

You also need to set the receipt close tolerance percentage in the Default Options
Region. Choose one of the above values for the receipt close point.


Q8. Why isn't my PO found when I Query for it on the Receipt form?

A: Please check the following:
1. Query the PO from the Purchase Order form and note the Organization on the
Shipment. Ensure you are using the same Organization on the Receipt form.
2. On the Receipt form, select the checkbox for 'Include closed POs' then requery
the PO.




Q9. After completing the Receipt (Navigate - Receiving - Receipts), why can't I
find the receipt in the Receiving Transaction Summary?

A: 1. From Transaction Status Summary query for the Receipt Number or PO
number and check to see if the transactions have been stuck in the interface
(Status=Pending).
2. If using RCV: Process mode = Batch, make sure to run the Receiving Transaction
Processor.
3. If using RCV: Process mode = Batch or Immediate...go to Concurrent Request
screen...check to see if the concurrent process = Receiving Transaction Processor
is finished.


Q10. What is Receiving Transaction Manager RCVOLTM?

A: RCVOLTM is the executable that runs the Online Receiving Transactions.
The Executable is stored in the server ($PO_TOP/bin)
You can check the versions by the following command:
cd $PO_TOP/bin
strings -a RCVOLTM|grep -i '$header: rv'


Q11. How many processes are needed for the Receiving Transaction Manager?

A: In most cases, there are 3 processes. If you are in multi-org environment, then
you need at least one for each operating unit.
Ensure that there are at the same number of actual and target processes.


Q12. What happens if Receiving Transaction Manager fails using on-line mode?

A: If the RCVOLTM fails, you will get the error message on the screen.
There should be nothing stuck in the RCV_TRANACTIONS_INTERFACE. However,
the header information inserted into the RCV_SHIPMENT_HEADERS table will not


rollback or be deleted. This process is followed to ensure that there is no break to
the sequence of receipt numbers that have been generated when a header
transaction was inserted.

Potential workaround for failed receipts:
Where there are headers without shipment lines, due to RCVOLTM failure, users
can query the receipt number in the Enter Receipts form, and perform an 'Add to'
receipt, to re-process the failed lines.


Q13. What are the typical causes of RCVOLTM failure?

A: 1. Receiving transaction managers may not be up and running.
Use the Administer Concurrent Manager form to check if Receiving Transaction
Manager is Active, and make sure the Actual and Target process > 0
2. An SQL error has occurred due to insufficient tablespace, etc. Please check the
Alert log.
3. Make sure Inventory Manager is running if receiving against inventory items.


Q14. How does RCVOLTM work in a Multi-org environment?

A: Since release 11 and 11i, there is only one DATA GROUP = apps schema and
one installation for multiple operating units. We do not need to define multiple
Receiving Managers for different operating unit. One Receiving Manager typically
is sufficient.


Q15. What are the differences between Batch, Immediate and on-line mode?

A: Three choices on Profile RCV: Processing Mode:
Immediate
Batch
On-line

Immediate: the form will start running Receiving Transaction Processor as a
background process. The system will not hold the screen and the user can do


something else. Uses Receiving Transaction Processor (RVCTP). This essentially
can be thought of as an immediate execution of the batch process hence the term
"Immediate"

On-line: The user will not be able to perform any other application activities until
the process completes. Uses Receiving
Transaction Manager (RCVOLTM). This is an online process that will return any
encountered errors to the user online while the process is running.

Batch: Control is returned to the User immediately so other application activities
may be performed. The transaction will be processed by running Concurrent
Program Receiving Transaction Processor (RVCTP). Typically, Customers will run
this program periodically based on their processing and system requirements.
This process is or can be run as a batch process on the server or it can be
manually run by submitting from the concurrent process screen. All records in the
interface under the batch process will be transacted.

Note: Beginning with Release 11, Trace Mode can be set for the Concurrent
Program for the debug purpose:
System Administrator Responsibility -> Concurrent -> Program -> Define
Query for Receiving Transaction Processor and select Enable Trace checkbox. To
create a trace file, set Personal Profile RCV: Processing Mode to Batch, perform a
Receipt then run Concurrent Program Receiving Transaction Processor.


Q16. What are the major receiving tables involved?

A: RCV_SHIPMENT_HEADERS
RCV_SHIPMENT_LINES
RCV_TRANSACTIONS
RCV_RECEIVING_SUB_LEDGER
FAQ Details
Q1. What is the order of defaulting of the Receipt Routing on the receipts screen
which may be set at various levels?

A: For Inter-Org Shipments (In-Transit Receipts) the Receipt Routing is defaulted
as follows:


1. Item Attribute
2. if 1 is null, then Shipping Network for the Receiving Organization
3. if 2 is null, then Receiving Option


Q2. What are the different types of Inter-Organization Transfers?

A: Inter-Organization transfers can be performed as either direct or intransit
shipments.
Direct inter-organization transfers: Inventory is moved directly from a shipping
organization to the destination organization. Inter organization transfers using
intransit inventory: Usually done when transfer time is significant. Delivery
location isn't specified during transfer transaction, You only need to enter
subinventory you are shipping from, a shipment number, the freight information
and inter-organization transfer charge. Then you need to perform Receipt from
the Receiving forms.


Q3. What are the minimum setups required for Items which we use for Internal
Sales Order?

A: The items which we use for Internal Sales Order must be Inventory enabled,
internally orderable and stockable, shippable, and Order Management
transactable for the source organizations. Under Inventory, you need to select the
Inventory Item, Transactable, and Stockable options. Under Order Management,
you need to select the Internal Ordered, Internal Orders Enabled, OE
Transactable, and Shippable options.


Q4. How do we define the Inter-Organization Shipping Network?

A: Use the Shipping Networks window to define your inter?organization network.
You must enable the network between each source (shipping) and destination
(receiving) organization.
-Select Internal Order Required if you want all transfers between these two
organizations to use internal orders.
-Specify whether you ship material directly, or use intransit inventory for


shipments between these two organizations.
-For intransit transfers, you can choose from the following primary receipt
routings: Standard receipt, Inspection required, or Direct delivery.


Q5. What are the steps to perform Inter-Organization Transfer?

A: Follow these 3 simple steps:

1. Setup Shipping Network: This information describes the relationships and
accounting information that exists between a from (shipping) organization and a
to (distribution) organization.
Navigation path:
A. Choose the Inventory Manager responsibility.
B. Setup/Organizations - Make sure that there is an entry for from/to organization
(between the organizations you intend to perform the transfer). When you click
on this form, you will get a LOV with orgs.
-Choose the From Org.
-Transfer Type can be either Intransit or Direct (Direct would ship directly to
Inventory, so it would be a Direct Delivery).
-FOB can be either Receipt or Shipment, if the transfer type is entered as
Intransit.
If Receipt the source inventory quantities get updated at time of receipt.
If it be Shipping, then the quantities get updated as soon as the shipment is done.

2. Inventory/Transactions/Interorganization Transfer: When you click on this
form, you will get a LOV with orgs. Choose the from org. Specify the to-org,
transfer type as intransit, and input a value for shipment-number.
Click on the transaction lines button. Input the item, the quantity and the
subinventories between which you want to do the transfer. (Sometimes there
might not be enough quantity in the from-org to do this. For this : Go to:
Inventory/Transactions/Miscellaneous Transactions. Specify the Type as
Miscellaneous Receipt. Click on transaction lines button and specify
item/quantity).

3. Receive against an Inter-org Transfer: Choose Purchasing Super User
responsibility.


Under Purchasing/Receiving/Receipts - Query up against Shipment Number in the
find window. In RCV Transactions block, specify the quantity you want to receive
and commit the transaction.


Q6. What are the steps required for receiving against Internal Sales Order?

A: The process of receiving against Internal Sales Orders involves the following
steps:

1. Create an Internally Orderable Item - To do this you need to create an Item and
in the Order Entry attributes, check the Internally Orderable check box.

2. Setup Shipping Network: This information describes the relationships and
accounting information that exists between a from (shipping) organization and a
to (distribution) organization.
Navigation path:
A. Choose the Inventory Manager responsibility.
B. Setup/Organizations - Make sure that there is an entry for from/to organization
(between the organizations you intend to perform the transfer e.g.. GLO -> SAC).
When you click on this form, you will get a LOV with orgs.
-Choose the From Org.
-Transfer Type can be either Intransit or Direct (Direct would ship directly to
Inventory, so it would be a Direct Delivery).
-FOB can be either Receipt or Shipment, if the transfer type is entered as
Intransit.
If Receipt the source inventory quantities get updated at time of receipt.
If it be Shipping, then the quantities get updated as soon as the shipment is done.

3. Create an Internal Requisition.
-Enter the item you created in step 1.
-Enter the Source and Destination Organization. Source Organization is on the
right of the form and Destination to the left.
-Enter location (e.g.. SACHQ) and Source as Inventory.
-Save and approve requisition.

4. Run the Create Internal Orders concurrent program.



5. Change responsibility to Order Entry Superuser.

6. Run Order Import concurrent program.

7. When the process completes, you will see the Order Number in the log file.

8. If the process errors : "You must enter Tax Code. Tax code attribute is missing"
then:
-Change responsibility to AR Manager (Receivables)
-Navigate Setup->Transaction->Transaction Types
-Query up record with Name = "Invoice Hdwe/svcs"
-Uncheck the Tax Calculation check box
-Save

9. Run the Demand Interface concurrent program.

10. Run the Manufacturing Release concurrent program.

11. Navigate to:
-Orders, Returns -> Orders, Returns -> Do a Find on the Order Number
-Click on the View button
-Click on Cycle Status
-Your Order should now be Pick Release Eligible

12. Navigate to Shipping -> Pick Release -> Release Sales Order
-Enter a Batch Name and your Order Number
-Save
-Note the Batch_ID by doing a Help->Tools->Examine.

13. Run the Pick Release concurrent program. Use Batch Name/Order Number as
parameter. This can be run from command line as:
./OESREL apps_appdemo/fnd@comp16p 0 Y <Batch ID> (from step L)

Perform Step K. Your Order should now be Ship Confirm Eligible

14. Navigate to Shipping->Confirm Shipments->Pick Slip


-Do a Find on the Order Number
-Click on Open
-Click on details
-Check if all values of quantity to be shipped are correct
-Save

15. Change Responsibility to Purchasing Super User.
Navigate to the Enter Receipts form and query on the Requisition Number.
You can now receive against the Internal Order.
To override the destination type at receipt time you need to set the profile option
RCV: Allow routing override = Yes.


Q7. How are Lot and Serial Numbers handled in Inter-Organization Transfers?

A: When you perform an inter?organization transfer, the source and destination
organization may have different lot/serial controls. Purchasing handles this
situation as follows:
1. When the source organization uses controls and the destination organization
does not, the control numbers are recorded as being issued from the source
organization. Lot/serial transactions are recorded for the destination
organization.
2. When the source organization does not use controls and the destination
organization does, the transaction is processed normally.
3. When both source and destination organizations use controls, the control
numbers are recorded as being issued from the source organization. These
control numbers are tracked to insure that the same control numbers that were
shipped are the ones
that are received. When items are returned from inventory to receiving or to the
supplier, only the control numbers originally recorded for the delivery transaction
can be used.


Q8. What's the cause of the error RVTSH-150 and what's the solution for it?

A: Error RVTSH-150 is because the following select is failing, returning 0 rows:
SQL> select ms.unit_of_measure


from mtl_supply ms
where supply_type_code = 'REQ'
and supply_source_id = :req_line_id;

The error is because the Req. Supply missing. This is mostly a data problem
caused at customer site. Look into why the records are missing. May be the data
has been manually changed or some cancellations for the req. shipment has taken
place.



Q9. What are the main tables involved in Inter-Organization Transfer?

A: A check is carried out to see if the transaction date is in an open period as
specified in the profile option (INV: Transaction Date Validation). The column is
acct_period, the table is ORG_ACCT_PERIODS.
The organizations setting, cost information, etc, are derived from:
ORG_ORGANIZATION_DEFINITIONS, MTL_PARAMETERS, MFG_LOOKUPS,
MTL_INTERORG_PARAMETERS
[HR_ORGANIZATION_INFORMATION - for rel 11I].
The transaction information is derived from MTL_TRX_TYPES_VIEW for inter-org
transactions where transaction_source_type_id=13.
The item information is derived from MTL_SYSTEM_ITEMS
[MTL_SYSTEM_ITEMS_B - for rel 11I].
A check is carried out to verify the available item quantity on MTL_DEMAND and
MTL_ONHAND_QUANTITIES [MTL_RESERVATIONS included in rel 11I].
MTL_SUBINVENTORIES_TRK_VAL_V keeps track of the values of the
subinventories.
MTL_ITEM_LOCATIONS is searched for the locators specified (if used).
GL_CODE_COMBINATIONS is searched for a valid locator combination (if used).
The cost of the item is gotten from CST_CG_ITEM_COSTS_VIEW.
The transaction is inserted into MTL_MATERIAL_TRANSACTIONS_TEMP table.
If the item is under lot control, lot information is deleted from
MTL_TRANSACTION_LOTS_TEMP, likewise the serial numbers information if the
item is serialized is deleted from MTL_SERIAL_NUMBERS_TEMP,
MTL_SERIAL_NUMBERS.
The new lot information is inserted into MTL_TRANSACTION_LOTS_TEMP.




Q10. How can we correct delivered lines in an Internal Requisition?

A: The system allows corrections to internal requisition, but only the receiving
lines and not the delivered lines. Once the internal requisition is delivered,
correction is not allowed.
FAQ Details
Q1. What is the Receiving Transaction Processor, how do I launch it and what is
the meaning of the various modes?

A: The Receiving Transaction Processor processes pending or unprocessed
receiving transactions. How the Receiving Transaction Processor handles these
transactions depends on the processing mode, which is a profile option (RCV:
Processing Mode) that you can set at the site, application, responsibility, and user
levels. The debug log file can be generated if profile RCV: Debug Mode is set to
Yes. However the log file will be generated only if the Processing Mode is
Immediate or Batch.

In On-line processing mode, Purchasing calls the Receiving Transaction Processor
when you save your work.

In Immediate processing mode, when you save your work, the receiving forms call
the Receiving Transaction Processor for the group of transactions you have
entered since you last saved your work. Note that this is a specific group of
transactions. Transactions belonging to other groups (for example, those entered
by another user in Batch processing mode) are not included.

In Batch processing mode, the receiving forms insert transaction information into
the receiving interface tables. These transactions remain in the interface table
until you run the Receiving Transaction Processor. The receiving forms take into
account all pending transactions, but Purchasing does not update the transaction
history, source documents, and supply information until the transactions are
processed. You can set Standard Report Submission parameters to run the
Receiving Transaction Processor at specified intervals so that your pending
transactions are processed as often as required.



The Receiving Transaction Processor performs the following functions:
. validates Advance Shipment Notice (ASN) and Advance Shipment and Billing and
Notice (ASBN) information in the receiving open interface
. derives and defaults values into the receiving interface tables (For example, if a
particular value or field is not received, the receiving open interface tries to derive
the value using defaulting and derivation rules.)
. creates receipt headers for intransit shipments
. creates receipt lines for all receipts
. maintains transaction history information
. maintains lot and serial transaction history
. accrues uninvoiced receipt liabilities
. maintains the following purchase order quantities: quantity received, quantity
delivered, quantity accepted, and quantity rejected
. closes purchase orders for receiving
. maintains the following requisition quantities: quantity received, quantity
delivered
. maintains supply information
. maintains inventory information (for Inventory destination type)
. maintains outside processing information (for Shop Floor destination type)
To run the Receiving Transaction Processor :
1. Navigate to the Submit Requests window.
2. Select Requests in the first field.
3. Select Receiving Transaction Processor in the Name field.
4. Choose Submit to begin the process.


Q2. Which tables are populated when we create a Standard receipt against a PO
before the Receiving Transaction Processor is invoked?

A: Records are inserted into rcv_transactions_interface with
processing_status_code and transaction_status_code as 'PENDING' and
transaction_type of 'RECEIVE'. Records are also inserted into
rcv_shipment_headers which creates the shipment header.


Q3. Why can't I find the receipt in the Receiving Transaction Summary even
after completing the Receipt (Receiving -> Receipts)?



A: a) From Transaction Status Summary query for the Receipt Number or PO
Number and check to see if the transactions have been stuck in the interface
(Status=Pending).
b) If using RCV: Processing Mode = Batch, make sure to run the Receiving
Transaction Processor.
c) If using RCV: Processing Mode = Batch or Immediate...go to Concurrent Request
screen...check to see if the concurrent
process = Receiving Transaction Processor has completed.
d)If the RCV: Processing Mode is Online or Immediate and records are fetched in
the Transaction Status Summary form in
PENDING or ERROR status, these can be deleted from the form and the receiving
transaction done again.


Q4. How many processes are needed for the Receiving Transaction Manager?

A: In most cases, there are 3 processes. If you are in multi-org environment, then
you need at least one for each operating unit.


Q5. What is Receiving Transaction Manager RCVOLTM?

A:RCVOLTM is the executable that runs the Online Receiving Transactions. The
Executable is stored in the server ($PO_TOP/bin).
You can check the versions by the following command:
cd $PO_TOP/bin
strings -a RCVOLTM | grep -i '$Header: rv'


Q6. What happens if Receiving Transaction Manager fails using on-line mode?

A: If the RCVOLTM fails, you will get the error message on the screen. There
should be nothing stuck in the RCV_TRANACTIONS_INTERFACE.
However, the header information inserted into the RCV_SHIPMENT_HEADERS
table will not rollback or be deleted. This process is followed to ensure that there
is no break to the sequence of receipt numbers that have been generated when a


header transaction was inserted.

Potential workaround for failed receipts: Where there are headers without
shipment lines, due to RCVOLTM failure, users can query the receipt number in
the Enter Receipts form, and perform an 'Add to' receipt, to re-process the failed
lines.



Q7. Why do we get TIMEOUT error while Receiving in On-line mode?

A: In on-line mode we launch a concurrent program (RCVOLTM) and wait for its
completion before the control returns to the user. The time allotted is 60 seconds
(hard coded) and if the program does not complete in 60 seconds, AOL raises
"Timeout" error.
($PO_TOP/resource/RCVCOTRX.pld). This occurs mainly as the process cannot
complete within 60secs due to huge processing size of the receiving transaction
or heavy load on the CPU.


Q8. What are the typical causes of RCVOLTM failure?

A: a) Receiving transaction managers may not be up and running.
Use the Administer Concurrent Manager form to check if Receiving Transaction
Manager is Active and make sure the Actual and Target process > 0.
b) A SQL error has occurred due to insufficient tablespace, etc. Please check the
Alert log.
c) Make sure Inventory Manager is running if receiving against inventory items.


Q9. How does RCVOLTM work in a Multi-org environment?

A: Since release 11 and 11i, there is only one DATA GROUP = apps schema and
one installation for multiple operating units. We do not need to define multiple
Receiving Managers for different operating unit. One Receiving Manager is good
enough.




Q10. What is the cause of the following error?

A: "APP-FND-00204 Concurrent Manager encountered an error while running the
spawned concurrent program Receiving Transaction Manager - RCVOLTM for your
concurrent request 1180 TM-SVC LOCK HANDLE FAILED."
This would mean that the Receiving Transaction Manager is inactive or
terminated.
This is the manager used for processing receiving transactions in the Online
mode.
Ask your system administrator to activate the Receiving Transaction Manager.
If that does not help you will have to take this up as with the AOL team.


Q11. What are the differences between Batch, Immediate and on-line mode?

A: Three choices on Profile RCV: Processing Mode: Immediate, Batch, On-line

Immediate: The form will start running Receiving Transaction Processor as a
background process. The system will not hold the screen and the user can do
something else.
Uses Receiving Transaction Processor (RVCTP).

On-line: The user will not be able to perform any other application activities until
the process completes. Uses Receiving Transaction Manager (RCVOLTM).

Batch: Control is returned to the User immediately so other application activities
may be performed. The transaction will be processed by running Concurrent
Program Receiving Transaction Processor (RVCTP). Typically, Customers will run
this program periodically based on their processing and system requirements.


Q12. How should I get a log file and database trace files for the Receiving
Transaction Processor?

A: To get the database trace file :


Set the profile option PO: Enable Sql Trace for Receiving Processor = Yes.

To get the log file :
Set the profile option RCV: Debug Mode to Yes.
Set the profile option RCV: Processing Mode to either Immediate or Batch.

Debug messages will not be printed to the concurrent log file if the mode is On-
line.



Q13. Why is the log file not built even after setting the profile option RCV:
Debug Mode = Yes?

A: The profile option RCV: Debug Mode works only if the profile option RCV:
Processing Mode = Immediate or Batch. Debug messages will not be printed to
the concurrent log file if the mode is On-line.


Q14. What's the cause of the error RVTSH-150 and what's the solution for it?

A: Error RVTSH-150 is because the following select is failing, returning 0 rows:
SQL> select ms.unit_of_measure
from mtl_supply ms
where supply_type_code = 'REQ'
and supply_source_id = :req_line_id;

The error is because the Req. Supply missing. This is mostly a data problem
caused at the customer's site. Look into why the records are missing. May be the
data has been manually changed or some of the req. shipment has been
cancelled.
FAQ Details
Q1. What pre-requisites are required for a vendor sourced receipt?

A: PO Receipt (vendor sourced receipt) can be performed for Shipments that are
currently Approved even though the Purchase Order may not be currently
Approved. Only Approved Shipments which have the ship-to-organization same as


the active Inventory Organization are eligible to be received.
This means that a PO supply exists in mtl_supply. Check the values of the
following columns in PO_LINE_LOCATIONS:
APPROVED_FLAG = 'Y' AND
CANCEL_FLAG = 'N' AND
CLOSED_CODE != 'FINALLY CLOSED'


Q2. Where are the records inserted when a standard receipt is created against a
PO before the Receiving Transaction Processor is called?

A: Records are inserted into rcv_transactions_interface with
processing_status_code and transaction_status_code as 'PENDING'. Records are
also inserted into rcv_shipment_headers which creates the shipment header.


Q3. How does Receipt Close Point work?

A: Define Purchase Options -> Control Options -> Receipt Close Point.
Three choices:
Accepted - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record
the shipment as being fully accepted.
Delivered - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record
the shipment as being fully delivered.
Received - Oracle Purchasing closes the shipment for receiving when you record
the shipment as being fully received.
Oracle Purchasing displays this option as the default.
You also need to set the receipt close tolerance percentage in the Default Options
Region.
Choose one of the above values for the receipt close point.


Q4. Why isn't my PO found when I query for it on the Receipt form?

A: Please check the following:
a) Query the PO from the Purchase Order form and note the Organization on the
Shipment. Ensure you are using the same Organization on the Receipt form.


b) On the Receipt form, select the checkbox for 'Include closed POs' then requery
the PO.


Q5. Why can't I find the receipt in the Receiving Transaction Summary even
after completing the Receipt (Receiving -> Receipts)?

A: a) From Transaction Status Summary query for the Receipt Number or PO
Number and check to see if the transactions have been stuck in the interface
(Status=Pending).
b) If using RCV: Processing Mode = Batch, make sure to run the Receiving
Transaction Processor.
c) If using RCV: Processing Mode = Batch or Immediate...go to Concurrent Request
screen...check to see if the concurrent process = Receiving Transaction Processor
is finished.


Q6. Why can't I perform Direct Receipt if using Standard Receipt Routing or
Inspection Required?

A: To override the destination type at receipt time you need to set the profile
option RCV: Allow routing override = Yes.


Q7. What is the order of defaulting of the Receipt Routing on the receipts screen
which may be set at various levels?

A: The Receipt Routing on the receipts screen is defaulted as follows:
1. Purchase Order Shipment
2. if 1 is null, then Item Attribute
3. if 2 is null, then Vendor Attribute
4. if 3 is null, then Receiving Option
But for Inter-Org Shipments (In-Transit Receipts) the Receipt Routing is defaulted
as follows:
1. Item Attribute
2. if 1 is null, then Shipping Network for the Receiving Organization
3. if 2 is null, then Receiving Option




Q8. Where is the receipt history saved when I do various receiving
transactions?

A: The history records are saved in the rcv_transactions table and organized by
transaction_type.
In case item is under lot or serial control, records are also inserted into
rcv_lot_transactions and rcv_serial_transactions.


Q9. What are the various transactions types?

A: Receive - Receive the items into Receiving Dock.
Deliver - Deliver the items into expense or inventory destination.
Return to Vendor - Return the received items directly to vendors.
Return to Receiving - Return the delivered items to Receiving Dock or Inspection.
Accept - Accept items following an inspection.
Reject - Reject items following an inspection.
Transfer - Transfer items between locations.
Correct - Enter a positive or negative adjustment to a receiving or delivery
transaction.
Match - Match unordered receipts to purchase orders.
Unordered - Receive items without purchase orders.


Q10. Where does the mandatory Location field on the receipts form gets
populated from when performing "Direct Receipt"?

A: The location field on the receipts form gets populated from the Purchase Order
distributions.
Here, there is a field called Deliver_To. This field populates the Location field in
the receipts form.




Q11. When is the Express button enabled in the Receiving form RCVRCERC?

A: The Express function is available in the Receipts window if you have specified
or inferred a source in the Find Expected Receipts window. (The source would be
inferred if you entered, for example, a purchase order number). In the Receiving
Transactions window, the express function is available for deliveries regardless of
your search criteria in the Find Receiving Transactions window.
Performing any manual action in a line disables the Express button, and it is not
enabled until you have again selected the find button.
You also need to check the option "Allow Express Transactions" in the Receiving
Options Form as a prerequisite.
Navigation - Setup --> Organizations --> Receiving Options.


Q12. When will the Inspect button on the Receiving Transactions form get
highlighted?

A: The Inspect button will be highlighted when:
1) 'RCV: Allow routing override' is set to YES.
2) 'RCV: Allow routing override' set to NO but the Routing is set to Inspection
Required.


Q13. How does Receiving interface with Inventory?

A: Once the PO is received, it creates the inventory interface record i.e. inserts a
record into mtl_material_transactions_temp and calls the inventory function
inltpu() which completes the delivery of the item into Inventory and also updates
the on hand quantities. ($PO_TOP/src/rvtp/rvtii.lpc)


Q14. How does Receiving interface with WIP for OSP items?

A: The function rvtooperation() in rvtoo.lpc calls the following WIP API which
takes care of the interface with WIP for OSP items.
WIP_Transaction_PVT.Process_OSP_Transaction (
p_OSP_rec => osp_rec,


p_validation_level => WIP_Transaction_PVT.NONE,
p_return_status => :ret_status:ret_status_ind,
p_msg_count => msg_count,
p_msg_data => msg_data);


Q15. Which tables are populated for accrual accounting to happen?

A: The following tables must be populated for accrual accounting to happen:
GL_INTERFACE
RCV_RECEIVING_SUB_LEDGER
RCV_SUB_LEDGER_DETAILS (for match-to-receipt)
Files: $PO_TOP/src/accrual/rvcac.opc
$PO_TOP/src/accrual/rvacj.lpc
FAQ Details
Q1. What is a Debit Memo Invoice?

A: Negative amount invoice which is created and sent to a supplier to notify the
Supplier of a credit you are recording.


Q2. When should a Debit Memo be created?

A: To correct over billing errors, we create a Debit Memo by doing a Return To
Supplier transaction for the extra quantity that got invoiced.


Q3. Is Debit Memo functionality supported in 10.7 and 11.0?

A: No, Debit Memo functionality is supported only in Release 11i.


Q4. How does Create Debit Memo from RTS Functionality Work?

A: Steps to Create a Debit Memo via RTS:
1. Create a PO with supplier and supplier site.


2. Receive the goods using Enter Receipts Form.
3. Create an Invoice. If Pay on Receipt is used to create then Invoice then set
Pay on as Receipt and Invoice Summary Level as Receipt in Supplier sites
window under purchasing tab.
4. Do a Return To Supplier (RTS) transaction for some of the goods using Returns
form.
5. Make sure the check Box 'Create Debit Memo' is checked in the Return line
while doing the RTS transaction.
6. This will automatically create a Debit Memo invoice in AP.

Depending on how the RCV: Processing Mode Profile option, Receiving
Transaction Processor will be kicked off as soon as Receipt/Return transaction is
saved.
If profile option RCV: Processing Mode = Batch, then user has to go and manually
launch Receiving Transaction Processor concurrent request.
If profile option RCV: Processing Mode = Immediate, then Receiving Transaction
Processor concurrent request will be launched and runs in the background. In this
case control comes back to user and he can do his operations.
If profile option RCV: Processing Mode = Online, then Receiving Transaction
Processor concurrent request will be launched. In this case control will not come
back to user until processor completes processing.


Q5. What setup is required to create a Debit Memo?

A: Navigate: Supply Base -> Suppliers -> Query on supplier -> Sites -> Query on
site -> Purchasing tab -> Check the box for Create Debit Memo from RTS
Transaction. Make sure the check Box 'Create Debit Memo' is checked in the
Return line while doing the RTS Transaction.


Q6. Under what Conditions a Debit Memo can be created?

A: Automatic Debit Memo will be created only when billed quantity of Purchase
Order is greater than or equal to Returned Quantity. Return To Supplier reduces
the PO billed quantity by the returned quantity but in any case PO billed quantity
will never go below zero.




Q7. What to do if Debit Memo is not created after doing an RTS transaction?

A: Set the profile options RCV: Processing Mode to Immediate and RCV:
Debug Mode to Yes. Receiving Transaction Processor log file (with debug
messages of Receiving and AP code) and database trace file for RTS transaction
will help in finding the cause of the problem.


Q8. Is Debit Memo not getting created when Inspection is involved?

A: This functionality has been incorporated in Procurement Family Pack H,
and is also available via interim patch 2151718 (plus pre-reqs shown below).
These are the list of patches to be applied for Debit Memo functionality to work if
Inspection is involved.

If applying Procurement If applying PO Family Pack H: - OR - interim patch
2151718:
----------------------- ----------------------
11i.PRC_PF.H 1763128
1842268 (AP patch) 1842268 (AP patch)
2045028
2144921
2179807
2151718

If Inspection is not involved, then no need to apply the above mentioned patches.
FAQ Details
Q1. What is Pay On Receipt?

A: Pay on Receipt (also known as ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement) or Self-
Billing) is an Oracle Purchasing's concurrent program, which automatically creates
invoices in Oracle Payables and matches them with PO's automatically for the
received amount. The short name for the program is POXPOIV.




Q2. What is the minimum set-up required?

A: 1. In Oracle Purchasing responsibility, navigate to Supply base ->Suppliers.
Query the supplier to be used in the PO and Query the site to be used in PO. In
the General Tab, check the checkboxes for PAY SITE and PURCHASING. In the
Purchasing tab, the Pay on field should have a value of' Receipt'. The invoice
summary level should also have the value of 'Receipt'.
2. Apart from the above set-up in R11i, we need to enter the value of ?Receipt?
against the Pay on field in the Terms window of the PO.


Q3. What is the impact of payables options on ERS?

A: From Payables options, under GL date basis there are four options. The
accounting date will be based on the option selected here. Make sure that the
date is in the open period.


Q4. How can we identify the invoices created by Pay on receipt?

A: The invoices created by ERS will have ERS prefix generally. To identify the
invoice created for a particular receipt we can query with the combination of ERS
and receipt number in the invoice number field. In R11i, the profile option PO:
ERS invoice number prefix can be set as needed which can be used to identify the
invoices.


Q5. What are the parameters passed?

A: For R107 and R11, the parameters passed are Parameter name value:
1. Transaction Source - ERS
2. Commit interval- default 1
3. Organization- Receiving org
4. Receipt Number- optional


If a receipt number is not specified all the receipts for that organization, which are
eligible for Pay on Receipt, are picked. For R11i, the organization parameter does
not exist instead a new parameter called Aging period exists.


Q6. What is the significance of Ageing Period (R11i)?

A: The parameter Aging period determines the transactions on the receipt that
can be considered for the invoice creation. For ex if aging period is given as 1,
then all the transactions that have a transaction date less than or equal to the
(sysdate-1) are considered for invoice creation. The aging period can be set thru
the profile option PO: ERS Aging period.


Q7. How can we debug what went wrong?

A: We can refer to the log file and check for error messages in
po_interface_errors.
There could be many errors. Listed below are some common errors and possible
resolutions.
1) Error Occurred in routine: create_invoice_header - Location: 110. Please refer
note 1071391.6.
2) Pay on receipt Autoinvoice does not create any invoice. Note 1047839.6 might
be useful. Please ensure the setup is complete in payables and Purchasing
modules.
3) You have a supplier who has a separate site for purchasing and Payables. When
running the ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement) it is selecting the purchasing site
and therefore does not create the invoice and gets a message that the POXPOIV:
'pay site is invalid'.
4) Purchasing Pay on Receipt Autoinvoice shows multiple occurrences of same
receipt number in multiorg environment. See Note 95384.1 for the solution.
5) Pay On Receipt AutoInvoice errors: po_inv_cr_invalid_gl_period. Please refer to
note 179693.1 for resolution.


Q8. Does ERS work for unordered receipts?



A: No. ERS does not work for unordered receipts. This means invoice needs to be
created manually for those PO?s that are created from unordered receipts
FAQ Details
Q1. Can I use any forms to view receiving transactions stuck in the
RCV_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE table?

A: The Transactions Status Summary form can be utilized to view all transactions
currently in the RCV_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE table. Navigation: Receiving ->
Transaction Status Summary


Q2. Is the Receiving Open Interface (ROI) functionality available in release 10.7
and how can the support avail this functionality?

A: For release 10.7, this functionality was only available as a controlled production
release. The controlled production program now has an acceptable number of
customers enrolled, and is not being offered to any other customers wishing to
use this functionality in 10.7.Customers that currently have release 10.7 and do
not have this functionality will need to upgrade to release 11.0 or higher, which
contains the production version of this functionality.
For approved customers enrolled in the controlled production program, support is
offered as usual through Oracle Support Services. In addition, CAI partners and
their customers are supported by development for this functionality as well.


Q3. Where can the receipt information be imported from?

A: Receipt information can be imported from the following sources:
- Other Oracle Applications products, such as EDI Advance Shipment Notices sent
from suppliers
- Non-Oracle applications


Q4. What are some of the supported and non-supported features of the
Receiving Open Interface?



A: The non-supported features include:
- Lot number transactions
- Serial number transactions
- Dynamic locator control
- Replace transactions
- Separate RECEIVE and DELIVER transactions
This means that if there is a RECEIVE transaction processed using the open
interface, then the DELIVER transaction for that RECEIVE transaction needs to be
manually created using the Receiving Transactions form.
- DELIVER transactions as a single transaction
- May not handle Inter-Org Transfers or Internal Sales Order transaction types
- May not be used for creating unordered receipts
The supported features are the ones that exist in the Oracle Purchasing
application, excluding the above. The receipt information from Advance Shipment
Notice, Advance Shipment Notice with billing information, and other sources can
be used to create in transit shipments, receipts and delivery transactions as
output in the database.
The supported transaction types are:
- SHIP for a standard shipment
- RECEIVE for standard receipt
- DELIVER for standard receipt and delivery transactions.


Q5. What are the tables associated with the Receiving Open Interface?

A: There are two (2) main tables associated with the Receiving Open Interface:
RCV_HEADERS_INTERFACE, which should contain one row per receipt number,
and RCV_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE, which may contain one or more
transactions per header.


Q6. How can you view the error messages, for any rows that failed to import
successfully?

A: There are a couple of methods that can be used to accomplish this:
1) Run the Receiving Interface Errors Report.
Navigation: Reports/Run


Select the Receiving Interface Errors Report
2) If the desire is to see the errors directly from the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table
(this is where any errors are written to), the following statements can be
executed in SQL*Plus using the APPS schema:
Select interface_type, a.interface_transaction_id, column_name, error_message,
processing_date from po_interface_errors a, rcv_headers_interface b where
a.interface_transaction_id = b.header_interface_id and processing_status_code
in ('ERROR','PRINT');
Select interface_type, a.interface_transaction_id, column_name, error_message,
processing_date from po_interface_errors a, rcv_transactions_interface b where
a.interface_transaction_id = b.interface_transaction_id and
processing_status_code in ('ERROR', 'PRINT');


Q7. Which columns are required in the open interface tables?

A: Refer to the Oracle Manufacturing, Distribution, Sales, and Service Open
Interfaces Manual for this information. Within the section for the Receiving Open
Interface, there is a listing of every column for all open interface tables, as well as
an indication of whether data for each column is required, optional, conditionally
required, or derived.
References: Oracle Manufacturing, Distribution, Sales, and Service Release 11
Open Interfaces Manual (Part #: A57332-01), pages 6-67 to 6-90


Q8. Is there a test script available that can be used to generate a receipt using
the Receiving Open Interface?

A: There are test scripts available that can be used to load data into the required
interface tables. These scripts can be used to whether or not the Receiving
Transactions Processor is set up and functioning properly. The scripts are now
available in Patch 1362526 for Release 11.0.X and 11.5.X.


Q9. How can you debug the Receiving Open Interface program?

A: There is a script called 'runit.sql' that can be used to help debug and


troubleshoot Receiving Open Interface issues. This script helps to find where the
Receiving Open Interface is failing. The script is now available in Patch 1362526
for Release 11.0.X and 11.5.X.


Q10. I need to use runit.sql from SQL*Plus. However, I do not see the debug
messages on screen. Am I missing anything?

A: Open the file $PO_TOP/admin/sql/RCVDBUGB.pls and search for a procedure
PUT_LINE.
Uncomment the following line:
-- dbms_output.put_line (v_line);
Apply the file into the database and it should show the debug messages now on
the screen


Q11. Can we use Receiving Open Interface for RMA receipts?

A: The functionality of creating an RMA receipt using the Receiving Open
Interface is not yet available. Enhancement Request 2142948 was logged to
provide this functionality in future releases.
FAQ Details
Q1. What is an ASN?

A: The ASN (Advanced Shipment Notice (856)) is a document that is sent to a
buyer in advance of the buyer receiving the product. It is typically used within the
context of an EDI environment. It can be used to list the contents of an expected
shipment of goods as well as additional information relating to the shipment, such
as order information, product description, physical characteristics, type of
packaging, marking carrier information, and configuration of goods within the
transportation equipment. In the implementation of the transaction the latest the
ship notice may be sent is the time of shipment. In practice the ship notice just
arrive before the shipment.
The process flow is as follows:
1. Supplier sends ASN.
2. EDI validates the data for EDI standards and inserts data into Receiving


Interface tables.
3. Receiving Open Interface validates ASN data. If accepted shipment lines are
populated.
4. Supply details are maintained.
5. Application Advice is generated. The supplier can check if there is a rejection of
ASN through the advice.


Q2. What are the business needs for an ASN?

A: Receive a Shipping notice in Advance.
Load ASN electronically into Oracle Apps using ROI.
Respond using Application Advice via EDI against the received ASN.

Q4. How can we debug if an error occurs?

A: We can check in the po_interface_errors for errors with shipment numbers. As
each ASN uses distinct shipment number, we can identify the error for the
shipment. We may get a very generic error message RCV_ASN_NOT_ACCEPT.
When we get the error message either there are a series of errors have occurred
which cannot be handled or an undetermined error has occurred. To handle this
kind of situation we have a script called runit.sql. This actually prints debug
messages as the pre-processor process the interface records. We can also run the
Receiving Interface report. This report shows you what warnings or errors
occurred while the Receiving Transaction Processor was processing rows in the
Receiving Open Interface tables. Rows processed in the Receiving Open Interface
include Advance Shipment Notices (ASNs), receipts, and deliveries. Any errors
that occur during this process are displayed in the Receiving Interface Errors
report when you run the report. At the same time, the errors are also sent to the
Oracle eCommerce Gateway process responsible for generating Application
Advices. (For example, Application Advices are sent back to suppliers detailing
errors that occurred when the suppliers sent ASNs.)
A sample of runit.sql is available at the following link: http://www-
apps.us.oracle.com/po/support
For R11i we have a profile option PO: Enable sql Trace on for Receiving, which
actually prints the debug messages of runit.sql in the log file.




Q5. What are the profile options available for ASN?

A: The profile option available for ASN is RCV: Fail All ASN Lines if One Line Fails.
When this profile option is set to YES, when multiple lines are being
processed, even if one line fails validations or errors, the valid lines also error out.


Q6. Is ASN available for every customer?

A: In R107, ASN is a controlled production, which means only customers in the
controlledproduction list can use ASN. In R11 and R11i, it is available for all
customers.


Q7. Can we cancel a PO after shipping the ASN but before receiving the ASN?

A: We cannot cancel a PO if ASN is yet to be received.

FAQ Details
Q1. What is a Drop ship PO?

A: Oracle Order Management and Oracle Purchasing integrate to provide drop
shipments. Drop shipments are orders for items that your supplier ships directly
to the customer either because you dont stock or currently dont have the
items in inventory, or because its more cost effective for the supplier to ship
the item to the customer directly. Drop shipment was introduced in R11.


Q2. How is a Drop Ship PO created?

A: Drop shipments are created as sales orders in Order Management. The
Purchase Release concurrent program or workflow in Order Management creates
rows in the Requisition Import tables in Purchasing. Then Purchasings
Requisition Import process creates the requisitions. Drop shipments are marked
with the Source Type of External in Order Management and Supplier in


Purchasing.


Q3. What is the setup required for Drop ship PO?

A: ITEM ATTRIBUTES:
Navigate: Inventory -> Items - > Organization items
Purchased (PO) Enabled
Purchasable (PO) Enabled
Transactable (INV) Enabled
Stockable (INV) Optional
Reservable (INV) Optional
Inventory Item (INV) Optional
Customer Ordered (OM) Enabled
Customer Orders Enabled (OM) Enabled
Internal Ordered (OM) Disabled
Internal Orders Enabled (OM) Disabled
Shippable (OM) Optional
OE Transactable (OM) Enabled
All Drop Ship items must be defined in the organization entered in the profile
option OE: Item Validation Organization and in the Receiving Organization.
All drop ship sub-inventory must have Reservable box checked. If the sub-
inventory is not Reservable the sales order issue transaction will not be created in
MTL_TRANSACTIONS_INTERFACE. After drop ship inventory organization is
created, subinventories should be defined. To create the subinventory, go to an
inventory responsibility and navigate to Setup -> Organizations -> Subinventories.
Asset subinventories must have the reservable and Asset boxes checked. Expense
subinventories must have the Reservable box checked and the Asset box
unchecked.
Subinventory Attributes for Asset Subinventory
Reservable/Allow Reservations
Asset Subinventory
Subinventory Attributes for Expense Subinventory
Reservable
Asset-must NOT be enabled.




Q4. How can we avoid the miscounting of supply as logical organization is
involved?

A: You must receive drop-ship items in a logical organization. If you use Oracle
master Scheduling/MRP and Oracle Supply Chain Planning, to avoid miscounting
supply you may not want to include logical organizations in your planning. If you
choose to include logical organizations, ensure that doing so does not cause
planning and forecasting complications.


Q5. If you make changes to a sales order after the Purchase Order (PO) has been
generated, will the order changes automatically be updated on the PO?

A: Order changes will not be automatically updated on the PO. Pulling up the
Discrepancy report will allow you to view the differences between the Sales Order
and PO. However, you will have to manually update the POs in the Purchasing
application.


Q6. If items on a Drop Ship order are cancelled, does the system automatically
generate a PO Change to the PO originally sent to the supplier?

A: No, Drop Ship functionality in this regard remains the same as in R11. There is a
discrepancy report available that will report differences between the PO and the
Sales Order.


Q7. Does Order Management 11i have functionality to do serial number
management with Drop Shipments?

A: You are able to receive serial numbered Drop Ship stock. Order Management
will receive the serial number noted on the PO.


Q8. Can Configurable Items be drop shipped?



A: Currently only Standard Items can be drop shipped. Functionality for
Configurable Items will be added in future releases.


Q9. How do I drop ship across operating units?

A: Release 11i does not currently support this functionality.


Q10. How are over/under shipments handled in drop shipment?

A: If part of a drop-ship line ships, and you do not wish to fulfill the remaining
quantity, cancel the line. Over shipments must also be handled manually. If the
supplier ships more than the ordered quantity, you can bill your customer for the
additional quantity or request that they return the item. Use the Drop Ship Order
Discrepancy Report to view differences between your drop-ship sales orders and
their associated purchase requisitions and orders.


Q11. Will Blanket PO's work with Drop Shipment?

A: Blanket PO's will not work with Drop shipment because the PO must be
created when OM notifies PO that a drop ship order has been created. This PO is
linked to the drop ship order so that when the receipt is done (partial or
complete) .OM is updated to receiving interface eligible. Drop ship lines do not
use the pick release, ship confirm or inv interface order cycles.


Q12. Can we cancel drop shipment after it is received?

A: Drop shipments cannot be cancelled once Oracle Purchasing obtains the
receipt. A user who wants to cancel a drop ship sales order line must ensure no
receipts have been created against the line and that the requisition and/or
purchase order associated with the line is cancelled. Cancellation of a Partial Drop
Ship receipt is allowable. But only the portion that has not been received can be
cancelled. If you cancel a drop shipment line for which you have not shipped the


entire quantity, the order processing splits the line. The first line contains the
quantity shipped and the second line contains the non-shipped quantity in
backorder. You can cancel the second line the backorder on the sales order. The
PO line quantity should be changed to reflect the new quantity.


Q13. What debugging tools are available for Drop shipments?

A: 1. Note 133464.1 contains a diagnostic script that can be used for
troubleshooting problems with sales orders.
2. Debugging receipt transaction or the sales order issue transaction, Set the
following profile options:
RCV: Processing Mode to Immediate or Batch
RCV: Debug Mode to Yes
OM: Debug Level to 5
INV: Debug Trace to Yes
INV: Debug level to 10
TP: INV Transaction processing mode to Background
-Then go to Sys Admin: Concurrent: Program: Define; query up the Receiving
Transaction Processor and check the Enable Trace box.
-Save the receipt for the deliver transaction (destination type will say Inventory
for the deliver transaction).
-View the Receiving Transaction Processor log file, the Inventory Transaction
Worker log file, as well as, the trace for the errors.


Q14. What is the Import source and status of PO generated from Drop
Shipment?

A: Import source is Order Entry.
Status of PO will always be Approved.
FAQ Details
Q1. What is RMA?

A: RMA stands for Return Material Authorization. RMA functionality allows user
to authorize return of goods delivered against a sales order. Also authorize
returns for replacement, as well as returns with or without credit. Returns from a


customer occur for a variety of reasons including damage, shipment error, or
sampling.


Q2. How does it work?

A: For RMA overview, setup, RMA processing please refer to Order Management
user guide. To know about the process of receiving against an RMA maintained in
Oracle Order Management, please refer to Oracle Purchasing user guide in
receiving section.


Q3. Can we return or correct an RMA?

A: We can correct/return a RMA that is received. Once the RMA is delivered, it
cannot be corrected or returned.


Q4. How can we debug a RMA receipt error?

A: If Receiving Transaction Processor is online, the error message will be displayed
on screen. If we are using Immediate or batch mode, set the RCV: Debug mode to
yes and check the log file for the error message.

a) If the error message is a subroutine error/unknown error Relink RCVOLTM
executable, bounce the Receiving Transaction Manager and process again for
online mode.
Relink RVCTP for immediate/batch mode.
If still the error is occurring, check if the same error occurs with other modes of
receiving. If not compare the versions of the files in the executables. For this
pocheck.sql can be used. Development should be provided with the DB trace,
pocheck.sql output for any mode of receiving, while logging a bug to analyze
further.

b) If the error is FRM error, which is not a known error message, then please
regenerate the respective fmb and pll files and check if the issue is resolved. If not
provide the FRD and form level trace for the development to analyze further.



c) If the error is related to rvtoe_RmaPushApi, Order Management team should
analyze the cause of the problem as the API belongs to Order Management.

d) In Batch or Immediate mode, if the receiving transaction errored out, the order
line status should be checked to confirm whether OM processing completed
successfully and if the error is pertaining to the receiving module.

e) For any mode to check if the error is from COGS (OM) or inventory, need to set
the profile options ?OM: Debug level? to 5 and ?INV: Debug level? to 10. The
cogs11i.sql is the OM script to debug COGS. The inventory log file also shows the
errors that occurred in the inventory module.


Q5. Can RMA be received across operating units?

A: We can receive, inspect, correct, return and deliver RMA?s across Operating
units. The changes are made in Bugs 1786778 and 2023665.


FAQ Details
Q1. Is it possible to perform Returns for Internal Shipments (Inter-Org and
Internal Order)?

A: No, it is not possible to perform Returns on Internal Shipments. You need to
reverse the original process if you want to return an internally ordered item. You
have to create an internal requisition for the item in the source organization, and
then process that order back to the source organization.


Q2. Is it possible to perform Returns/Corrections for RMAs?

A: The Returns/Corrections for RMAs that are delivered to Inventory is not
supported if the customer have poxrcv.odf version higher than or equal to 115.52.




Q3. Can I return/correct a cancelled PO line to a vendor?

A: It is not possible to return/correct a cancelled PO line.


Q4. Can I change the line status of PO to Closed for Receiving and then
query the PO in Returns/Corrections Form to correct them?

A: The customer should NEVER change the status of the cancelled/finally-closed
line without developments consent via a bug.


Q5. I cannot do returns/adjustments for an un-ordered receipt. Why?

A: Adjustments and/or returns to vendor on unordered receipts can only be done
after the receipt has been matched to a Purchase Order. Verify this has been
done.


Q6. Can Returns/Corrections be performed when the deliver_to person is not
active?

A: Returns/Corrections are not allowed if the deliver to person is not active. You
have to re-activate the employee to perform returns/corrections.


Q7. I am not able to return an item under serial control. What should I do?

A: Check whether the Serial Number is available in the subinventory and
organization.

FAQ Details
Q1. Is it possible to show more than two decimal places in the "PRICE" column
that is currently being printed on the 'Printed Purchase Order Report -
(Landscape or Portrait)'?



A: Currently, it is not possible to print more than two decimals in the 'PRICE' field
without customizing the reports. There is currently an enhancement request
(628857) under review that will, if approved, bring this desired functionality to
future releases. This answer holds true to Releases 10.7, 11.0, and 11.5 (11i).


Q2. When I print out a purchase order from the Document Approval window,
does it only print in Portrait style?

A: Currently this is the only way it will print from the Document Approval window.
An enhancement request (466551) has been filed to allow the choice of either
Portrait or Landscape as the format when printing purchase orders from the
Document Approval window.


Q3. Why does the blanket purchase agreement print every time a release is
printed?

A: This is the current functionality of the application. The blanket purchase
agreement will be printed every time you choose to print an associated release.
An enhancement request (432017) has been filed to allow only the release to be
printed.


Q4. What is the name of the file that controls printing of reports related to
Oracle Purchasing, and where is it located on the system?

A: The name of the file is porep.odf. This file creates the Oracle Purchasing views
which generate the data that is printed by the reports. The file can be found in
the following locations:

$PO_TOP/admin/odf This is where the base release version of the file is seeded
by the install.
$PO_TOP/patch/110/odf This is where the most current version of the file resides
on your system for Release 11.
$PO_TOP/patchsc/107/odf This is where the most current version of the file
resides on your system for Release 10.7.


For Windows NT, it is best to use the FIND FILE utility to locate the various
versions of the file.


Q5. How can a report file name and version be located?

A: There are two methods that can be used to find the report short (file) name:

1. Please see Note 106968.1, titled "Purchasing: PO Report Short Names". This
note contains an alphabetical listing of all Oracle Purchasing reports and lists the
short name for each one.

2. Each report is a concurrent process that can be found in System Administration.
- Responsibility: System Administrator
- Navigation: Concurrent > Program > Define
- Select the Program Name
Under the Program Name field, you will see a field called Short Name. This is the
name of the report file. This name should be the same as the name of the file in
the Executable field.

To find the version of the file:

For Unix
********
For Release 10.7, go to $PO_TOP/srw
For Release 11, go to $PO_TOP/reports

Type the following command at a Unix prompt:
strings -a <FILENAME.rdf>|grep Header:

For Windows NT
**************
Use the FIND FILE utility to locate the file. Use MS-DOS to navigate to the
file and type the following command at the prompt:
find /i "Header:" <FILENAME.rdf>




Q6. Why do asterisks (******) appear on report output in place of the
quantity?

A: Oracle Reports will allow a maximum of 13 characters to be printed in the
Quantity column. These characters include a -/+ sign at the beginning and then a
combination of 12 more characters, including commas, periods, and digits.
Therefore, if the quantity on a report contains more than 13 characters, you will
see the asterisks show in place of the quantity.

Examples:
9,999,999.00 actually contains 13 characters and will be displayed. Remember,
the + sign is holding the first character position in the database.
-1.2245833524335 would print asterisks, as more than 13 characters are involved.

You do have the ability to change the way your reports print out the numbers in
the Quantity region; this may make the difference in allowing you to see the
actual quantity. You cannot change the number of characters in the field, but you
can change the way they display. This will give you more options. To do this:
Responsibility: System Administrator
Navigation: Profiles/System
Query the profile 'INV: Dynamic Precision Option for Quantity on Reports'
Click on the List of Values and you will see the different options available for you
to use on your reports. You will notice that all options still only represent 13
characters; it just changes the way they are represented.

See Note 1072855.6 for further clarification.


Q7. When a report has been submitted to print, the output can be viewed by
using the View Output button, but no hard copies of the report print out. What
causes this to occur??

A: The number of copies Oracle Reports will print is controlled in System
Administration.
Responsibility: System Administrator
Navigation: Profiles/System


Query the profile 'Concurrent: Report Copies'
If this profile is not populated, Oracle will not print any copies of any report.
FAQ Details
Q1. How do the 'Accrued Receipts' and 'Include Online Accruals' parameters
determine the output of this report?

A: The values of these parameters control which purchase orders are eligible to
be printed on the report. Each of these parameters can be set to 'Yes' or 'No',
thus giving four (4) combinations total; here are the four combinations possible
and what the expected output can be:

A. Accrued Receipts = Yes
Include Online Accruals = No

Using these settings, the report output will include purchase orders that have a
value in either the Item and Category fields or just the Category field. In this
scenario, the PO_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table will have the following values:
ACCRUED_FLAG = Y
ACCRUE_ON_RECEIPT_FLAG = N

B. Accrued Receipts = Yes
Include Online Accruals = Yes

Using these settings, the report output will include purchase orders that have a
value in both the Item and Category fields. In this scenario, the
PO_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table will have the following values:
ACCRUED_FLAG = Y
ACCRUE_ON_RECEIPT_FLAG = Y

C. Accrued Receipts = No
Include Online Accruals = Yes

Using these settings, the report output will include purchase orders that have a
value in either the Item and Category fields or just the Category field. In this
scenario, the PO_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table will have the following values:
ACCRUED_FLAG = N
ACCRUE_ON_RECEIPT_FLAG = Y



D. Accrued Receipts = No
Include Online Accruals = No

Using these settings, the report output will include purchase orders that have a
value in just the Category field. In this scenario, the
PO_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table will have the following values:
ACCRUED_FLAG = N
ACCRUE_ON_RECEIPT_FLAG = N


Q2. Does the Uninvoiced Receipts Report take the Currency Rate from the
purchase order header or its individual distribution lines?
?

A: The Uninvoiced Receipts Report was initially designed to take the Currency
Rate from the header of the purchase order. Bug 1396659 was logged, for
Releases 10.7 and 11.0, initially as an enhancement request to change the report
to look at the individual distribution lines; this enhancement will be enabled in
Purchasing patch set P for Release 10.7, and in Purchasing mini-pack G for Release
11.0.

For Release 11i, this issue is currently being reviewed and the change may not be
made since Release 11i allows the users to override the currency rate at the time
a receipt is entered.


Q3. Will a cancelled purchase order line appear on the Uninvoiced Receipts
Report?

A: Yes, a cancelled line will continue to show on the Uninvoiced Receipts Report.


Q4. Will a closed purchase order line appear on the Uninvoiced Receipts
Report?

A: No, closed purchase order lines do not show on the Uninvoiced Receipts


Report.


Q5. POXPORRA - Uninvoiced Receipts Report Returns No Data Or Wrong Data?

A: Ensure that the correct values used for the parameters Accrued Receipts and
Include Online Accruals when running the report. These parameters are listed as
optional but they are essential in determing which transactions are included in
the report output.

1. For receipts (for expense items) that Accrue At Period-End and have not been
accrued:
Accrued Receipts=No
Include Online Accruals=No

2. For receipts (for expense items) that Accrue At Period-End and have been
accrued or have not been accrued:
Accrued Receipts=Yes
Include Online Accruals=No

3. To include receipts for expense or inventory items that Accrue On Receipt and
have been accrued or have not been accrued:
Accrued Receipts=Yes
Include Online Accruals=Yes

4. To include receipts for expense or inventory items that Accrue On Receipt and
have not been accrued:
Accrued Receipts=No
Include Online Accruals=Yes.


Q6. Uninvoiced Receipts Report Does Not Reconcile With Accrual Journals in
General Ledger?

A: Apply patch 2274733. Patch 2274733 contains updated versions of the
Uninvoiced Receipts Report
(POXPORRA.rdf 115.23) and the code used by the Receipt Accruals - Period-End


process.


Q7. Uninvoiced Receipt Missing From the Uninvoiced Receipts Report?

A: To correct this problem, take the following steps:
1. Under Purchasing responsibility > Purchase Order > Purchase Order Summary.
2. Query the PO of interest.
3. From the menu, navigate to Special > Control.
4. Select Open or Open for Invoicing.
5. Save.


Q8. The Uninvoiced Receipts Report does not Balance to the General Ledger?

A: Update the below files to the versions shown or higher. Apply Patch 1705773
or later.
rvacj.lpc 115.23
rvcac.opc 115.8.


Q9. The Uninvoiced Receipts Report does not Calculate tax properly.

A: Apply patch 1977474. This will upgrade the version of POXPORRA.rdf to
115.15.
The patch modifies the formula column C_Dist_Amount_Accrual so as to pro-rate
the tax amount based on dist_quantity ( dist qty ordered - dist qty cancelled) and
dist_quantity_accrued.
FAQ Details
Q1. What does invoice price variance report show?

A: Invoice price variance report shows the variance between the invoice price and
the purchase price.
The layout is in the following format:
Vendor
Po Details


Invoice details and Variances
Charge and variance account.


Q2. Does the UOM in which the price and quantity is reported depends on the
way the invoice is matched?

A: Yes, the UOM in which the price and quantity is reported depends on the way
the invoice is matched.
1. If the invoice is matched to a PO then the UOM in which price and quantity is
matched is as per the UOM of the PO or Invoice. Both are same in this case.
2. If the UOM is matched to a Receipt then the following fields are calculated as
per the UOM of the receipt.
(The UOM of the receipt may or may not be the same as that of the PO).
The PO Functional Price and the Invoice price variance.
The Unit is still as per the PO UOM. This is because the Unit in the report is shown
at the PO level.


Q3. Where do you set the Invoice match option?

A: 1. Purchase orders shipment window or
2. Supplier site.
The match option defined at the Purchase order shipment window has a
preference over that of Supplier site.


Q4. Which PO rate is considered for calculating the variance?

A: The rate at the distribution level is given preference. If this is null then only the
rate from PO headers is taken to calculate the variance.


Q5. What are the main tables used in this report?

A: 1. ap_invoice_distributions


2. ap_invoices
3. po_headers
4. po_distributions
FAQ Details
Q1. What does Receipt Traveler report show and how is it organized?

A: The Receipt Traveler facilitates receiving inspection and delivery of goods you
receive within your organization.
After you receive the goods, you can print receipt travelers and attach these
tickets to the goods. You can enter selection criteria to specify the receipt
travelers you want to print. One receipt traveler prints per distribution, and each
traveler has space for you to record delivery comments.
It prints in the following format:
Item
Source (Supplier/Inventory/Internal requisition/RMA)
Receipt
Delivery Instructions
Lot and Serial Number
Wip Shortage


Q2. Which PO level does the report print?

A: The report prints at the distribution level only if delivery has been made, else it
prints the receipt transaction.


Q3. How many pages does the report print for single/multiple shipments and
single/multiple distributions?

A:


<ALIGN=LEFTPages
<ALIGN=LEFT<ALIGN=LEFTFor One
shipment line and No distribution
1
<ALIGN=LEFT<ALIGN=LEFTFor One 1


shipment line and One distribution
<ALIGN=LEFT<ALIGN=LEFTFor One
shipment line and Two distributions
2
<ALIGN=LEFT<ALIGN=LEFTFor Two
shipment lines with Two
distributions each
4



Q4. Which are the most used views and tables in this report?

A: Views
1. RCV_RECEIPTS_PRINT
2. RCV_DISTRIBUTIONS_PRINT
Table
1. RCV_TRANSACTIONS


Q5. Which transactions get printed on Receipt Traveler?

A: A receipt Traveler Report gets automatically printed under the following
conditions:
- A standard receipt is performed.
- A direct delivery is performed.
- Matching of an unordered receipt.


Q6. What are the profile options used for this report?

A: Following are the two profile options used for this report:
RCV: Print Receipt Traveler (Yes/No)
Concurrent: Report Copies (Number of copies you want to print).


Q7. What could be the problem for report printing a blank page?



A: If the receipt is saved after the header information is added, the receipt
traveler kicks off.
Because the line information has not been completed. The report only prints the
header information and a blank page. If the header information and the line
information is complete the receipt traveler will print with all correct information.


Q8. Can Receipt Traveler be printed if the RMA is received in a different
Operating Unit than where it was created?

A: Yes.
FAQ Details
Q1. What are the different authorization_status can a requisition have?

A: Approved, Cancelled, In Process, Incomplete, Pre-Approved, Rejected, or
Returned.


Q2. Can an approved requisition be viewed in the Requisition form?

A: No, an approved requisition cannot be viewed in the Requisition form.
Approved or In Process requisitions can only be viewed in the Requisition
Summary form. Only Requisitions, which have Incomplete, Returned, and
Rejected status, can be viewed from Enter Requisition form.

Q3. Can an approved requisition be revised?

A: No, an approved requisition cannot be revised.


Q4. Why is there no list of values for items in the requisition form after they
have been defined in the item master?

A: The list of values should be available. Please review Supplier-Purchasing
information for the Financial Options to ensure the correct organization has been
selected for the Inventory Org. Setup-> Organizations->Financial Options-


>Supplier-Purchasing


Q5. Is the Supplier item field a validated field?

A: No, the supplier item field is not a validated field. It is for reference only.


Q6. How can you have specific Requestor defaulted on Requisition form?

A: In order to have a specific requestor default onto the requisitions form, the
user will have to set the following in the user will have to set the following in the
user's requisition preferences. Navigation: /Purchasing -> Requisitions ->
Requisitions Go to special ->preferences Click in the requestor field Choose a
requestor from the list of values Click the 'apply' button, a message ' new
preferences now in effect.' Close the requisitions form Re-open the requisitions
form Click in the lines region, the requestor from requisition preferences should
appear in the requestor field. The requisition preferences are only valid while
working on it , user needs to re enter requisition preferences each time he starts
the applications.


Q7. Can I change the item number in requisition lines after saving the record?

A: User is not allowed to change the item number of a saved record in Oracle
Purchasing Requisition Form. If user finds that the item entered by him in a saved
record is wrong then he has to delete that record and enter a new record for the
required item. User is allowed to change the Type, Description, UOM, Quantity,
Price, Need by date in a saved record in the Enter Requisition form. Also he can
change the item category if item number of the saved record in the Enter
Requisition Form is NULL.


Q8. What all control actions I can perform on a requisition through Document
control window?



A: Cancel and Finally close.


Q9. What is the authorization_status of a requisition after Finally closing it?

A: When we finally close the requisition from Requisition Summary form the
authorization_status of the requisition does not change. Instead it's closed_code
becomes 'FINALLY CLOSED'.


Q10. Can I cancel or finally close any requisition from Document Control
Window?

A: No. Purchasing lets you cancel or final close a requisition or requisition line
before your manager approves it or before a buyer places it on a purchase order.
No control actions can be performed on an Incomplete requisition. You cannot
Finally close a 'Pre-Approved' Requisition.


Q11. What happens if the requisition cancelled of finally closed through
Document Control Window and encumbrance is on?

A: If you are using encumbrance or budgetary control, Purchasing automatically
creates negative debit encumbrance entries for the cancelled requisitions. When
you final close a purchase order, Purchasing creates credit entries which reverse
the encumbrances.


Q12. How can I confirm that my requisition has sufficient funds?

A: Go to (M) Special->Check for funds.


Q13. How can I find out, which all requisition lines have went into purchase
order?



A: In Requisition Summary form (M) Special-> View Purchase Order. In the
'Special' Menu itself you can see the option' View Sales Order'.


Q14. What does the status Pre-Approved mean, and how does a document
reach this status?

A: The status of Pre-Approved is the outcome of a person forwarding a document
for approval even though the forwarding person has the necessary authority to
approve it. The document may have been forwarded by mistake or for business
reasons. It is not possible to perform a receipt against a document with a status of
Pre-Approved.


Q15. When you try to 'Save' a requisition, the following message appears:
PO_ALL_POSTING_NA.

A: This happens when you do not have a valid code combination for the accounts
defaulting on the distribution account. Ensure that the account has a valid code
combination.


Q16. While forwarding requisition for approval, error APP-14056: User exit po
find_forward returned error.

A: There is no Forward Method specified in the setup. The FIND_FORWARD
function cannot find any rules to determine the forward to person. Navigate to
the Document Types Form (POXSTDDT) in Purchasing Responsibility. Setup ->
Purchasing -> Document Types. Select the document type of Requisition (Internal
or Purchase) and make sure that the field 'Forward Method' is not blank. If it is
blank, set it to either Hierarchy or Direct, then save.


Q17. Unable to enter Project information on the Distribution line of a
Requisition.



A: You cannot enter project information for inventory destinations (unless you
have Project Mfg installed). Setting Destination Type = Expense will resolve the
problem. You will then be able to enter information in the remaining Project
related fields.


Q18. When a requisition is autocreated to a purchase order, supplier
information is not populated in the purchase order header.

A: This happens when a requisition number is entered in the Find Requisition
Lines window and document is autocreated. But if you enter the requisition
number and supplier details in the Find Requisition Lines window and autocreated
the document to purchase order. The purchase order now contains supplier
details in the purchase order header. Supplier information at the requisition level
is actually a suggested Supplier, and the buyer has an option to decide which
supplier to pick on the PO header. Also, if you try to Autocreate multiple
requisitions with different Suppliers Autocreate would not know which supplier to
use. Hence the vendor information cannot be defaulted. This is the standard
functionality of Oracle Applications. Workarounds: 1 - Enter the suggested
supplier on the 'Find Requisition Lines' Search Criteria window and this is
populated on PO header when autocreated. 2 - Enter the supplier information in
the 'Select Purchase Order' zone.


Q19. The system does not allow you to change the Price and / or quantity of an
approved Requisition line before AutoCreating a Purchase Order.

A: When you are using Encumbrance Accounting, by enabling the Budgetary
Control flag for a set of books, the system automatically creates encumbrances
from Requisitions, Purchase Orders and other transactions originating from
modules such as Purchasing & Payables.
In this case, the funds are checked at the Requisition Level. You cannot change
the Price and Quantity once the requisition has been approved. This is the
Standard functionality of Oracle Applications.
After Autocreating a Purchase Order, you can change the quantity and price.




Q20. Cannot find a Document in the Notifications form which has been
forwarded by an intermediate Approver.

A: Several things with Oracle Workflow can cause documents to be stuck 'in
process', however, this particular issue deals with duplicate data in your HR
system.
Using your SysAdmin responsibility, navigate to Security-->User-->Define and
perform a query on the Person field using the employee name of the approver
you are trying to forward the document to.
This should return a record for only 1 user. If the employee is assigned to more
than 1 user name, Workflow will not know who to deliver the notification to and
the document will hang with a status of 'in process'.


Q21. Cannot find cancel requisition option in requisition summary form.

A: Please check for the sql script poxdocon.sql. This can be found under the
following directory: $PO_TOP/admin/import/poxdocon.sql & You then have to
run the script by logging on to SQL*PLUS as APPS/(PASSWORD). The control
options will be created once you run the above script and you can then view all
the Control Options under 'Special' in the Requisition Summary form after you log
on to Applications once again.


Q22. You are allowed to update 'Destination Type' from 'Inventory' to 'Expense'
in the requisition form.

A: If you setup destination type as "Inventory" in the item setup and in the
Requisitions form if you change the destination type to "Expense", then this will
override the destination type setup in item setup. The Destination type will carry
over from the Requisition into the Purchase Order when autocreating.


Q23. Clicking on the LOV to select an employee to forward the document gives
error:FRM-41830: List Of Values contains no entries.

A: You need to run the following sql:


SQL>select can_preparer_approve_flag, default_approval_path_id
from po_document_types_all
where document_type_code = 'REQUISITION';
If the results return a NULL value for can_preparer_approve_flag then you need
to perform the following: Navigation: Purchasing -> Setup -> Purchasing
Document Types. In the document window type window use Requisition in the
type field. Enable "Owner Can Approve" check box save it disable it save it and
enable it. This is to set the flag accordingly. Now save the record. Now when you
enter a requisition and forward the requisition for approval you can have LOV in
the forward field.


Q24. The requisition can be saved without the need-by date field being
populated.

A: Line items that are put on requisitions must be planned. It is necessary that the
items are planned in order for the need-by date to be enforced.
Step-by-step solution:
GUI - Query the item in the Item Master
- Choose the General Planning sub-region
- Make the item planned
Char - Navigate - Items - Update
- Query item
- In Item Details region choose select
- Make the item planned


Q25. In the Enter Purchase Order form and in the Enter Requisitions form, the
List of Values in the Items field is not retrieving some of the items.

A: In the Enter Purchase Order form and the Enter Requisitions forms, the List of
Values (LOV) in the Items field is not based on what organization your purchasing
responsibility is pointing to. Instead, it is based on the Inventory Organization
entered in the Financial Options form under Supplier - Purchasing. In the Enter
Purchase Order form and the Enter Requisitions forms, the List of Values (LOV) in
the Items field is not based on what organization your purchasing responsibility is
pointing to. Instead, it is based on the Inventory Organization entered in the


Financial Options form under Supplier - Purchasing. Changing the Inventory
Organization defined in the Financial Options to the Item Master organizations
will permit you to select those items.


Q26. The items with destination type as Inventory have the destination type as
Expense defaulting in the Enter Requisitions form.

A: The defaults do not come in for a requisition, if the inv_organization_id column
is blank in HR_LOCATIONS table and does not get populated. The
inv_organization_id is linked to location and this in turn is linked to employee and
which explains why when you enter the item in requisition form the organization
and Ship-To Location field were not get populated and therefore the destination
type was not coming as inventory. You have to populate inv_organization_id in
HR_locations table which will resolve the problem.
FAQ Details
Q1. Which Requisitions are processed via Create Internal Sales Order?

A: Only Requisitions Lines which are Internally Sourced and Approved are picked
by the Create Internal Sales Order process. Each Requisition Line is processed and
picked up by the Create Internal Sales order process if the Source Type is
Inventory.


Q2. Why am I unable to select Inventory as my source type when I create a
Requisition?

A: The Item attribute has to be Internal Orderable for Item to be internally
sourced.


Q3. When I try to enter a Requisition line, which is internally sourced, I am
unable to see my source Organization in the LOV?

A: You need to define the Shipping Network between the Source Organization
and the destination Organization. You can do this in


Inventory>Setup>Organizations>Shipping Network and do the setup for the
Shipping Network between the two organizations. Also make sure you set the
Internal Order Required flag.


Q4. Is the create Internal Sales Order process Operating Unit dependent?

A: Yes. In Release 11i we have the enhance functionality of creating the Sales
Order in the Source Organizations Operating Unit. All the Requisition line
validations and Setup Validations are done in the source Organizations
Operating Unit. If the Create Internal Sales Order fails you need to check if the
Setup is done properly in the Source Organizations Operating Unit.


Q5. Why is it that after creating and approving an Internal Requisition and
running the Create Internal Sales Order process my Requisition line is not
transferred to OE?

A: This could be because of various setup Issues. From the PO side make sure you
have done the Customer location associations for the location you select in the
destination and Source Orgs Operating Unit. Also check if you have entered the
Order Type and Order Source in the Purchasing>Setup>Organizations>Purchasing
Options>Internal Requisition tab. From the OE side also make sure you have
done the Setup related with Create Internal Sales Order. The Order type you
entered in the PO system Parameters must have the Order type details defined in
OE.


Q6. Why is it that after Running Create Internal Sales Order process and
Order Import the records are still there in the Interface tables?

A: This is because the Sales Order will be created in the source Organizations
Operating Unit. In Release 11 we created the Sales Order in the destination Org.
But in the R11i we have the enhanced functionality of creating the Sales Order in
the Source Organizations Operating Unit. Therefore you have to run Order
Import in the Source Organization.




Q7. What are the ways to debug the Create Internal Sales Order?

A: You have the Concurrent Log created for each Create Internal Sales Order
process run. The log will have information related to the Source and destination
Organizations Operating Unit and whether the setups are done properly in the
operating Units. It will also have information of whether the record was picked for
processing but failed validations later. You need to get the Database level trace to
check the code flow for the Create Internal Sales Order


Q8. Why is the transferred_to_oe_flag at the headers updated to Y even if
some of the records failed during the Create Internal Sales Order process?

A: This is a known issue. Check Enhancement Bug# 2204076.
FAQ Details
Q1. What is the Basic Purchasing Setup for Requisition Import?

A: If importing requisitions from Inventory, input a value for the profile option
INV: Minmax Reorder Approval. If the value of INCOMPLETE is selected, the result
will be imported Requisitions that require an approval. If the value is APPROVED,
then the requisitions cannot be queried in the Requisition entry form; rather, the
Requisition Summary form will have to be utilized to view information on the
imported approved requisitions.
If importing requisitions from MRP, input a value for the profile option MRP:
Purchasing By Revision. This profile option is important if you are using multiple
revisions per item and using sourcing rules to create Purchase Orders or Releases.
This profile option indicates whether or not to pass on the item revision to the
purchase requisition.
Setup/Organizations/Purchasing - Default Alternate Region Requisition Import
Group-By Field. The Requisition Import process will first look at the Group By
parameter selected when the process is submitted; should this parameter be left
blank, the system will then look to the Group-By field residing in the Purchasing
Options form. If you expect releases to be created from the requisitions, which
you import, make sure the profile option PO: Release During Req Import is


populated with the correct value. The choices for this profile are Yes or No. If the
profile is set to Yes and all sourcing rule information is properly set up, then
blanket releases will be created via the Create Releases process. If the profile is
set to No, the Create Releases process will not run at the completion of
Requisition Import and all releases will have to be created manually via Auto
Create.


Q2. How does Requisition Import determine the grouping method for incoming
pieces of data?

A: This function groups requisitions. It first assigns values to
REQUISITION_LINE_ID and REQ_DISTRIBUTION_ID; the function then groups
Requisitions based on the REQ_NUMBER_SEGMENT1 column. All requisitions
with the same NOT NULL REQ_NUMBER_SEGMENT1 are assigned the same
REQUISITION_HEADER_ID. The function then groups Requisitions based on the
GROUP_CODE column. All requisitions with the same value in the GROUP_CODE
column are assigned the same REQUISITION_HEADER_ID. It then groups based on
the GROUP_BY parameter, which takes on the value of DEFAULT_GROUP_BY if
not provided. GROUP_BY could be one of the following: BUYER, CATEGORY, ITEM,
VENDOR, LOCATION or ALL.


Q3. How is the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table purged and does this data have
any dependencies?

A: Oracle Purchasing provides the Requisition Import Exceptions Report, which
can be used to diagnose records in Error in the
PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table. It also has an option to purge the Error
records in PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL and the corresponding Error
message in the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table: - Responsibility: Purchasing Super
User
- Navigation: Reports/Run, then select Requisition Import Exceptions Report
There is a parameter titled 'Delete Exceptions'. If you select 'Yes', then records in
the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table with a status of ERROR' and the
corresponding records in the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table will be deleted. You
can also restrict the deleted records by selecting the Batch_id and the Interface


Source code. The dependency is between PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL
(transaction_id) and PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS (interface_transaction_id)


Q4. How is the list of values derived for the Import Source column within the
Requisition Import report parameters window?

A: The list of values for the Import Source parameter drives off of the records,
which currently reside in the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table. Within
this table is the column, INTERFACE_SOURCE_CODE, which contains the source
from where the data was created and in turn is the same value that shows in the
list of values. Example: Say that there are currently 20 rows In
PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL.Ten of the rows have an
INTERFACE_SOURCE_CODE of 'INV', and the other ten rows have an
INTERFACE_SOURCE_CODE value of 'WIP'. When the user then goes to view the
list of values, it will show 'INV' and 'WIP' in the list, as those are the only sources
currently loaded and unprocessed in the interface table.


Q5. What methods are available in the application to resolve errored records in
the PO_INTERFACE_ERRORS table?

A: Oracle Purchasing provides the Requisition Import Exceptions Report, which
can be used to diagnose problems with the records, which have currently errored
out in the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table.
- Responsibility: Purchasing Super User
- Navigation: Reports/Run, then select Requisition Import Exceptions Report
There is a parameter titled 'Delete Exceptions. If this is populated with 'Yes',
then all records in the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table with a status of
ERRORwill be deleted when the report is executed. If the parameter is set to
No', then you will see the errors from the report and be able to manually fix the
data in the table, if so desired; then, upon completion of the data correction, run
Requisition Import again to process the modified rows in the interface table.




Q6. Can Requisition Import handle multiple currencies?

A: Requisition Import is capable of handling multiple currencies, provided that all
rate types and currency conversions have been defined.


Q7. Can Requisition Import handle multiple distributions?

A: Requisition Import can handle multiple distributions.


Q8. Is it possible to have all requisitions created from MRP to be imported with
a status of INCOMPLETE?

A: It is not possible to have Requisitions created from MRP imported into the
Oracle Purchasing application with a status of INCOMPLETE. The MRP Application
inserts all data into the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table with an
AUTHORIZATION_STATUS of APPROVED. Therefore, when the Requisition Import
program runs, all requisition lines from MRP are created with a Status of
APPROVED. If requisitions are created from MRP and the
AUTHORIZATION_STATUS is not APPROVED, then please contact support for
assistance.


Q9. Is it possible to have all requisitions created from Inventory - Min-Max
Planning to be imported with a status of INCOMPLETE?

A: Yes, it is possible to have all requisitions created from Min-Max Planning with a
status of INCOMPLETE. If the desired outcome is Min-Max requisitions showing a
status of INCOMPLETE, it is necessary to set the profile option: INV: MinMax
Reorder Approval to Incomplete. Conversely, if this profile option is set to
Approved, all requisitions imported from Min-Max Planning will be imported with
an approval status based on the approval authority of the user initiating the
Requisition Import process.




Q10. How can I achieve creating 10 requisitions for 10 lines populated into the
interface table, instead of 1 req. with 10 lines?

A: Requisitions are grouped according to the selection chosen by the initiator of
the process, based on the parameter of 'GROUP BY. If this parameter is left
blank, the value will default from the Default alternate region of the Purchasing
Options form.
- Responsibility: Purchasing Super User
- Navigation: Setup -> Organizations -> Purchasing Options
Default alternate region
If the value selected is ALL, then all requisition lines will be on the same
requisition. Any other value will group the lines on requisitions based on the value
selected.


Q11. Is Requisition Import organization-specific?

A: Requisition Import is operating unit-specific. Within the
PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL table lies the column ORG_ID.Upon Initiating
the Requisition Import program, the profile 'MO: Operating Unit' is queried to
derive the value of ORG_ID tied to the login running the program. Then the
Requisition Import program executes, all records in the interface table which are
the same as the organization listed in the 'MO: Operating Unit' profile will be
processed. If you don't see any valid Import source when you launch Reqimport
but if you had already populated the Interface table then you have to check the
org_id Column you populated. this org_id will be your operating unit tied to your
Applications log-in responsibility. If the org_id is NULL then you can see you
record in the Import Source.


Q12. When using encumbrance, is there any validation on the GL Date, ensuring
the appropriate periods are open?

A: The Requisition Import program will perform date integrity checks against the
date value in the PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL.GL_DATE field. This field
GL_DATE, is reserved for systems operating under Encumbrance Accounting
constraints. It is necessary to ensure that the encumbrance year is opened for the


GL_DATE being specified.


Q13. How can I achieve grouping by Vendors?

A: First check to see if any records in PO_REQUISITIONS_INTERFACE_ALL have a
value for the GROUP_CODE or REQ_NUMBER_SEGMENT1 columns. If there is no
value in either of these two columns, then the Requisition Import Program uses
the Default Group By that you setup to group requisition lines. Also Navigate to
Purchasing -> Setup -> Purchasing Options and Check the group by setting.


Q14. Why some times Requisition Import Process fails to create Requisitions
when the Data is imported from MRP?

A: Ensure that you use revision number for the item. This is mandatory when you
use the profile option Purchasing by Revision. The value will indicate whether
to pass on item revision to the purchase requisition. You can update this profile at
the site level. If this profile is set to Yes, then the item used for requisition import
process should have a revision number. Now when you repeat the process the
Requisition Import works and the requisitions will be created Successfully from
MRP.


Q15. How does Requisition Import Process generate Accounts?

A: It can be either one of 2 methods for accounts to be generated:
1. By a valid CCID or
2. By a valid combination of account segments.
We do not generate the accounts using the Account generator process. We only
validate the charge_account_id or by a valid combination of Account segments
which are populated in the interface table. This is the existing functionality.


Q16. How can automatically approve the Requisitions I am creating?



A: There are two ways of doing this:
1. You can populate records in the Interface table with status as APPROVED. In
this case the Approval process is not called after creating the Req. with
APPROVED status.
2. If you still want the Requisitions created to go through the approval process
then you have to set Requisition Import Parameter 'Initiate Approval after
Reqimport' to 'Yes' when Launching the Requisition Import Concurrent Program.


Q17. How will I get the trace and detailed log for the Requisition Import
Process?

A: You have to set the profile 'PO: Set Debug Concurrent On' to 'Yes to get the
detailed log and Database level for the Requisition Import Process.


Q18. When I load the Requisition Interface and create Requisitions it always
does Sourcing. How can I stop sourcing from happening?

A: You have to set the autosource_flag in the Requisition interface to 'N' to avoid
vendor Sourcing


Q19. How can I avoid sourcing from overriding my vendor information?

A: You have to set the autosource_flag to 'P' for partial sourcing.


Q20. How does Requisition Import process use the Group-By parameter while
launching Requisition Import?

A: The Requisition Import process will first look at the Group By parameter
selected when the process is submitted; should this parameter be left blank, the
system will then look to the Group-By field residing in the Purchasing Options
form. To setup in Purchasing option Form the Navigation is
Setup/Organizations/Purchasing Options - Default Alternate Region Requisition


Import Group-By Field.


Q21. What does the 'MRP: Purchasing by Revision' and 'INV: Purchasing by
Revision' do?

A: The profile 'MRP: Purchasing by Revision' is maintained by MRP and the'INV:
Purchasing by Revision' profile is maintained by Inventory. This profile option is
mainly used by the respective products to determine if the Item Revision needs to
be populated while loading the Requisition Interface Tables. Most of the bugs
related to these profiles are that sourcing gets affected during Req Import. If the
Blanket PO has the Item Revision and the Item in the Interface table does not
have the Item Revision field populated, then Sourcing could be a Issue and
Releases will not be created.
FAQ Details
Q1. The information setup in the Purchasing Options form is not defaulting on
to my purchase order.

A: Verify the PO Options have been setup for each Organization. The Options are
specific to each Organization..


Q2. Why is my Purchase Order closing before a receipt is processed?

A: Check the Receipt Closed Tolerance and the Matching setup.
If Matching is set to equal 2-way, the PO will close once the Purchase Order is
approved.
If the line of the Purchase Order is received with in the tolerance the line will
close..


Q3. When creating a Requisition or Purchase Order I am unable to see my items.

A: Check the Inventory Organization defined in the Financial Options:
Setup > Organization > Financial Options - Supplier > Purchasing region
The Inventory Org specified here should be the Master Inventory Org, otherwise


only the items setup in the Org populated in this region will be viewable from the
Requisition/Purchase Order forms.


Q4. When querying Requisitions the order in which they are returned is not in
sequential order.

A: When using alphanumeric number type values can appear randomly. Consider
entering all numeric values with the same number of digits. For example: If you
can assume all numeric values contain six digits, you should enter the first value
as 000001.


Q5. The Line Type value does not default or update the category if the Line type
is changed from the initial defaulted value.

A: Changing the Line Type does not change any of the existing defaults. cause:
<Bug:772492> This is the intended functionality for both the Purchase Order and
Requisition forms. Whenever the line type is changed, all of the information
which was entered was lost and needed to be entered again. The line information
will change only if it is changed to a different family. If re-defaulting is needed,
please clear the line and enter it again.


Q6. Cannot enter the Receiving Options form. Receive the error: 'No
organizations Currently Defined'.

A: From Inventory Responsibility Setup/Org/Organizations Access, the Purchasing
Responsibility need to be defined.


Q7. Receiving the following error when you save a new Requisition APP-14142
get_po_parameters-10: ora-01403: no data found Cause: A SQL error has
occurred in get_po_parameter @lsql_err.

A: You need to do the following:


1. Define the Purchasing Options and Financial Options for your Organization.
2. Ensure that the Master Organization, as well as the Child Organizations, have
Receiving Options defined.


Q8. Create a Purchase Order. Input the Header and Line information and find
that the Shipments button at the bottom of the form is grayed out.

A: Set-up the Receiving Options and to enable the Shipment Button in the
Purchase Order form.
Navigation: Setup > Organizations > Receiving Options.
Once set-up these options for your Organization you will have the Shipments
button enabled.
Ensure that the Purchasing Options and Financial Options are defined for your
Organization.


Q9. Accessing the Purchase Order entry screen and getting the error: APP-14142
GET_WINDOW_ORG_SOB 040 ORA-1403 No Data Found.

A: 1. Attach the correct responsibility to the Operating Unit
2. Define Purchasing Options
3. Define Financial Options


Q10. Invoice Matching setting in POXPOEPO does not default to the setting in
Purchasing Options form.

A: Invoice matching can be set in five different areas of Oracle Purchasing:
In the list below, a setting at any level will override the settings above it.

1. Oracle Purchasing Options
a. Navigate to: Setup > Organizations > Purchasing Options
b. Select Default Alternative Region

2. Supplier Information
a. Navigate to: Supply Base > Suppliers


b. Query on specific supplier
c. Click on Open
d. Select Receiving Alternative Region

3. Line Types
a. Navigate to: Setup > Purchasing > Line Types
b. In the Receipt Required field: Yes = 3-way, No = 2-way

4. Items
a. Navigate to: Items > Master Items
b. Query on specific item
c. Select Purchasing Alternative Region
d. In the Invoice Matching section: Yes = 3-way, No = 2-way

5. Purchase Order Shipments
a. Navigate to: Purchase Orders > Purchase Orders
b. Enter (header and) line information
c. Click on Shipments button
d. Select More Alternative Region
FAQ Details
Q1. What is Pay On Receipt?

A: Pay on Receipt (also known as ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement) or Self-
Billing) is an Oracle Purchasing's concurrent program, which automatically creates
invoices in Oracle Payables and matches them with PO's automatically for the
received amount. The short name for the program is POXPOIV.


Q2. What is the minimum set-up required?

A: 1. In Oracle Purchasing responsibility, navigate to Supply base ->Suppliers.
Query the supplier to be used in the PO and Query the site to be used in PO. In
the General Tab, check the checkboxes for PAY SITE and PURCHASING. In the
Purchasing tab, the Pay on field should have a value of' Receipt'. The invoice
summary level should also have the value of 'Receipt'.
2. Apart from the above set-up in R11i, we need to enter the value of ?Receipt?
against the Pay on field in the Terms window of the PO.




Q3. What is the impact of payables options on ERS?

A: From Payables options, under GL date basis there are four options. The
accounting date will be based on the option selected here. Make sure that the
date is in the open period.


Q4. How can we identify the invoices created by Pay on receipt?

A: The invoices created by ERS will have ERS prefix generally. To identify the
invoice created for a particular receipt we can query with the combination of ERS
and receipt number in the invoice number field. In R11i, the profile option PO:
ERS invoice number prefix can be set as needed which can be used to identify the
invoices.


Q5. What are the parameters passed?

A: For R107 and R11, the parameters passed are Parameter name value:
1. Transaction Source - ERS
2. Commit interval- default 1
3. Organization- Receiving org
4. Receipt Number- optional
If a receipt number is not specified all the receipts for that organization, which are
eligible for Pay on Receipt, are picked. For R11i, the organization parameter does
not exist instead a new parameter called Aging period exists.


Q6. What is the significance of Ageing Period (R11i)?

A: The parameter Aging period determines the transactions on the receipt that
can be considered for the invoice creation. For ex if aging period is given as 1,
then all the transactions that have a transaction date less than or equal to the
(sysdate-1) are considered for invoice creation. The aging period can be set thru


the profile option PO: ERS Aging period.


Q7. How can we debug what went wrong?

A: We can refer to the log file and check for error messages in
po_interface_errors.
There could be many errors. Listed below are some common errors and possible
resolutions.
1) Error Occurred in routine: create_invoice_header - Location: 110. Please refer
note 1071391.6.
2) Pay on receipt Autoinvoice does not create any invoice. Please ensure the
setup is complete in payables and Purchasing modules.
3) You have a supplier who has a separate site for purchasing and Payables. When
running the ERS (Evaluated Receipt Settlement) it is selecting the purchasing site
and therefore does not create the invoice and gets a message that the POXPOIV:
'pay site is invalid'.
4) Purchasing Pay on Receipt Autoinvoice shows multiple occurrences of same
receipt number in multiorg environment. See Note 95384.1 for the solution.
5) Pay On Receipt AutoInvoice errors: po_inv_cr_invalid_gl_period.
Q8. Does ERS work for unordered receipts?

A: No. ERS does not work for unordered receipts. This means invoice needs to be
created manually for those PO?s that are created from unordered receipts.

Oracle Apps Inventory FAQs

Where do we set Inventory Organization for a particular responsibility??
Through Organizational Access Form

Transaction Source Type:





Item:
Items is a part or service you:
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Purchase
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Sell
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Plan
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Manufacture
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Stock
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Distribute
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Prototype
The following Modules use items:






Item Statuses and Item Attributes:
Status attributes are item attributes that enable key functionality for each item.
An item status is defined by selecting the value check boxes for the status
attributes. Both status attributes and item status can be controlled at the item
level or organization levels.

Item Statuses are:
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->BOM Allowed
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Build in WIP
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Customer Orders Enabled
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Internal Orders Enabled
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Invoice Enabled
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Transactable


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Purchasable
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Stackable

<!--[if !vml]--><!--[endif]-->


Item Attributes
Item attributes are the collection of information about an item.

Stackable, Receivable, Financing Allowed, Purchased, Shippable, Returnable,
Costing Enabled,
Transact able, BOM Allowed, Build in WIP, Purchasable, Customer Orders
Enabled, Internal Orders Enabled, Invoice Enabled, Inventory Item, Revision
Control, Lot Control, Locator Control
Receipt Required, List Price.



Categories and Category Sets
Categories are logical groupings of items that have similar characteristics.
A category set is a distinct category grouping scheme and consists of categories.

Some application modules, Inventory, for example require that all items are
assigned to a category. The user specifies a default category for this purpose in
each of these modules. Categories and category sets are used to group items for
various reports and programs.

Item Categories - Setup
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Define the Flexfield structures for the item
categories Flexfield.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Define categories.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Define category sets and assign the
categories to the sets. Each set can use a different Flexfield definition if required.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Assign default category sets to each
functional area, like Purchasing, Planning and Inventory
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Assign items to categories. An item can be
assigned to only one category within a set.

Item Cataloging
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Item cataloging is used to add descriptive
information to items and to partition the Item Master into groups of items that
share common characteristics. The characteristic required to uniquely define an


item in each group is configured in advance. While defining items, these
characteristics are assigned to an item catalog group.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]--> While the catalog group Flexfield is a
required setup, item cataloging is optional.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->To define a catalog, as many distinct item
catalog groups as needed can be defined. Each group has unique characteristics
(called descriptive elements) that completely describe items belonging to the
group.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->When assigning an item to an item catalog
group, values for the descriptive elements that apply to the item are defined. For
example, an item catalog group called Computer could have a descriptive element
called Processing Speed. Possible values for Processing Speed might be 100MHZ,
133MHZ, and so on.


Transaction
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A transaction is an item movement into,
within, or out of inventory. A transaction changes the quantity, location, or cost of
an item. Inventory supports a number of predefined and user-defined transaction
types.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Every material movement has a
corresponding set of accounting transactions that Oracle Inventory automatically
generates.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->All transactions validate the various controls
(revision, locator, lot number, and serial number) enabled for items.

Inventory Organization


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->An inventory organization can be a physical
entity like a warehouse where inventory is stored and transacted.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->An inventory organization can be a logical
entity like an item master organization which only holds items with no
transactions An inventory organization can have its own location with a set of
books, a costing method, a workday calendar, and a list of items.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->An inventory organization can share one or
more of these characteristics with other organizations.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->An inventory organization is an inventory
location with its own set of books, costing method, workday calendar and list of
items. An organization can be a company, subsidiary, or warehouse.

Consider the following when you plan your enterprise structure:
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Sets of Books: You can tie one Oracle
General Ledger set of books to each inventory organization.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Costing Methods: You set your costing
method (Standard or Average) at the organizational level. The item attribute
control level determines the costing organization.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Item Costs: Oracle Inventory keeps one cost
per item per inventory organization.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Movement between Inventory Sites: You
can use in-transit inventory for inter-organization transfers.
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Planning Method: You can choose how to
plan your items.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Forecasting: You can forecast your items.


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Accuracy Analysis: You can perform a cycle
count, or a physical inventory


Item validation organization
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Item validation organization is a logical
entity listing all the items that an enterprise sells to customers. Multiple item
validation organizations can be listed that share the same item master
organization.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A minimum of one item validation
organizations is required per set of books.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A maximum of one item validation
organization per operating unit is allowed to determine the items that may be
sold in each operating unit.

Item Master Organization
Item Master Organization is usually the first Inventory organization that is set
up. Its single purpose is for entering items. It has no sub inventories and is not
used for inventory transactions. Items are entered in an item master organization
and then assigned to be used in child organizations.

Child Organization
Child Organization is an inventory organization with at least one subinventory
that is set up for processing inventory transactions. It is not used to enter
items. It gets a list of items from the master.



What is Item Master organization and Child Organization?
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Item Master Organization is usually the first
Inventory organization that is set up. Its single purpose is for entering items. It
has no sub inventories and is not used for inventory transactions. Items are
entered in an item master organization and then assigned to use in child
organizations.

<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Child Organization is an inventory
organization with at least one sub inventory that is set up for processing inventory
transactions. It is not used to enter items. It gets a list of items from the master.

What is the purpose of Organization Assignment?
After defining an Item in the Item master, it has to be assignment to the
Organization and is known as Organization Assignment. The purpose of the
Organization Assignment is to make the item available for Transactions in
particular Organizations.

What are Organization Assignment and Organization Item?
Item can be enabled in all child organizations under master organization or child
organizations where the item to be used is chosen. Inventory propagates item to
all organizations in which the item is to be defined.

Organizational attributes for item attributes which are enabled in that
organization, can be entered or changed which are enabled in that
organization. For example, go to an organization to choose reorder point
planning for an item, and then go to another organization and choose Min-Max
planning for the same item.



Deletion Constraints and Deletion Groups
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->If you want to enforce specific business rules
and add custom checks before you can delete an item, you must define item
deletion constraints to supplement the standard predefined item deletion
conditions.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->You can delete items that have incorrect
attribute information. For example, if you make a mistake in entering an item
number, use the Deletion Groups window to delete the item.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->If you decide to purge the item immediately
after incorrectly defining it and before using it anywhere in the system, you will
be able to delete it.

Subinventory
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A sub inventory is a Subdivision of an
organization, representing either a physical area or a logical grouping of items,
such as a storeroom or receiving dock

<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A subinventory is a physical or logical
grouping of inventory, such as raw material, finished goods, defective material, or
a freezer compartment.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->The subinventory is the primary place where
items are physically stocked. A subinventory must be specified for every inventory
transaction
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Sub inventories can be further divided into
areas designated as locators.



Each subinventory must contain the following information:
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Unique alphanumeric name
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Status
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Cost Group (feature enabled if you have
WMS installed)
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Parameters
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Lead times
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Sourcing information
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Account information


Inventory Controls
Any combination of the four controls can be implemented for each item.
Inventory controls are optional for all items
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Locator
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Revision
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Lot
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Serial Number

Stock Locator / Locator Control
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Locators are optional structures within sub
inventories.


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Locators are the third level in the enterprise
structuring scheme of Oracle Inventory.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Locators may represent rows, aisles, or bins
in warehouses. Items can be received directly into and shipped items directly
from locators.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->You can structure your Oracle Inventory
installation so some of the subinventories and items have locator control while
others do not. If locator control is turned on at the item level, you must specify a
locator when transacting the item into or out of a subinventory. If locator control
is turned on at the subinventory level, you must specify a locator when
transacting any item into or out of that subinventory. Each stock locator you
define must belong to a subinventory, and each subinventory can have multiple
stock locators. The possible locator control types are:
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->None
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Pre-specified
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Dynamic entry
<!--[if !supportLists]-->o <!--[endif]-->Item Level

Explaining Locator Control Reports

Locator Quantities Report
You use the Locator Quantities Report to identify items and their quantities
stored in the specified stock locators. If the stock locator has a zero on-hand
quantity, then the locator is not included in the report.

Locator Listing Report


You use the Locator Listing Report to list stock locators you defined. You also use
this report to review volume and weight allowed in a location before transacting
items.


Revision Control
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A revision is a particular version of an item,
bill of material, or routing.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->By using the Revision control option while
defining items item quantities can be tracked by item revision. To do so a revision
is a must for each material transaction.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Revision control is enabled for items for
which version changes or changes that are significant enough to track but are not
affecting the function and feature of the item are tracked.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Revision Control item attributes cannot be
changed when an item has quantity on hand.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->When defining Revision numbers letters,
numbers and characters such as A, A1, 2B, etc can be used.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Letters are always in upper case and
numbers may include decimals.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->To ensure that revisions sort properly,
decimals should always be followed by a number.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Revisions are sorted according to ASCII
rules.


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Each revision must be greater than the
previous revision. For example, revision 10 cannot be used after revision 9
because, according to ASCII sorting, 10 precede 9.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->The value entered in the Starting Revision
field in the Organization Parameters window displays as the starting revision for
the item when assigning revisions to an item.
<!--[if !vml]--><!--[endif]--> <!--[if !vml]--><!--[endif]-->



Lot Control
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Inventory provides complete lot number
support for inventory transactions.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A lot identifies a specific batch of an item
that is received and stored in an organization.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Lot control is a technique for enforcing the
use of lot numbers during material transactions, thus enabling the tracking of
batches of items throughout their movement in and out of inventory.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->If Lot Control is turned on for an item, the
lot number must be indicated to perform a transaction.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Lot Control must be turned on at the item
level.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Lot numbers must be assigned whenever
items under lot control are received into inventory.


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->An inventory receipt can be split in to
several lots, as necessary.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Quantities can be added to existing lot
numbers.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Inventory will generate default lot numbers
by using the default lot number generation method which is configured in the
Organization Parameters window during setup.

Explaining Lot Control Reports

Lot Transactions Register
You can use the Lot Transactions Register to report comprehensive lot number
material transaction detail within a specific date range. You can run the report for
a range of lots, items, transactions types, transaction reasons, and
subinventories. You can also specify a specific category set and display
transaction quantities in their primary or transacted unit of measure.

Supplier Lot Trace Report
You can use the Supplier Lot Trace Report to trace a specific lot to its supplier
lots. You can run the report for a range of lot numbers and items and a specific
supplier lot number. The report shows you the lot material transactions related
to the selected items as, lot numbers, transaction dates, and transaction
quantities.

Expired Lots Report


You can use the Expired Lots Report to show lots in your organization that expire
on or before the date you specify. You can run the report for a range of items or
for a specific item only.





Serial Control
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A serial number is an alphanumeric piece of
information assigned to an individual unit of an item. A serialized unit is a
combination of an item number and a serial number.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Individual units of items can be tracked by
using serial numbers. Serial number control is a system technique for enforcing
the use of serial numbers during a material transaction. Serial numbers can be
used to track items over which a very tight control is to be maintained.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->One serial number per unit of an item can
be assigned


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Depending on how Serial Number Control is
set at the Master Item level will determine how serial numbers are generated.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->If No Control is specified as the serial
number control type, no serial number control will be enforced.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->If Predefined is specified as the serial
number control type, serial numbers for that item must be predefined.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->If control At inventory receipt or At sales
order issue, optionally serial numbers for the item can be predefined.

Generating Serial Numbers
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Inventory uses the starting serial number
prefix and the starting serial number specified in the Item screen.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->The process of generating serial numbers is
done through a concurrent report. This does not assign numbers to units in
inventory; it simply reserves serial numbers for an item, for later use.

Serial Genealogy
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Enables to view the composition and
transaction history of a serial-controlled item through a graphical user interface.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Includes all material transactions within an
organization.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Enables to trace serial numbers from an
assembly to all components.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Enables to trace serial numbers from a
component to a final assembly.



Explaining Serial Number Control Reports

Serial Number Transactions Register
You can use the Serial Number Transactions Register to report comprehensive
serial number material transaction detail within a specific date range. You can
run the report for a range of serial numbers, items, transaction types, transaction
reasons, and subinventories. You can also specify a specific category set and
display transaction quantities in their primary or transacted unit of measure.

Serial Number Detail Report
You can use the Serial Number Detail Report to report on information about
current serialized units in your organization for a specific source type or serialized
unit status. Oracle Inventory enables you to run the report for a range of serial
numbers, items, suppliers, and supplier serial numbers.

Item Templates
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Templates are defined sets of attributes that
can be used over and over to create many similar items. Templates make initial
item definition easier and more consistent.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Templates can be applied at any time after
the item is created. Multiple templates can be applied to a single item.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Templates can hold a complete set of
attributes or a partial set. If a partial set, then only values stored in the template
overwrite those on the item


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Users can define their own templates or
predefined templates include:
ATO Model
ATO Item
ATO Option Class
Kit
PTO Model
PTO Option Class
Planning Item
Phantom Item
Subassembly
Purchased
Freight
Finished Good
Outside Processing Item
Reference Item
Supply Item
Product Family

Item Relationships
The following types of relationships can be defined for items:
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Item cross-references


<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Substitute items
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Related items
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Manufacturer part numbers
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Customer item numbers
Relationships between items can be defined to improve purchasing management
and item searching capabilities. Substitute items can be received in Oracle
Purchasing.

Item cross-references
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Crossreference types define relationships
between items and entities such as old item numbers or supplier item
numbers. For example, a crossreference type Old can be created to track the
old item numbers , and a cross-reference type Supplier to track supplier part
numbers.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Multiple cross-reference types can be
assigned to a single item.

What is the Importance of UOM?
A unit of measure (UOM) is a term used along with a numeric value, to specify the
quantity of an item. For example, each is a unit of measure that used to specify
the number of units of an item.

A unit of measure class is a group of units of measure with similar characteristics.
For example, weight can be a unit of measure class with units of measure such
as kilogram, gram, pound, and ounce.



A unit of measure conversion is a mathematical relationship between two
different units of measure.


What is the difference between Organization_Id and Org_Id?
Organization_Id represents Inventory Organization Id.
Org_Id represents Operating Unit Id.

A Global Variable exists in the Oracle Database called CLIENT_INFO, which is 64
byte long. First 10 Bytes are used to store Operating Unit ID(or ORG_ID) for the
multiple organization support feature. Multi-Org views are partitioned by
ORG_ID. The ORG_ID value is stored in CLIENT_INFO variable. (It comes in AP, PO,
AR and OM Levels).

ORGANIZATION_ID For inventory, Mfg and BOM.

Receipt to Issue Life Cycle:
Oracle Inventory uses the receipt to issue process to manage your inventory. The
three main pieces of the process are as follows:

Receiving
When you take delivery of inventory in to your warehouse you receive it. You can
receive inventory using the following applications
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Purchasing


<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Work in Process
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Inventory

Transferring
You can transfer inventory within an organization, and from one organization to
another organization using the following applications
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Shipping
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Order Management
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Work in Process
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Inventory
Issuing
When you send materials out of inventory you issue it. You use the following
applications to issue inventory.
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Order Management
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Purchasing
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Work in Process
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Oracle Inventory


Receiving Inventory
There are different ways you can receive inventory in to stock.



Purchasing
You can receive inventory from outside of your organization using
purchasing. The ways you use purchasing in relation to receiving are:
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Purchase Order Receipt
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Internal Requisition
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->In transit Receipt
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Return Material Authorization
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Unexpected Receipt

Work in Process
You can receive inventory from the manufacturing floor using Oracle Work in
Process
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Component Return
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Negative Component Issue
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Assembly Return

Inventory
You may receive inventory in to stock using the inventory application in the
following ways:
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Miscellaneous Account
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Receipt from Project
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->User Defined
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Inter-organization receipt



Types of Inventory Receipts
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Receipt and Deliver
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Receipt and then Deliver
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Inspection
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Receipt
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Deliver
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Inspection


Transferring Inventory
Different applications can generate requests to transfer inventory.

Shipping
Shipping can generate a transfer to move stock from a finished goods area to a
staging to for shipping.

Order Management
Order management can generate a transfer to move stock from a finished goods
area to a staging area for shipping.

Work in Process


Work in Process can generate a transfer to acquire components for a project.

Inventory
Inventory transfers materials using the following methods:
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Transfer between Organizations
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Replenish materials
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Request transfers

Issuing Inventory
You can issue stock out of inventory using the following applications:

Order Management
Order Management can generate an inventory issue through:
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Sales Orders
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Internal Orders

Purchasing
Purchasing can generate an inventory issue for:
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Return to Vendor materials

Work in Process
Work in process can generate an inventory issue through:


<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Component Issue
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Assembly Return

Inventory
You can issue stock using the inventory application in the following ways:
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->User Defined
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Inter Organization Transfer
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Cycle Count Negative
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Request Issue

Transaction Types:
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Receive items into your organization using a
general ledger account number
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Issue items from your organization using
general ledger account number
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Transfer items from a subinventory in your
organization to another subinventory in the same organization
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Transfer items directly between
organizations
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Transfer items between organizations by
way of intransit
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Reserve items for a specific account or
temporarily prevent the release of items onto the shop floor



A transaction type is the combination of a transaction source type and a
transaction action. It is used to classify a particular transaction for reporting and
querying purposes.

<!--[if !vml]--><!--[endif]-->
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A transaction type is the combination of a
transaction source type and a transaction action.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->It is used to classify a particular transaction
for reporting and querying purposes.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Oracle Inventory also uses transaction types
to identify certain transactions to include in historical usage calculations for ABC
analysis or forecasting.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->A number of transaction types are
predefined in Oracle Inventory. The user can also define additional types by
setting up new combinations of source types and actions.

Transaction Source Type
You use a transaction source type with a transaction action; it uniquely identifies
the type of transaction performed. Oracle Inventory provides the following
predefined transaction source types. You can define additional source
types. Predefined transaction types are as follows:
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Purchase Order
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Account Alias
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Move Order
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Internal Order


<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Standard Cost
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Update
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Internal Requisition
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Sales Order
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Cycle Count
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Periodic Cost Update
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Physical Inventory
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->RMA (Return Material Authorization)
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Inventory
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Job or Schedule

Transaction Action
You use transaction actions with a source type. A transaction action identifies a
transaction type. Oracle Inventory provides the following transaction actions:
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Assembly completion
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Issue from stores
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Subinventory transfer
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Direct organization transfer
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Cycle count adjustment
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Physical inventory adjustment
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Intransit receipt
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Intransit shipment


<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->WIP assembly scrap
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Cost update
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Receipt into stores
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Negative component issue
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Delivery adjustments
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Negative component return
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Assembly return
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->Vendor Managed Inventory Planning
Transfers

Transaction Managers
Transaction mangers control the number of transaction workers, processing
intervals and the number of transactions processed by each worker during each
interval.

These run at the periodic intervals you specify until you disable them with the
concurrent manager.

Cost Transaction Manager
The material cost transaction manager must run to cost material transactions.

Remote Procedure Manager


Remote procedure manager processes online inventory transactions WIP initiates,
such as completions or component issue.

Material Transaction Manager
Immediately executes a material transaction after you save your changes in a
transaction window.

Move Transaction Manager
The move transaction manager moves assemblies received from an outside
processing supplier to the next operation.
You do not have to launch the other transaction managers if you decide to
process your transactions on-line, and do not use the transaction interface.


What are the Types of Inventory Transactions?
Miscellaneous Transactions
This transaction is used to do adjustments in stock due to damage, obsolescence,
issuing items for R & D or issuing track able expense items.

Subinventory Transfer
This transaction is used to transfer goods from one stockroom to another with in
the same inventory organization.
Use the Subinventory transfer window to:


Transfer material within your current organization between sub inventories, or
between two locators within the same subinventory

We can transfer from asset to expense subinventories, as well as from tracked to
nontracked subinventories. If an item has a restricted list of subinventories, we
can only transfer material from and to subinventories in that list.


Inter ORG Transfers
This transaction is used to transfer goods from one inventory organization to
another.

Interorganization Direct Shipment
You use the Interorganization Transfer window to move inventory directly from a
shipping organization to a destination organization.

<!--[if !vml]--><!--[endif]-->
Interorganization Intransit Shipment
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->When you perform the transfer
transaction, you do not need to specify the delivery location.
<!--[if !supportLists]--> <!--[endif]-->You only need to enter the subinventory
you are shipping from, a shipment number, the freight information, and, a
percentage of the transaction value or a discrete amount that Oracle Inventory
uses to compute transfer charges.




<!--[if !vml]--><!--[endif]-->

<!--[if !vml]--><!--[endif]-->


Transfer type:
Direct: Inter-organization transfers move inventory directly from the shipping
organization to the destination organization.

Intransit: Inter-organization transfers move inventory to intransit inventory first.
You can track this inventory until it arrives at the destination organization.

Receiving Transactions
This transaction is used to move goods from receiving dock to specified
subinventory and locator.

Sales Issue
This transaction is used to move goods from pick subinventory to staged
subinventory.

WIP Issue
This transaction is used to issue materials against production orders.



Note: WIP issue and Sales issue will not be covered as part of Oracle inventory
training. These two inventory transactions will be covered in Oracle Shipping and
WIP training

You Can Perform the Following Oracle Inventory Transactions
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Receive items into your organization from a
general ledger account number
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Issue items from your organization to a
general ledger account number
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Transfer items from a subinventory in your
organization to another subinventory in the same organization
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Transfer items directly between
organizations
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Transfer items between organizations by
way of in-transit
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Reserve items for a specific account or
temporarily prevent the release of items onto the shop floor

What is Move Order?
A move order is a request for a sub inventory transfer or account issue. The pick
release process creates move orders which are pre-approved requests for sub
inventory transfers to bring material from its source locations in the warehouse to
a staging sub inventory. Reservations created for sales orders are automatically
updated and transferred you as the move order is released and transacted.



It is a transaction type in inventory. It is used to make sub inventory
transfers. Shipping Execution uses it to move the items during the shipping
process into a stage area before the items are really shipped to the customer.

Anatomy of a Move order:
Oracle Order Picking and Shipping stores the move order source type in the
header. This refers to the entity that created the move order. An order could be
a pick wave (for sales order picks) a replenishment type, a requisition for sub
inventory transfer and so on. Order Picking and Shipping also stores the default
source and destination if available, the order number, and the requested date.

The lines are the requests on that move order. They store the item, requested
quantity, completed quantity (if the move order has been partially fulfilled), a
source and destination if known, and any project and task references if the
organization is Project Manufacturing enabled. The user can also request specific
serial or lot numbers if know, on the move order line.

The line details are the Inventory transactions that occur to fulfill a particular
request line (move order line). If the material is locator, lot, or serial controlled,
this information is filled in at the line detail level. These details are automatically
filled in by Oracle Inventory using the Inventory Picking Rules and the Item -
Transaction defaults (for destination locators), or the user can manually fill in the
details. These details can be edited prior to transaction by a user.

The Move Order Line Details (transaction lines) created by the detailing process
must be transacted to confirm the material drop-off in staging. This process is
called Pick Confirmation.
Pick confirmation executes the subinventory transfer that moves the material
from its source location in the warehouse into the staging location. Pick


Confirmation automatically transfers the high level reservation to a detailed
reservation (including lots, subinventory, revisions, and locators) in the staging
location. At pick confirmation, a user can report a missing quantity or change the
transaction line if the picker chose to use material from a different lot, serial,
locator, or subinventory. If an organizations picks rarely deviate from the
suggested picking lines and the overhead of requiring a Pick Confirmation is
unmanageable, the Pick Confirm transactions can occur immediately after the
lines are detailed. This option is called auto pick confirm. Users can set up a
default Pick Confirm policy in the Inventory organization parameters. This default
can be overridden at each Pick Release.

Note that even if an automatic pick confirm is employed, the material is only
transacted to the staging subinventory and reserved. A user can still manage any
discrepancies found by deleting the reservation and transacting the material back
to its original subinventory. If mobile devices such as bar code scanners are used
to perform inventory transactions, you should use manual pick confirmation for
greatest inventory accuracy and control.

Move Order Source Types
Oracle Inventory Release 11i provides three types of move orders.
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Move Order Requisitions
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Replenishment Move Orders
<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Pick Wave Move Orders
The move order type refers to the entity that created the move order. For all
move orders, the final result is one of the two supported transactions:
subinventory or move order issue.



Move Order Requisition
The requisition is a manually generated request for a move order. You must
create a move order requisition. You can generate requests for subinventory
transfers or move order issues. The requisition can optionally go through an
Oracle Workflow approval process before it becomes a move order. If no approval
process is used, the requisition becomes a move order immediately.

Replenishment Move Order
These move orders are generated by kanban cards where the pull sequence calls
for a subinventory transfer (intra-organization kanbans), or by min-max planned
items where the items replenishment source (set at the item-sub inventory level)
is another sub inventory. In this case, the min-max or replenishment count report
automatically generates a move order. Replenishment move orders are pre-
approved and ready to be transacted.

Pick Wave Move Order
The pick release process generates move orders to bring the material from its
source location in stores to a staging location, which you define as a subinventory
in Oracle Inventory. This transaction is a subinventory transfer. These move
orders are generated automatically by the Oracle Shipping Execution pick release
process. These orders are pre-approved and ready to transact. Pick slips and other
shipping and inventory reports will also be available with Oracle Order
Management.

Allocating Move Orders
Allocating is the process in Oracle Inventory that uses picking rules and item
transaction defaults to suggest move order line details to fulfill a move order line.
The line details are the inventory transactions that must be fulfilled to complete


the move order line. You can consider the allocating process as a sourcing
process. Allocating occurs when you click the Allocate button in the move order
transaction window.

Suggesting Sources
Oracle Inventory uses the picking rules you set up at the organization or
organization-item level, to suggest source locators, revisions, and lots to source
the material in order to fulfill a move order line.


Suggesting a Destination
The picking rules only suggest source locations. If the destination subinventory is
locator-controlled and no locator was specified on the move order line, Oracle
Inventory generates a suggestion based on the item subinventory locator default
you set up for move orders. Before release 11i, the item subinventory defaults
were used only for put away locations in the receiving process. You can now set
up a default locator for each item that you want to move around the warehouse
on a move order. This is not the same default type that you would use for
receiving or shipping.

Oracle Shipping
Oracle Shipping provides two choices for when and how the user will fill in the
line details. These choices are made by setting up an organization parameter but
can be overridden at pick release.



<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Auto allocate --the allocating process is
done at pick release instantly after the move order is created. No more human
intervention is needed and the pick slip can be printed automatically.

<!--[if !supportLists]-- <!--[endif]-->Pick release only creates move orders but
does not fill in the line details. A user must navigate to the move order form after
pick release and press the Allocate button. This option allows warehouse
managers to determine when to release the pick to the floor and might be a
better solution for implementations running a global order entry with distributed
warehouse management and/or shipping. In these cases orders can be released
to regional warehouses from the central order management location in advance
and individual warehouses can schedule picks closer to actual ship time.

What is Transact Order?
Once the lines have been allocated, you can commit all of the transactions for a
single move order line by selecting the lines you want to transact and clicking the
Transact button. You can save and exit the move order line details without
transacting if you need to print a pick slip report. This enables you to transact
each detail line before or after picking the material.

If the user transacts less than the requested quantity, the order remains open
until the full quantity is transacted or the order is closed or canceled.

What does the Auto Detail option do?
Pick Release always creates a Move Order transaction. When you check
this option in the Pick Release parameters, the Pick Engine creates
transaction lines suggestions. This is a suggestion of sourcing material and it
is called "Detailing". The Detailing also creates a high level reservation on the


material if no reservations previously existed. The Detailing can be made
manually.

What does the Auto pick Confirm option do?
This option should be active if you want the Pick Engine to accept the suggested
values during Detailing. It can be activated only if you select the Autodetail
option.

Oracle Apps AR Interview Questions

1. What is TCA? Tables?
A) Trading Community Architecture. It is a centralized repository of business
entities such as Partners, Customers, and Organizations etc. It is a new framework
developed in Oracle 11i.
HZ_PARTIES: The HZ_PARTIES table stores basic information about parties that
can be shared with any relationship that the party might establish with another
party. Although a record in the HZ_PARTIES table represents a unique party,
multiple parties can have the same name.


The parties can be one of four types:
Organization for example, Oracle Corporation
Person for example, Jane Doe
Group for example, World Wide Web Consortium
Relationship for example, Jane Doe at Oracle Corporation.

HZ_LOCATIONS: The HZ_LOCATIONS table stores information about a delivery or
postal address such as building number, street address, postal code, and
directions to a location. This table provides physical location information about
parties (organizations and people) and customer accounts.

HZ_PARTY_SITES: The HZ_PARTY_SITES table links a party (see HZ_PARTIES) and a
location (see HZ_LOCATIONS) and stores location-specific party information. One
party can optionally have one or more party sites. One location can optionally be
used by one or more parties. This party site can then be used for multiple
customer accounts within the same party.


HZ_CUST_ACCT_SITES_ALL
HZ_CUST_SITE_USES_ALL
HZ_CUST_CONTACT_POINTS etc.
2. What are Base Tables or Interface Tables for Customer Conversions,
Autolockbox, Auto Invoice?
A) Customer Conversion:
Interface Tables :RA_CUSTOMERS_INTERFACE_ALL, RA_CUSTOMER_PROFILES_INT_ALL,
RA_CONTACT_PHONES_INT_ALL,
RA_CUSTOMER_BANKS_INT_ALL,
RA_CUST_PAY_METHOD_INT_ALL
Base Tables :RA_CUSTOMERS, RA_ADDRESSES, RA_SITE_USES_ALL,
RA_CUSTOMER_PROFILES_ALL, RA_PHONES etc
B) Auto Invoice:
Interface
Tables :RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL,RA_INTERFACE_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL,
RA_INTERFACE_SALESCREDITS_ALL,RA_INTERFACE_ERRORS_ALL
Base Tables :RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL, RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES_ALL,
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL, RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL,RA_CUST
_TRX_TYPES_ALL
C) AutoLockBox:
Interface Tables :AR_PAYMENTS_INTERFACE_ALL (POPULATED BY IMPORT
PROCESS)
Interim tables : AR_INTERIM_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL (All Populated by Submit
Validation) :
AR_INTERIM_CASH_RCPT_LINES_ALL, AR_INTERIM_POSTING
Base
Tables : AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL,AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL,
AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL ( All Populated by post quick cash)
3. What are the tables in which Invoices/transactions information is stored?
A) RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL, The RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL table stores invoice,
debit memo, commitment, bills receivable, and credit memo header information.
Each row in this table includes general invoice information such as customer,
transaction type, and printing instructions.

RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES_ALL, The RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_LINES_ALL table stores
information about invoice, debit memo, credit memo, bills receivable, and
commitment lines (LINE, FREIGHT and TAX).



RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL, The RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL
table stores sales credit assignments for invoice lines. If Receivables bases your
invoice distributions on sales credits, a mapping exists between the sales credit
assignments in this table with the RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL table.

The RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL table stores the accounting records for
revenue, unearned revenue, and unbilled receivables for each invoice or credit
memo line. Oracle Receivables creates one row for each accounting distribution,
and at least one accounting distribution must exist for each invoice or credit
memo line. Each row in this table includes the General Ledger account and the
amount of the accounting entry.

The RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_SALESREPS_ALL table stores sales credit assignments for
invoice lines. If Receivables bases your invoice distributions on sales credits, a
mapping exists between the sales credit assignments in this table with the
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL table.
4. What are the tables In which Receipt information is stored?
A) AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL, The AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL table
stores all transactions except adjustments and miscellaneous cash receipts.
Oracle Receivables updates this table when activity occurs against an invoice,
debit memo, chargeback, credit memo, on-account credit, or receipt.
Transaction classes determine if a transaction relates to either the
RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL table or the AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL table. Using the
CUSTOMER_TRX_ID foreign key column, the AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL table
joins to the RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL table for non-payment transaction entries,
such as the creation of credit memos, debit memos, invoices, chargebacks, or
deposits. Using the CASH_RECEIPT_ID foreign key column, the
AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL table joins to the AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL table
for invoice-related payment transactions.

AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL, The AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL table stores one record for
each receipt that you enter. Oracle Receivables concurrently creates records in
the AR_CASH_RECEIPT_HISTORY_ALL, AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL, and
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL tables for invoice-related receipts. For
receipts that are not related to invoices, such as miscellaneous receipts,


Receivables creates records in the AR_MISC_CASH_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table
instead of the AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL table.

AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL, The AR_CASH_RECEIPTS_ALL table stores
one record for each receipt that you enter. Oracle Receivables concurrently
creates records in the AR_CASH_RECEIPT_HISTORY_ALL,
AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL, and AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL tables
for invoice-related receipts. For receipts that are not related to invoices, such as
miscellaneous receipts, Receivables creates records in the
AR_MISC_CASH_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL table instead of the
AR_RECEIVABLE_APPLICATIONS_ALL table. Cash receipts proceed through the
confirmation, remittance, and clearance steps. Each step creates rows in the
AR_CASH_RECEIPT_HISTORY table.
5. What are the tables in which Accounts information is stored?
RA_CUST_TRX_LINE_GL_DIST_ALL
6. What are the different statuses for Receipts?
A) Unidentified Lack of Customer Information
Unapplied Lack of Transaction/Invoice specific information (Ex- Invoice
Number)
Applied When all the required information is provided.
On-Account, Non-Sufficient Funds, Stop Payment, and Reversed receipt.
7. What Customization that you have done for Autolockbox?

8. What is Autolockbox?
A) Auto lockbox is a service that commercial banks offer corporate customers to
enable them to out source their account receivable payment processing. Auto
lockbox can also be used to transfer receivables from previous accounting
systems into current receivables. It eliminates manual data entry by automatically
processing receipts that are sent directly to banks. It involves three steps
Import (Formats data from bank file and populates the Interface Table),
Validation(Validates the data and then Populates data into Interim Tables),
Post Quick Cash(Applies Receipts and updates Balances in BaseTables).
9. What is Transmission Format?
A) Transmission Format specifies how data in the lockbox bank file should be
organized such that it can be successfully imported into receivables interface
tables. Example, Default, Convert, Cross Currency, Zengen are some of the
standard formats provided by oracle.


10. What is Auto Invoice?
A) Autoinvoice is a tool used to import and validate transaction data from other
financial systems and create invoices, debit-memos, credit memos, and on
account credits in Oracle receivables. Using Custom Feeder programs transaction
data is imported into the autoinvoice interface tables.
Autoinvoice interface program then selects data from interface tables and creates
transactions in receivables (Populates receivable base tables) . Transactions with
invalid information are rejected by receivables and are stored in
RA_INTERFACE_ERRORS_ALL interface table.
11. What are the Mandatory Interface Tables in Auto Invoice?
RA_INTERFACE_LINES_ALL, RA_INTERFACE_DISTRIBUTIONS_ALL
RA_INTERFACE_SALESCREDITS_ALL.
12. What are the Set up required for Custom Conversion, Autolockbox and Auto
Invoice?
A) Autoinvoice program Needs AutoAccounting to be defined prior to its
execution.
13. What is AutoAccounting?
A) By defining AutoAccounting we specify how the receivables should determine
the general ledger accounts for transactions manually entered or imported using
Autoinvoice. Receivables automatically creates default accounts(Accounting Flex
field values) for revenue, tax, freight, financial charge, unbilled receivable, and
unearned revenue accounts using the AutoAccounting information.
14. What are Autocash rules?
A) Autocash rules are used to determine how to apply the receipts to the
customers outstanding debit items. Autocash Rule Sets are used to determine the
sequence of Autocash rules that Post Quickcash uses to update the customers
account balances.
15. What are Grouping Rules? (Used by Autoinvoice)
A) Grouping rules specify the attributes that must be identical for lines to appear
on the same transaction. After the grouping rules are defined autoinvoice uses
them to group revenues and credit transactions into invoices debit memos, and
credit memos.
16. What are Line Ordering Rules? (Used by Autoinvoice)
A) Line ordering rules are used to order transaction lines when grouping the
transactions into invoices, debit memos and credit memos by autoinvoice
program. For instance if transactions are being imported from oracle order


management , and an invoice line ordering rule for sales_order _line is created
then the invoice lists the lines in the same order of lines in sales order.
17. In which table you can see the amount due of a customer?
A) AR_PAYMENT_SCHEDULES_ALL
18. How do you tie Credit Memo to the Invoice?
At table level, In RA_CUSTOMER_TRX_ALL, If you entered a credit memo, the
PREVIOUS_CUSTOMER_TRX_ID column stores the customer transaction ID of the
invoice that you credited. In the case of on-account credits, which are not related
to any invoice when the credits are created, the PREVIOUS_CUSTOMER_TRX_ID
column is null.

19. What are the available Key Flex Fields in Oracle Receivables?
A) Sales Tax Location Flex field, Its used for sales tax calculations.
Territory Flex field is used for capturing address information.
20. What are Transaction types? Types of Transactions in AR?
A) Transaction types are used to define accounting for different transactions such
as Debit Memo, Credit Memo, On-Account Credits, Charge Backs, Commitments
and invoices.

You might also like